C-20 Dae

GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND

TRAINING
Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI
Globally Competitive
CURRICULUM (C-20)
For Polytechnic Diploma Courses
in Andhra Pradesh
3 YEAR (REGULAR)
DIPLOMA IN
AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
1
CURRICULUM -2020
(C-20)
3 YEAR (REGULAR)
DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI
2
CURRICULUM -2020
( C-20 )
FOR DIPLOMA COURSES IN ANDHRA PRADESH
PREAMBLE
The proposed programme intends to develop a skilled technician to support the industries both
nationally or globally. It also helps to kindle the spirit of entrepreneurship with necessary skills and
theoretical inputs aligning with the National policy of ‘Make in India’. The programme also provides
for accomplishing higher education goals for those who wish to enrich their theoretical concepts
further.
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been offering Diploma
programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake holders: industries, students,
academia, parents and the society at large. As such, it has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to keep
the curriculum abreast with the advances in technology through systematic and scientific analysis of
current curriculum and bring out an updated revised version at regular intervals. Accordingly the
SBTET, AP under the aegis of the Department of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh in it’s 57th
Board Meeting held on 05-02-2019 (vide item no: 18) resolved to update the Polytechnic Curriculum
C-16 with the guidance of National Institute of Technical Teachers Training & Research (NITTTR),
Extension Centre, Vijayawada (ECV), to be implemented with effect from the academic year ‘20-21.
Analysis of Curriculum C-16 (SWOT analysis) started in the month of June-2019. Feedback
was collected from all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior Lecturers, Head of Sections
and Principals for all programmes for this purpose. A series of workshops with subject
experts followed in the subsequent weeks and the draft curricula were prepared for every
programme. Finally, an interactive session with representatives from industries, academia
and subject experts was held on 04.01.2020 for thorough perusal and critique of draft
curricula; and the suggestions received thus received from Industrialists and academia have
been recorded , validated by another set of experienced subject teachers from the
Department of Technical education for incorporation into the Curriculum C-20.
The design of new Curricula for the different diploma programmes has thus been finalised with the
active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh,
and duly reviewed by Expert Committee constituted of academicians and representatives from
industries. Thus, the primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce employable
technicians in the country by correlating the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic
input.
The outcome based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed throughout
the design of this curriculum is designed to meet the requirements of NBA Accreditation,
too.
3
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2020 (C-20) is approved by BoG of SBTET for its
implementation with effect from 2020-21.
Highlights of Curriculum C-20:
1. Duration of course for regular Diploma and for sandwich Diploma is 3 years and 3½ years
respectively.
2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is maintained as Year-
wise pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses and 1 year
Industrial Training is introduced for 3 ½ years Sandwich Diploma courses.
4. Updated subjects relevant to the industry are introduced in all the Diploma courses.
5. CISCO course content has been incorporated into the ECE and CME programmes for
certification from CISCO in lieu of industrial training when students are unable to get
Industrial Training placement in any industry.
6. The policy decisions taken at the State and Central level with regard to environmental science
are implemented by including relevant topics in Chemistry. This is also in accordance with the
Supreme Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
7. Keeping in view of the increased need of communication skills which is playing a major role in
the success of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and
acquiring listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Further as emphasized in
the meetings, Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
8. CAD specific to the branch has been given emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings
using CAD software has been given more importance.
9. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, it is found that the theory content is found to
have more weightage than the Practical content. In C-20 curriculum, more emphasis is given
to the practical content in Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical
skills.
10. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all
the subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional
procedure based.
11. Curricula of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the
suggestions received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment
available in the Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical
sessions are identified to confirm to the field requirements of industry.
12. An exclusive section for assessing Higher order Thinking skills (HOTS) has been introduced in
summative evaluation.
Acknowledgements:
It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum C-20.
A series of workshops in three phases were conducted by NITTTR, AP Extension Centre,
Vijayawada involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges & Industries to
analyze the Previous C-16 Curriculum and to design C-20 Curriculum under the guidance of Dr
C. R. Nagendra Rao, Professor & Head, NITTTR-ECV. The efforts & support extended by
NITTTR to bring out final Curriculum C-20 by incorporating needs, aspiration & expectations
of all stake holders is highly appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.
4
The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri M.M. Nayak, I.A.S., Special
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, AP. and Sri. G. Anantha Ramu,
I.A.S., Principal Secretary, Department of Skill Development and Training for their guidance
and valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying and updating the Curriculum C-20.
The Members acknowledge with thanks the guidance & inspiration provided by Sri. V.S. Dutt,
Secretary, SBTET, Andhra Pradesh and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education
and the State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh, experts from industry,
academia from the universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity
from the Polytechnics who are directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-20 CURRICULUM
1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES

All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years or 3½
years duration of academic instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on year wise pattern in the first year, and the remaining two
or two & half years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of few courses like Diploma in
Bio-Medical course, the training will be in the seventh semester. Run-through system is
adopted for all the Diploma Courses, subject to eligibility conditions.
2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this regard
from time to time.
a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET)
conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh,
Vijayawada.
Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible to appear
for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
b) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of their
Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to production of
proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or compartmentally
at the time of admission.
c) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra Pradesh
from time to time.
d) For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification is
10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued
for admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy
3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
5
4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in
sessional work and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for
promotion etc., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each admitted
candidate to maintain academic records.
5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER / YEAR:

a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic
Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180 days
excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any
reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to complete the syllabus.
6 ELIGIBILITY (ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION)
a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all subjects, if he or
she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and
below 75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1st year and
not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end examination of
that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-admission for
that semester / 1st year when offered in the next subsequent academic semester/year.
f) For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the
student shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.
7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/
Regional Joint Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D. Pharmacy
course or first year course in Engineering and Non Engineering Diploma streams).
Otherwise such cases shall not be considered for readmission for that semester / year
and are advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent eligible academic year.
The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated from the
first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester, as officially
announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported
to the class work.
6
8 SCHEME OF Evaluation
a) First Year
THEORY Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with examination of 3
hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional
marks). However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.
Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional
marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying
60 marks. However, there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.
b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

THEORY Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a
maximum of 80 marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3hours duration 40/20
sessional marks.
9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME

a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding sessional marks
on the dates specified. Three unit tests shall be conducted for I year students and two
Unit Tests for semesters.
Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40 marks.
For each test
The average of marks of all the test, reduced to 20 shall be taken as final sessional in any
case.
b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:
The award of sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the following
table
Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)
Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks
From the From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular Class
THREE Unit Class work Exercises. work Exercises.
Tests.
All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further scrutiny by a
competent authority
7
(ii) Laboratory Courses:
Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during the year/
semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing) here
after shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s performed by
the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP &
NITTTR- ECV and posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and shall be
prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses be prepared as
per SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the course
of study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned
Teacher.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners. External
examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective Head of
Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii)Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL,APSRTC,APSEB
etc.,
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoDs from Govt.Polytechnic
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in (c)
above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in respect of
drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments / exercise
prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing, trouble shooting,
repair, assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical Courses
are to be maintained for official inspection.
8
g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and
Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:
Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
1 12 weeks 1.The faculty Learning outcomes as given in 120

concerned and the scheme of assessment
2. Training Mentor ,for Industrial Training
of the industry
2 22 weeks 120
1.The faculty 1.Demonstration of any one

member of the skills listed in learning
3.Final
concerned, outcomes 30
summative 24 weeks
2.HoD concerned
Evaluation
and 2.Training Report 20
3.An external
examiner 3.Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 300
10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

THEORY EXAMINATION:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end examination marks
put together.
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:
For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting and short
hand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for typewriting and
Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.
INDUSTRIAL ASSESSMENT:
Pass marks is 50% in assessment at Industry ( I and II assessments put together) and also
50% in final summative assessment at institution level
11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT

Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from First Year
to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.
b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the
succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the duration
including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the year of first
admission.
9
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or
Industrial Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations hold good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under Mal-
practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall deposit
the original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original Diploma
Certificate to the Board. If there is improvement in performance of the current
examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and Original Diploma Certificate will be
issued, else the submitted originals will be returned.
12. RULES OF PROMOTION FROM 1ST YEAR TO 3,rd, 4,th 5th ,6th and 7th SEMESTERS:
A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate
who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time
before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee
as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training AP from time to
time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) Should not have failed in more than four Courses in 1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if
he/she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if
he/she clears at least two Courses in third semester.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
10
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
The first backlog exam in 5th semester will be conducted only in
instant/supplementary diploma examination.
For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:
v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in the

required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pay the examination
fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-

voce)
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th semester
Industrial Training
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th semester
Industrial Training.
b) should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he / she puts
in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e.
attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay
the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay
the 1st year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board
of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 rd
semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she
a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

b). Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year.
11

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he / she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of attendance,
which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-VOCE examination at
the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from
time to time before commencement of 7th semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th semester Examination.
b) Should not have failed more than four backlog Courses of 3rd Semester
C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):
The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this course. The
industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6 months) after the
6th semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%)
i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65%
and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the 3rd semester examination fee, has to pay the
12
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 3rd
Semester.
v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay the
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and
b) should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee
prescribed by SBTET from time to time before commencement of the 7th semester
(Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training
13
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training.
Important Note:
Seminar/Viva-voce should not be conducted for Not-Eligible Candidates, till the candidate
gets eligibility. However, the record of internal Assessment for Industrial Training for 260
marks shall be maintained at Institution Level for all candidates and the data is to be
uploaded only for eligible candidates. For not eligible candidates the data is to be
uploaded as and when the candidate gets eligibility.
OTHER DETAILS
a) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she
will have to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
b) The First spell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after the completion of
the last theory examination of 4th Semester.
c) The Second spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10 days after the
completion of first spell of Industrial training.
13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall
aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60% marks
and above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall
aggregate of below 60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for computing
overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3 rd and subsequent
Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into diploma
course at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of (100%) marks
secured at the 3rd and subsequent semesters of study shall be taken into
consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks secured by the
candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in the
regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations, from the year of first
admission.
14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical
Education and Training, AP from time to time.
14
15. STRUCTURE OF EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER:
I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three unit tests for first year and two unit tests for semesters shall be conducted with a
duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of part A and
Part B.
Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions first
question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase answer/filling-in the
blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question. The other four questions are
short answer questions and carry three marks each.
Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice ie., Either/Or
type , and each question carries 8 marks.
The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.
b) For drawing Courses:

For I year:
Three unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks shall be
conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.
Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries four
marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).
Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the student shall
answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each question in this part carries
a maximum marks of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).
The sum of marks obtained in 3 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving
at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based
on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.
For semester: Two unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40
marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2 unit test marks shall be
reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are
awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performance during regular class
exercise
c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded based on
continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes and the remaining
50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the students in two tests.
15
II. Summative assessment (End examination)
The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.
a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.
Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All questions are
to be answered and each carries 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.
Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 40 contains 5 essay type questions including Numerical
questions (without any divisions in the question), with internal choice(Either/or type),
each carrying 8 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 8 = 40.
Section ‘C’ with Max marks of 10 contains single essay type, Higher order Thinking skills
question (HoTs)including Numerical questions, without choice (without any divisions in
the question),
Thus the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.
b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.
Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in section
‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.
Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall answer
any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question carries 10
Marks, ie. 4 x 10 = 40.
c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick up a
question paper distributed by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.
16
d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on

Drawing) hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the
Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared
by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per SBTET
rules in vogue.
16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of marks
without any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original memorandum of
marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education
and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from time to time.
17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:
Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the course
from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of
studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the
award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date).
This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-
engineering courses.
18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the following
academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years & not more
than 6 / 7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma within
6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course &
their seat shall stand cancelled.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years & not more
than 4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfill all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma
within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the
course & their seat shall stand cancelled.
17
19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING& REVERIFICATION:
A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.
B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT

i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script should
apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’ and
Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with Course
experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them in the
already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded separately,
without making any changes on the already valued answer script. The marks
awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).
II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the answer
script(s) placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12% of
maximum marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the result of the
candidate, such cases will not be referred to the next level ie., for 2-Tier
evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than 12% of
maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12% of
maximum marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-verification, then the
status of the candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks
on Re-verification and if the marks secured on re-verification are still less
than the minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate remain FAIL only.
18
(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if any
therein on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are
revised, the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the candidate
has to forfeit the fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer

script would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted
to Malpractice in that examination.
20. MAL PRACTICE CASES:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked and
the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations in vogue.
21. DISCREPANCIES/ PLEAS:
Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP within
one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained
in any manner.
22. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA
If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be
issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a
duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P., on
payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a First Class
Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceablecertificate from the Department of Police. In case of
damage of original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by
surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of prescribed fee to the State
Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date
of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the SBTET AP
from time to time.
23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
24.SPECIFIC CHANGES INCORPORATED IN PRESENT CURRICULUM C-20

BRANCH:AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
All the subjects in earlier curricula are reviewed and the following specific changes
are discussed and incorporated.
1. In Engineering Mechanics (C-20 A-105) the topics of friction in screw jack and
journal bearings are added in friction and chapter of dynamics is removed as
those topics are being covered in Engineering Physics.
2. Generating system is included in Automobile Electrical and Electronic System
(A-306)
19
3. Exclusive lab for Automobile Electrical and Electronic systems is introduced in III
semester (A-310)
4. A chapter on Automobile air conditioning system is included in Automobile
chassis and body engineering (A-403).
5. Drawing of Cam profiles is included in Automobile Engineering drawing (A-407)
by deleting from Design of machine elements as it is treated to be more
appropriate in (A-407).
6. Experiments on starting, generating and ignition systems from A-409 (C-16) are
excluded and included in A-310 of C20
7. A lab on Hydraulics and pneumatic control is introduced in IV semester (A-410).
8. Industrial Management and smart technologies is renamed as Industrial
Management (C-20 A-501)
9. Design of engine cylinder, cylinder head, crank shaft, brakes and clutch are
introduced in Design of machine elements (A-502).
10. A new chapter Automobile assembly line and Testing which includes 1. Chassis
dynamometer 2.Crash test 3. Rollover test is introduced in Modern Trends in
Automobile Engineering (C-20 A-504) to suit the requirements of automobile
engineers.
11. A new subject on Electrical and Electric Hybrid Vehicles (C-20 A-505) is
introduced in V semester to sail the Automobile Students Community in the new
era of Advanced Automobile Technologies.
25. GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students,
for whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent
authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training,
AP are within the jurisdiction of Vijayawada.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.
20
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
I YEAR
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period / week
Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
Code Subject Durati Session Total
Practical/ / year Exam
Theory on al
Tutorial Mark Marks
(hours) Marks
s
THEORY:
A-101 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
English
Engineering
A-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics-I
Engineering
A-103 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Physics
Engineering
Chemistry & 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
A-104
Environmental
Studies
A-105 Engineering 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Mechanics
A-106 Workshop 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Technology
PRACTICAL:
Engineering - 6 180 3 40 60 100

A-107 Drawing
Basic Workshop - 6 180 3 40 60 100
A-108 Practice
109-A Physics
A-109 Lab - 3 90 3 40 60 100
109-B Chemistry
Lab
Computer
A-110 - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Fundamentals
Lab
24 18 1260 280 720 1000
TOTAL
21
III Semester
Instruction
period / week Scheme of Examination
Subjec Total
Name of the Subject Durat End Tota
t Code Periods Session
The Practical ion Exam l
al
ory /Tutorial (hour Mark Mar
Marks
s) s ks
THEORY
Engineering
A-301 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - II
Automobile Power
A-302 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Plants
Automobile 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
A-303
Transmission System
Engineering Materials
A-304 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
and Manufacturing
Processes
A-305 Thermal Engineering 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Automobile Electrical
and Electronics 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
A-306
Systems
PRACTICAL
A-307 Machine Drawing - 6 90 3 40 60 100
Automobile Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100

A-308
A-309 Workshop Practice – II - 6 90 3 40 60 100

Automobile Electrical & - 3 45 3 40 60 100
A-310
Electronics Laboratory
TOTAL 24 18 360+270 - 280 720 1000
22
IV Semester
Instruction

Subject Total
Name of the Subject Durat End Total
Code Practic Periods
Theor ion Sessiona Exam
al/Tut Mark
y (hour l Marks Mark
orial s
s) s
THEORY ( for a duration of 9 weeks):
A-401 Engineering 3 45 20 80 100

Mathematics - III
Strength of Materials 5 75 20 80 100
A-402 and Fluid Mechanics
Automobile Chassis
and Body 4 60 20 80 100
A-403
Engineering
Automobile Servicing 4 60 20 80 100
A-404 and Maintenance
Special Purpose 4 60 20 80 100
A-405 Vehicles
Motor Transport 4 60 20 80 100
A-406 Organisation
PRACTICAL
A-407 Automobile - 6 90 3 40 60 100
Engineering Drawing
Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

A-408
Automobile Servicing
A-409 - 6 90 3 40 60 100
and Maintenance
Laboratory
Hydraulic and
A-410 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Pneumatic Controls
Laboratory
TOTAL 24 18 360+270 - 280 720 1000
23
V Semester
Instruction

Total
Subjec Name of the
Practi Period End Total
t Code Subject Duratio Session
cal/T s Exam
Theory n al
utoria Mark Mark
(hours) Marks s
l s
A-501 Industrial 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

Management
Design of Machine 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
A-502 Elements
Production 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
A-503 Technology
Modern Trends in 75
Automobile 5 - 3 20 80 100
A-504
Engineering
A-505 Electric Vehicles 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
A-506 CAD Practice - 6 90 3 40 60 100

IC Engine Testing
A-507 and Vehicle - 6 90 3 40 60 100
Diagnosing Lab
A-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100

A-509
360+2
TOTAL 24 18 - 260 640 900
70
24
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Subject Title Subject Code Duration

Industrial Training A-601 6 Months
Time schedule
S.NO Code TOPICS Duration
 Practical training in Industry

 Training Report Preparation
 Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate,
Six
Acknowledgements, Abstract, Contents (introduction of
1 A-601 Months
Industry, Plant Layout, Organization Chart, List of Major
Equipment’s) List of Processes: Skills Acquired,
Conclusions and References
Scheme of evaluation
SI.N Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

o.
Item Nature Max. Marks
Assessment of Learning
1.First Assessment
outcomes by both the
at Industry (After 12 120
faculty and training
Weeks)
Mentor of the industry
2.Second Assessment of Learning

Industrial Assessment at the outcomes by both the
1 6 months 120
Training Industry (After 22 faculty and training
weeks) Mentor of the industry
Final Summative Training Report 20
assessment at Demonstration of any
institution level 30
one of the skills listed in
learning outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300
25
FIRST YEAR
26
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period / week
Total
Subject Name of the End
Period Durati
Code Subject Session Exa Total
Theor Practical/ / year on
al m
y Tutorial (hours Marks
Marks Mark
)
s
THEORY:
A-101 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
English
Engineering
A-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics-I
Engineering
A-103 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Physics
Engineering
Chemistry & 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
A-104
Environmental
Studies
A-105 Engineering 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Mechanics
A-106 Workshop 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Technology
PRACTICAL:
Engineering - 6 180 3 40 60 100

A-107 Drawing
Basic Workshop - 6 180 3 40 60 100
A-108 Practice
109-A Physics
A-109 Lab - 3 90 3 40 60 100
109-B
Chemistry Lab
Computer
A-110 - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Fundamentals
Lab
24 18 1260 280 720 1000
TOTAL
27
ENGLISH
Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for
Code Title Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
A-101 English 3 90 20 80
S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
Total Periods 90
To improve the skills of English Language use by enriching vocabulary and

learning accurate structures for effective communication.
Course Objectives
To comprehend themes for value based living in professional and personal
settings.
CO No. Course Outcomes

CO1 Applies perceptions of themes related to societal responsibility of adolescents towards
their surroundings.
CO2 Demonstrates knowledge of form and function of ‘grammar items’ and use them in
both academic and everyday situations.
CO3 Demonstrates effective English communication skills with competence in listening,
speaking, reading and writing in academic, professional and everyday contexts.
CO4 Displays positivity and values of harmonious living in personal and professional spheres
as reflected through communication.
28
CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 90
A-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 4
POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks
with CO Column 1 Mapping
No. Number Percentage (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities that
PO2 use content from science and technology relevant to the
PO3 Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for
PO4 communication in the Course.
PO5 CO1, CO2, 20 22 >50%: Level 3
CO3, CO4
PO6 CO1, CO2, 52 58 21-50%: Level 2
CO3, CO4
PO7 CO1, CO2, 18 20 Up to 20%: Level 1
CO3, CO4
Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7
CO 1   
CO 2   
CO3   
CO 4   
NOTE: CO-PO gaps shall be fulfilled through activities that use content from science and technology
relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for communication in the
Course.
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be
planned and conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on
Mathematics and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending
seminars, learning mathematical software tools.
29
Blue Print of Question Paper
S. Name of the Unit Period Weight Marks Wise Question Wise CO's
No. s age Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Alloca Allocat Weightage Weightage
ted ed R U Ap An R U Ap An
CO1,
English for
1 8 3 1 CO2,
Employability
CO3, CO4
1 CO1,
2 Living in Harmony 8 17 3 1 * 1* CO2,
8* CO3, CO4
CO1,
3 Connect with Care 8 3 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
Humour for
4 8 3 1 CO2,
Happiness
1* CO3, CO4
14
8* CO1,
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 3 1 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
6 Preserve or Perish 9 3 CO2,
1 1 CO3, CO4
14 8*
* CO1,
The Rainbow of
7 8 3 CO2,
Diversity
1 CO3, CO4
CO1,
New Challenges -
8 8 CO2,
Newer Ideas
CO3, CO4
8*+ CO1,
1
9 The End Point First! 8 8* 3+3+ 4 1* CO2,
*
3 CO3, CO4
35
CO1,
10 The Equal Halves 8 10* CO2,
CO3, CO4
Dealing with 9 CO1,
11 Disasters CO2,
CO3, CO4
TOTAL 90 80 6 30 34 10 2 5 8 1
PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks All Questions are compulsory : 60 minutes
PART-B: 5 Questions 8 marks each =40 Marks Internal choice : 90 minutes
Part-C: 1 Question 10 marks =10 Marks
(Higher Order Question) No choice, one compulsory question : 30 minutes
30
NOTE: * indicates questions can be given from any of the corresponding lessons in the blue print.
Question Paper Pattern for Unit Tests
Part A: 16 marks: 4 questions with 1 mark each (FIB, True/false, one word/phrase, etc.)
4 questions with 3 marks each (short answer/ descriptive/ applicative questions)
Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions 8 marks each with internal choice
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. English for Employability

1.1. Explain the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences
2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually
3. Connect with Care
3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues for everyday situations
4. Humour for Happiness
4.1. Explain the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Display reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Explain the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary
step for writing a good paragraph.
5. Never Ever Give Up!
5.1. Practice to deal with failures in life.
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking
and writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary.
5.3 Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills.
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Describe the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events.
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment.
6.4. Write e-mails.
7. The Rainbow of Diversity
7.1. Illustrate and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. use different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations
31
8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas
8.1. Explain the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. List the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Explain latest innovations and get motivated
9. The End Point First!
9.1. Illustrate the importance of setting a goal in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life
10. The Equal Halves
10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing
11. Dealing with Disasters
11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster
management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. write different kinds of reports
Textbook: INTERACT (A Textbook for I Year English) - Published by SBTET, AP

Reference Books:
Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised
ByN.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT Books,
S.Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan
32
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C20- A-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-1
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40
PART-A 4X4= 16 marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR Marks.
1. Rewrite / Fill in the blank as directed. Each question carries ½ Mark. (CO2)
a) Write the antonym of ‘cruel’
b) Write the synonym of ‘love’
c) Give prefix to ‘adventure’.
d) Give suffix to ‘ liberate’
e) It is _______ universal truth. (Fill in with suitable article)
f) The boy is fond ____ ice-cream. ( Fill in the blank with proper preposition)
g) He ____not like sweets. (Fill in the blank with correct primary auxiliary verb.)
h) We ________ respect our national flag. ( Fill in with a proper modal verb)
2. Rewrite the sentences as directed. Each question carries One mark. 4X1=4 Marks (CO2)
a) No other metal is so useful as iron. ( Change into superlative degree)
b) Very few students are so clever as Ramesh. ( Change into comparative degree)
c) Guess the contextual meaning of the italicized word in the following sentence.
“The CBI officer has interrogated the bank employees in connection with the scam.”
d) only sings plays Prasanth not also well but cricket. ( Rearrange the jumbled words)
3. Fill in the blanks with proper form of the verb given in brackets. 4X1 = 4 marks (CO2)
The IPSGM _________(hold) in our college last month. Nearly all the colleges in our zone
______(participate) in the event. The prizes ________ (distribute) by the district collector.
Next year, Government Polytechnic, Vijayawada __________ (conduct) the games meet.
4. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: 4X 1= 4 Marks (CO3)
a) The police has arrested the culprit.
b) Three hundred miles are a long distance.
c) The Principal along with the Heads of Sections have visited the laboratories.
d) Either he or I is to blame.
PART-B 3X8=24 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions and each question carries EIGHT marks.
5.Write a dialogue of at least five turns between a shopkeeper and customer about buying a
mobilephone. (CO3)
6. Make an analysis and write a paragraph in around 100 words about your strengths and
weaknesses in learning and using English and also the measures to improve it. (CO3)
7. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on how to overcome low esteem and negativity.
(CO3, CO4)
***
33
C20-A-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-II
PART-A 4X4= 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR marks.
1. Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B (CO2)
Column A Column B
a) Deserve i) continuous
b) hidden ii) protect
c) Preserve iii) worthy
d) Incessant iv) praise
v) unseen
vi) affection
2. Rewrite as directed: (CO3)
a) You ask your Mom to give you another chocolate. ( Change into a request)
b) The baby fell down and got injured. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence)
c) The match was very interesting. ( Frame a question using ‘how’)
d) Hemanth submitted his project report last week. (Frame Yes-No question)
3. Fill in the blanks with appropriate forms of verbs given in brackets: (CO2)
a) The Sun ______ (set) in the west.
b) Balu ______ (sing) for over fifty years in the films.
c) We _________ (see) a camel on the road yesterday.
d) They _______(enter) the stadium before the gates were closed.
4. Change the voice of the following: (CO2)
a) Marconi invented the radio.
b) Sravanthi has been offered a job.
c) Pragathi can type the letter.
d) The Chief Guest will be received by the Final year students.
PART-B 3X8=24 Marks

Answer all the questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
5. Write a letter to your younger brother motivating him to deal with failures and hurdles in life.
(CO3)
6. Write an essay in around120 words on the role of robots in the modern world. (CO3)
7. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: (CO3)
The greatest enemy of mankind, as people have discovered, is not science, but war. Science
merely reflects the social forces by which it is surrounded. It was found that when there is
peace, science is constructive when there is war, science is perverted to destructive end. The
weapons which science gives us do not necessarily create war. These make war increasingly
more terrible. Until now, it has brought us on the doorstep of doom. Our main problem,
therefore, is not to curb science, but to substitute law for force, and international
34
government for anarchy in the relations of one nation with another. That is a job in which
everybody must participate, including the scientists. Now we are face to face with these
urgent questions: Can education and tolerance, understanding and creative intelligence run
fast enough to keep us side by side without our mounting capacity to destroy? That is the
question which we shall have to answer, one way or the other, in this generation. Science
must help us in the answer, but the main decision lies within ourselves. The hour is late and
our work has scarcely begun.
a.What is the chief enemy of man?
b.What does science reflect?
c. When is science perverted?
d. What makes war more terrible?
e.Why do we need international government?
f.What are the four aspects that may stop destruction?
g. Have we really started our work to fight the problem discussed?
h. Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘replace with other one’
***
35
C20-A-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-III
PART-A 4X4 = 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question caries Four marks.
1. Give the meaning of the word in italics: ( CO3)
a) When the girls laughed in the class, the teacher was furious.
b) He was rusticated from the school for his misbehavior.
c) Vikramaditya was a benevolent Indian King.
d) We should not show any discrimination between boys and girls.
2. Change the speech of the following: (CO2)
a) He said, “I am sorry.”
b) The teacher said to the boys, “Why are you late?”
c) Sushma said that she had submitted her report recently.
d) Pratap requested Priya to give him her pen.
a) Though he was weak, he took the test. ( change into a simple sentence)
b) You must work hard to achieve success. ( change into a complex sentence)
c) If you run fast, you will catch the bus. ( change into a compound sentence)
d) The fog disappeared when the Sun rose. ( Split into two simple sentences)
4. Locate eight errors from the following passage and correct them. (CO2)
Once upon a time there live a king who was very kind to his people. In his council of
ministers, there is a wise man. He had a son called Sumanth who was a educated and highly
learned. Once the wise minister fall sick. All the physicists in the country could not heal him.
Then Sumanth will go in search of medicine in Himalayas. He bring the special medicinal roots
to cure his father’s sickness. Sumanth looked before his father carefully and healed him. The
king rewarded Sumanth with rich gifts.
PART- B 3X8 = 24 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions and each one carries eight marks.
5. Read the following paragraph and make notes first and then its summary. (CO3)
Astronauts are people who travel on space ships. They need to have a very clean home. They
travel far from Earth. We need clean kitchens everywhere on earth and in space. Astronauts
have to solve two problems: how to get food and how to keep their spaceship clean. Here is
how they solved the food problem. At first, the astronauts took tubes of food with them into
space. They would squeeze a tube and eat semi-liquid food. It did not taste great, but since
they did not need to take dishes or silverware with them, they had no dishes to wash.
Today’s spaceships have a bigger menu. Astronauts can eat from bowls. In fact, they take
cereal and other standard foods with them. The foods are packaged in special containers to
keep them fresh. They use knives, forks, and spoons. One unusual item on their table is a pair
36
of scissors. They use the scissors to open the food packages. They can eat right from the
package. They have a kitchen on the spaceship. Its oven can heat food to 170 degrees. The
kitchen has water and sets of meals that come on trays. The astronauts choose their menu
before they go into space. They take a lot of food with them. The astronauts keep bread and
fresh fruits and vegetables in a special food locker. How do they keep the kitchen clean? They
do not have to worry about mice or other rodents. They make sure that there are no rodents
before the ship leaves. But sometimes mice travel on the ship. Those mice are part of
experiments. They live in cages. How do astronauts keep their trays clean? That is another
health problem the astronauts solve. They need to stay healthy in space. To carry a lot of
water to wash trays would be a lot of extra weight. They pack wet wipes in plastic bags. They
use them to clean trays. So, their kitchen is clean and they stay healthy.
6. Write an essay in about 120 words on the importance of goal setting and your short and long
term goals. (CO3,CO4)
7. Write a report about the bush fire that raged in Australia recently by using the following
clues: forest, natural disaster, wild fire, dried leaves, no rain fall, wild animals, burnt alive,
loss of flora and fauna, fire fighters, uncontrollable, moderate rains, environmental pollution,
measures to protect...etc. (CO3)
***
37
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION- A.P
Model Question Paper
C20-A-101- ENGLISH
Time: 3hrs Max.Marks:80
PART-A 10X3=30 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries Three marks.
1. a) Fill in the blanks with suitable articles: (CO2)

I have seen _____________ European at ____________local market.
b) Fill in with proper form of adjective given in the bracket: (CO2)
China is the _______country in the world. ( populous, more populous, most populous )
c) i) Choose the synonym from the following for the word : ‘filthy’ (CO3)
dirty / clean / hygienic / tidy
ii) Choose the antonym from the following for the word: ‘exterior’ (CO3)
external / internal / open / interior
2. a) i) Give prefix for the word: ‘popular’ (CO2)
ii) Write suffix for the word : ‘king’ (CO2)
b) He was married ______ her ______ January 2015. ( Fill in with appropriate preposition)
(CO3)
c) Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B: (CO2)
Column-A Column-B
i) Dynamic a) tasty
ii) Gloomy b) active
c) sad
d) proud
3. a) The old man hunted for his spectacles. ( Give the contextual meaning of the word in italics)
(CO3)
b) The committee / have submitted / its report / to the President. ( identify the part which
contains an error ) (CO3)
c) Recently has a scooter purchased Shanthi. ( Rearrange the jumbled words to make a
meaningful sentence.) (CO3)
4. a) Use the following primary auxiliary verb in sentence of your own: (CO2)
‘ does’
b) Fill in the blank with proper modal auxiliary verb based on the clue in the bracket: (CO2)
Harish __________ speak four languages. ( ability)
c) Rakesh wants two hundred rupees from his father. (Write the sentence how he requests
hisFather) (CO2)
5. Fill in the blanks with suitable form of the verb given in brackets: (CO2)
a) He ______ (go) for a walk daily.
b) The bus ________ (arrive) just now.
c) We _______ (live) in Chennai since 2005.
38
6. Change the voice of the following sentences: (CO2)
a) English is spoken all over the world.
b) They watched a movie yesterday.
c) The Chief Minister will inaugurate the exhibition.
7. a) It is a beautiful rainbow. (Change into an exclamatory sentence) (CO3)

b) C.V. Raman won the Nobel Prize in 1930. (Frame a question using ‘When’) (CO3)
c) He can swim across the river. (change into ‘Yes / No’ question ) (CO3)
8. Change the speech of the following: (CO2)

a) He said, “I will go to Delhi tomorrow.”
b) Ravi said to Ashok, “Where are you going?”
c) She told him to mind his own business.

a) In spite of being busy he attended the meeting. ( Rewrite the sentence using ‘though’ )
b) She is poor. She is honest. ( combine the two sentences using ‘but’)
c) On seeing the tiger, he climbed a tree. ( split into two simple sentences)
10. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: (CO2)
a) We have gone to picnic yesterday.
b) Suresh watched T.V when I went to his house.
c) They left Gujarat before the earthquake occurred.
PART-B 5X8=40
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
11. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on what you do daily. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Write a paragraph in about 100 words on the uses and misuses of social media.
12. Construct a dialogue of at least five turns between an American and you about places worth
visiting in your city. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Compose a dialogue of at least five turns between two friends, one favouring homemade food
and the other, fast foods.
13. Write a letter to your parents about your preparation for year-end examinations. (CO3, CO4)
OR
Write a letter to the editor of a newspaper about the inconvenience caused due to loud
speakers in your area.
14. Write an essay in about 120 words on measures to prevent water pollution.
OR
Write an essay in about 120 words on importance of gender equality.
39
15. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: (CO3)
A farmer in ancient China had a neighbour who was a hunter, and who owned ferocious and
poorly trained hunting dogs. They jumped over the fence frequently and chased the farmer's
lambs. The farmer asked his neighbour to keep his dogs in check, but this fell on deaf ears. One
day the dogs again jumped the fence, attacked and severely injured several of the lambs.
The farmer had had enough, and went to town to consult a judge who listened carefully to
the story and said: "I could punish the hunter and instruct him to keep his dogs chained or lock
them up. But you would lose a friend and gain an enemy. Which would you rather have, friend
or foe for a neighbour?" The farmer replied that he preferred a friend. “Alright, I will offer you a
solution that keeps your lambs safe, and which will keep your a neighbour a friend." Having
heard the judge's solution, the farmer agreed.
Once at home, the farmer immediately put the judge's suggestions to the test. He took three
of his best lambs and presented them to his neighbour's three small sons, who were beside
themselves with joy and began to play with them. To protect his son's newly acquired
playthings, the hunter built a strong kennel for his dogs. Since then, the dogs never again
bothered the farmer's lambs. Out of gratitude for the farmer's generosity toward his sons, the
hunter often shared the game he had hunted with the farmer. The farmer reciprocated by
sending the hunter the cheese he had made. Within a short time the neighbours became good
friends.
a) What kind of dogs does the neighbor have?
b) When did the farmer consult the judge?
c) What would be the consequence if the judge punished the neighbor?
d) What was the solution suggested by the judge?
e) What did the neighbour’s sons do with the gifts they received?
f) How did the dogs stop bothering the farmer’s lambs?
g) What items are exchanged happily between the two neighbours?
h) Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘a closed shelter for dogs’.
OR
Read the following short poem and answer the questions that follow:
Crisp in the winter’s morning,
Softly all through the night,
What is this without warning,
Falling and white?
I have never seen snow,

But I can imagine it quite –
Not how it tastes, but I know,
It falls and is white.
One morning I’ll open the door,

To bring in the morning’s milk,
And all around there’ll be snow –
Fallen and still.
40
How I’ll roll in the stuff!
How I’ll tumble and spin!
Until the neighbours cry,
Enough!And send me back in.
Q.1. What is the poem about?

2. How does snow fall?
3. Did you ever touch snow? How did you feel?
4. a) Pick the word from the poem that means ‘slip and fall’
b) Write the antonym for the word ‘soft’
SECTION – C 1X10=10 Marks

16. Write a report on the blood donation camp organized by International Red Cross Society in your
college. Use the following clues: date, time, place, arrangements, donors, equipment, doctors,
response, sponsors, snacks, volunteers, help others, save lives…etc.
***
41
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code Periods/week periods FA SA
Engineering
A-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I
S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped

1 Algebra 31 CO1
2 Trigonometry 44 CO2
3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3
4 Differential Calculus 33 CO4
5 Applications of Differentiation 19 CO4, CO5
Total Periods 150
(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-Ordinate

Course Objectives
Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.
CO1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve

problems on matrices.
Course Outcomes
CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions,
their inverses and complex numbers.
CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and
conic sections in coordinate system.
CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
CO5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using
differentiation.
42
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
Learning Outcomes
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pairs and Cartesian product - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.
1.4 Classify types of functions (into, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective).
1.5 Define inverse functions - examples.
1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned
below into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2
1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.

1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square
matrices).
1.10 Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as associative, distributive, commutative
properties with examples and counter examples.
1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties;
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of a symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices and
provide examples.
1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix, minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix
using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of determinants
to solve problems.
1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse of a
matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
1.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and
matrix inversion method.
UNIT - II
C.O.2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and
complex numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle.
2.2 List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified values.
43
2.3 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions.
2.4 Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.5 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),
tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).
2.6 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.7 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.
2.8 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.9 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles
A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.10 Derive useful allied formulas like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
2.11 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed
2.12 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two
trigonometric ratios into a product and vice versa, examples on these formulae.
2.13 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product
of three or more terms.
2.14 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
2.15 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and
ranges.
2.16 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given
A= sin-1x, express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions
with examples.
2.17 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc.
2
1 1 1  x y 
2.18 Apply formulae like tan x  tan y  tan   , where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc.,
 1  xy 
to solve Simple problems.
2.19 Explain what is meant by solutions of trigonometric equations and find the
general solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.20 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0, a cos x + b sin x=c etc., and
problems using simple transformations.
2.21 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
2.22 Explain the formulae for sin A/2, cos A/2, tan A/2 and cot A/2 in terms of semi-
perimeter s and sides a,b,c and solve problems.
2.23 List various formulae for the area of a triangle.
2.24 Solve problems using the above formulae.
2.25 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
2.26 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
2.27 Define complex number, its modulus , conjugate and list their properties.
2.28 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.29 Define amplitude of a complex number.
2.30 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.
2.31 Write DeMoivre’s theorem (without proof) and illustrate with simple
examples.
44
UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry
C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in
coordinate system.
L.O. 3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form,
slope-intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form or
perpendicular form.
3.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms.
3.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of
two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
3.4 Define locus of a point and define a circle.
3.5 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
3.6 Find the equation of a circle given (i) centre and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points.
3.7. Define a conic section.
3.8 Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic
with illustrations.
3.9 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.
3.10 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on above.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
C.O.4Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x)  l and state the
xa
properties of limits.
f ( x) f ( x)
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and lim
x l g ( x) x  g ( x )
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
4.3 Mention the Standard limits lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x
1 x
ex 1  1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1   (without proof) and solve the problems
x 0 x x 0 x   x
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval
with some examples whether a given function is continuous or not.
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle
as lim f ( x  h)  f ( x) and also provide standard notations to denote the
h 0 h
derivative of a function.
4.6 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x,
tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
45
4.8 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle .
4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.11 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples using the
Trigonometric transformations.
4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another
function and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.13 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
4.14 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with
examples.
4.15 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with
examples like [f(x)]g(x).
4.16 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third
order with examples.
4.17 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.18 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n.
4.19 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple
problems.
C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.
L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the
curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
5.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the
equation of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
5.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on
the curve y=f(x) .
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the
velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.5 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities
like volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
5.6 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
5.7 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or
decreasing with illustrative examples.
5.8 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a
function of single variable- simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
5.9 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes
etc.
5.10 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed
46
CO/PO – Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 1 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.6 2.5 2 3 2.4 2
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 =moderately mapped (Medium), 1 =slightly mapped (Low)

Note:
concerned teacher.
PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.
PO- CO – Mapping strength

PO no Mapped with CO periods addressing PO in Level Remarks
CO no column I (1,2 or 3)
No %
1 CO1, CO2,
150 100% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 >40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, Highly
138 92% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 addressed
3 CO1, CO2,
133 88.6% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 25% to 40%
4 CO1, CO2, Level 2
120 80% 3 Moderately
CO3,CO4,CO5
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, addressed
150 100% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, 5% to 25%
135 90% 3 Level 1 Low
CO3,CO4,CO5
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, addressed
CO3,CO4,CO5 125 83.3% 3 <5% Not
addressed
47
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Relations and Functions:
Define Set, Ordered pairs, Cartesian product, Relations, functions, domain & range of
functions. Describe types of functions (in-to, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective)
and inverse functions – examples.
2. Partial Fractions:
Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational
fractionsin to their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2
3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two
matrices, sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-
Symmetric, skew symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a
square matrix-Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non-
singular matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix- examples-
System of linear equations in 3 variables-Solutions by Cramers’s rule and Matrix
inversion method-examples.
Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at
specified values, draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric
functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B),and related identities with problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multipleangles A/2
with problems.
7. Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa simple problems
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
sinx =k , cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations,
equations involving usage of transformations- problems.
48
10. Properties of triangles:
Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and
projection rule-area of a triangle- problems.
11. Hyperbolic functions:
Definitions of hyperbolic functions, identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic
functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
12. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex number,
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitue (polar) form ,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number- Problems. DeMoivre’s theorem.
UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
13. Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular
distance from a point, distance between parallel lines-examples.
14. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non
collinear points - general equation of a circle – finding centre, radius.
15. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity
are given. properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.
UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus:
16. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple Problems-
Continuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.
17. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives of
elementary functions- problems. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar
multiplication of functions - problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse trigonometric
functions, derivative of a function with respect to another function, derivative of
parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic, implicit functions, logarithmic
differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives - examples –
functions of several variables - partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple problems.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives:
18. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a curve at
any point. Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and subnormal to the curve at any
point - problems.
19. Physical applications of the derivative – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate
measure –Problems.
49
20. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing
functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.
21. Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the absolute error,
relative and percentage errors and approximate values due to errors in measuring.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand &Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4 th Edition,
Schaum’s Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series
Engineering Mathematics – I
Blue print
S. Chapter/ No of Periods Wei Marks wise Question COs

N Unit title ghta distribution of weight wise distribution mapp
o ge age of weight age ed
Allo
tted
Unit - I : Theory Practice R U Ap An R U Ap An
Algebra
1 Relations and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1
Functions
2 Partial 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1
Fractions
3 Matrices and 10 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO 1
Determinants
Unit - II : Trigonometry
4 Trigonometric 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Ratios
5 Compound 3 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Angles
6 Multiple and 4 4 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
Submultiple
angles
7 Transformation 3 3 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
s
8 Inverse 3 2
Trigonometric
Functions
9 Trigonometric 3 2 8 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 CO2
Equations
50
10 Properties of 3 2
triangles
11 Hyperbolic 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Functions
12 Complex 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Numbers
Unit III : Co-ordinate Geometry

13 Straight Lines 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO3
14 Circle 3 2 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO3
15 Conic Sections 8 4
Unit – IV : Differential Calculus
16 Limits and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO4
Continuity
17 Differentiation 17 10 14 3 11 0 0 1 2 0 0 CO4
Unit - V : Applications of Differentiation

18 Geometrical 3 2 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 CO5
Applications
19 Physical 2 2
Applications
20 Maxima and 3 4
Minima
21 Errors and 2 1
Approximation
s
Total 89 61 80 15 39 16 10 5 8 2 1
R: Remembering Type : 15 Marks

U: understanding Type : 39 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 16 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 10 Marks
Engineering Mathematics – I
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.11
Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.12 to L.O. 3.10
Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.10
51
C –20, A-102
UNIT TEST I
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: A-102
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40
Part-A 16Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each.
1. Answer the following.
a. If f ( x)  x and domain  1, 0,1 , then find range.

2
(CO1)
1 2
b. If A    , then find 3A. (CO1)
3 4 
c. Write the value of Sin1200 (CO2)
d. Write the formula for tan 2A in terms of tan A (CO2)
2. If f : R  R is defined by f ( x)  3x  5 , then prove that f ( x) is onto. (CO1)

1 3   2 4
3. If A    B   3 1  then find 2 A  3B (CO1)
 4 9 
,
 
3
Prove that Sin 45  Sin 15 
2 0 2 0
4. (CO2)
4
sin 2 A
5. Prove that  cot A (CO2)
1  cos 2 A
Part-B 3×8=24

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.
2x
6. A) Resolve into partial fractions. (CO1)
( x  1)( x  3)
or
x4
B) Resolve into partial fractions. (CO1)
x 2  3x  2
52
7. A) Using Cramer’s rule to solve
x  y  z  2, 2 x  3 y  4 z  4,3x  y  z  8 (CO1)
or
bc bc 1
B) Prove that ca c  a 1  (a  b)(b  c)(c  a) (CO1)
ab a  b 1
 1 2 2 
8. A) Find the adjoint of Matrix  1 3 5  (CO1)
 
 2 7 4 
or
 2 3 4  3 1 5
B) If A  5 7 9 ; B   2 1 4  , find AB and BA and verify if AB  BA .
 
   
 2 1 3   0 3 1 
(CO1)
-o0o-
53
Unit Test II C –20, A-102
First Year
Sub Code: C- 102
Part-A 16Marks

each
CD CD
a. sin C  sin D  2cos   sin   : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
 2   2 
b. If z  2  3i , then find z (CO2)
e x  e x
c. sinh x  : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
2
d. Write the eccentricity of rectangular hyperbola. (CO3)
2. Express (3  4i)(7  2i) in terms of a  ib (CO2)

3. Find the perpendicular distance from (1,1) to the line 2 x  3 y  1  0 (CO3)
4. Find the angle between lines 2 x  y  3  0 and x  y  2  0 (CO3)
Find the centre and radius of the circle x  y  2 x  4 y  4  0
2 2
5. (CO3)
Part-B 3×8=24

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6

6. A) Prove that  tan 4 . (CO2)
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
or
1 1 1 
B) Prove that tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  (CO2)
2 5 8 4
54
7. A) Solve 2sin 2   sin   1  0 (CO2)
or
c a
In any ABC , If B  60 then
0
B)  1 (CO2)
ab bc
8. A) Find the equation of circle with (2,3) and (6,9) as the end points of diameter and
also find centre and radius of circle. (CO3)
or
B) Find the equation of ellipse whose focus is (1, 1) , directrix is x  y  3  0 and
eccentricity is1/2. (CO3)
-o0o-
55
Unit Test III C –20, A-102
First Year
Sub Code: A-102
Part-A 16Marks

each

x2  1
a. Find lim (CO4)
x 1 x5
sin 2
b. lim  2 : State TRUE/FALSE (CO4)
 0 
c.
d
dx
 3 tan 1 x   ? (CO4)
d. Formula for percentage error in x is _________ (CO5)
x5  32
2. Evaluate lim (CO4)
x 2 x2  4
Find the derivative of 3tan x  4log x  7 w.r.t. x

x
3. (CO4)
4. Differentiate x 2 sin x w.r.t. x (CO4)
2x  3
5. Find the derivative of (CO4)
3x  4
56
Part-B 3×8=24

1 2x  1  2 x 
6. A) Find the derivative of sin  2 
w.r.t. tan  2 
(CO4)
 1 x   1 x  .
or
dy
if y  x
cos x
B) Find (CO4)
dx
x4  y 4
7. A) Verify Euler’s theorem when u ( x, y )  (CO4)
x y
or
Find the equation of tangent and normal to the curve 3 y  x  6 x  17 at (4,3)

2
B)
(CO5)
8. A) Circular patch of oil spreads on water and the area is growing at the rate of
8 sqcm / min . How fast is the radius increasing when radius is 5cm . (CO5)
or
Find the maxima and minima values of f ( x)  x  6 x  9 x  15.

3 2
B) (CO5)
-o0o-
57
END-EXAM MODEL PAPERS
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS A- 102
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M
    
1. If A  0, , , ,  and f : A  B is a function such that f ( x)  cos x, then find the
 6 4 3 2
range of f . CO1
x
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions. CO1
 x 1 x  2
3 9 0  4 0 2
3. If A    and B   , find A  B and A  B. CO1
1 8  2 7 1 4 
4. Show that cos16  sin16  tan 610.

0 0
CO2
cos16  sin16
0 0
5. Prove that sin 2  cot  . CO2

1  cos2
 1 i 
6. Find the modulus of the complex number  . CO2
 2i 
7. Find the distance between parallel lines x  2 y  3  0 and x  2 y  8  0. CO3

8. Find lim sin77 x . CO4
x0 sin11x
9. Differentiate 3tan x  4log x  7 x2 w.r.t. x. CO4
10. If x  at 2 , y  2at , then find dy

. CO4
dx
PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M
3 3 4
11 A) Find the inverse of the matrix  2 3 4  . CO1

0 1 1 
Or
B) Solve the system of equations x  y  z  6, x  y  z  2 and 2x  y  3z  9 by

Cramer’s rule. CO1
58
12 A) If cos x  cos y  3 and cos x  cos y  2 , then show that CO2
5 7
x y  x y
21tan  10cot    0.
 2   2 
Or
1 1 1
B) If tan x  tan y  tan z   then show that
x  y  z  xyz. CO2
13 A) Solve 3cos  sin 1. CO2

Or
cot A  cot B  cot C  s .

2
B) In any  ABC, Show that CO2
2 2 2 
14 A) Find the equation of the circle with  4,2 and 1,5 as the two ends of its
diameter and also find its centre and radius. CO3
Or
B) Find the centre, vertices, equation of axes, lengths of axes, eccentricity, foci, equations
of directrices and length of latus rectum of the ellipse 4x2 16 y 2  1. CO3
   
15 A) Find the derivative of sin 1  2 x  w.r.t. tan 1  2 x  CO4
 1 x   1 x 
2 2
Or
  y3 
3
u u
B) If u  tan 1  x  , then prove that x y  sin 2u. CO4
 x y  x y
PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M
16. The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them so that the sum of their squares is minimum. CO5
***
59
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- II MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
1
1. If f : R  R is a bijective function such that f ( x)  ax  b, then find f ( x). CO1
1
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions.
 x  1 x  2 CO1
 0 1 3 
3. If A   1 0 7  is a skew-symmetric matrix, find the value of x.
  CO1
 3 x 0 
0 0
4. Find the value of sin 2 82 1  sin 2 22 1 . CO2
2 2
cos3 A
5. Prove that  cos A. CO2
2cos 2 A  1
6. Find the conjugate of the complex number  3  2i  . 4  7i  CO2
7. Find the equation of the line passing through the points 1,2 and 3, 4. CO3
8. Find lim x  32 .
5
x2 x2 CO4
9. Differentiate x  sec x  log x w.r.t. x. CO4
10. If u( x, y)  x3  3axy  y 3 , then find u and u . CO4

x y
PART-B
1 1 1
11 A) Show that a b c   a  b  b  c  c  a  . CO1
2 2 2
a b c
Or
B) Solve the system of equations x  2 y  3z  6,3x  2 y  4z  5 and x  y  z  1 using
matrix inversion method. CO1
60
sin 2  sin 4  sin 6
12 A) Prove that  tan 4 .
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6 CO2
Or
1 1 1 1 
B) Prove that tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  . CO2
3 5 7 8 4
13 A) Solve 2cos2   3cos   1  0. CO2
Or
B) In any  ABC, Show that a 3

cos( B  C )  3abc. CO2
14 A) Find the equation of the circle passing through the points  0,0 ,  6,0 and  0,8 . CO3
Or
B) Find the equation of the rectangular hyperbola whose focus is 1,2 and directrix is
3x  4 y  5  0. CO3
15 A) If sin y  x sin(a  y), then prove that dy  sin (a  y ) .

2
dx sin a CO4
Or
B) If y  tan 1 x, then prove that (1  x 2 ) y2  2 xy1  0. CO4
PART-C
16 Show that the semi-vertical angle of the cone of maximum volume and of given slant
height is tan 1 2. CO4
***
61
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods per Periods
week
A-103 Engineering 4 120 20 80
Physics
S. No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped
1 Units and Dimensions 08 CO1

2 Elements of Vectors 12 CO1
3 Dynamics 12 CO2
4 Friction 10 CO2
5 Work, Power and Energy 12 CO3
6 Simple harmonic motion 12 CO3
7 Heat and Thermodynamics 12 CO4
8 Sound 10 CO4
9 Properties of matter 10 CO5
10 Electricity and Magnetism 12 CO5
11 Modern physics 10 CO5
Total 120
Course Title: Engineering Physics
Course Objectives 1. To familiarize with the concepts of Physics involved in the process
of various Engineering, Industrial and Daily life Applications.
2. To understand and apply the basic principles of physics in the field
of engineering and technology to familiarize certain natural
phenomenon occurring in the day to day life
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises
62
Explain S.I units and dimensions of different physical quantities, basic
CO1
operations among vector quantities.
Explain the motion of objects moving in one dimension and two
CO2 dimensions, the causes of motion and hindrance to the motion of the
objects especially with respect to friction.
Explain the mechanical energy of bodies like PE, KE and conservation law
CO3
of energy, the properties of simple harmonic motion.
Explain gas laws, ideal gas equation, Isothermal and adiabatic processes,
Course Specific heats, to study the laws of thermodynamics. Causes,
CO4
Outcomes consequences and methods to minimise noise pollution, explain beats,
Doppler effect, Reverberation, echoes.
Explain certain properties of solids, liquids like elastic properties, viscosity
and surface tension. Explain Ohm’s law, to study Kirchoff’s laws, to study
the principle of Wheatstone’s bridge and its application to meter bridge.
CO5 To study the magnetic force and understand magnetic field. To compute
magnetic field strength on axial and equatorial lines of a bar magnet. To
familiarise with modern topics like photoelectric effect, optical fibres,
superconductivity and nanotechnology.
COS, POS, PSOS MAPPING
 POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1
3 = strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped
Note:
The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest lecture’s iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visits vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussion x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
63
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Concept of Units and dimensions

1.1 Explain the concept of Units, Physical quantity, F u n d a m e n t a l physical
quantities and D erived physical quantities
1.2 Define unit, fundamental units and derived units, State SI units with symbols
1.3 State Multiples and submultiples in SI system, State Rules of writing S.I. units, State
advantages of SI units
1.4 Define Dimensions, W r i t e Dimensional formulae of physical quantities
1.5 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities
1.6 State the principle of homogeneity of dimensions
1.7 State the applications and limitations of dimensional analysis
1.8 Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error, significant
figures
1.9 Solve problems
2.0 Concept of Elements of Vectors

2.1 Explain the concept of scalars, Vectors and give examples
2.2 Represent vectors graphically, Classify the Vectors, Resolve the vectors
2.3 Determine the resultant of a vector by component method, represent a vector in
Space using unit vectors (i, j, k)
2.4 State and explain triangle law, parallelogram law, and polygon law of addition of
Vectors
2.5 Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work done, Power), mention the
Properties of dot product
2.6 Define cross product of two vectors with examples (Torque, Linear velocity)
Mention the properties of Cross product.
2.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
3.0 Concept of Dynamics

3.1 Write the equations of motion in a straight line. Explain the acceleration due to
Gravity.
3.2 Explain vertical motion of a body and derive expressions for a) Maximum Height,
b) Time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of flight
3.3 Derive height of a tower when a body projected vertically upwards from the top of
a tower.
3.4 Explain projectile motion with examples
3.5 Explain horizontal projection and derive an expression for the path of a projectile in
horizontal projection
3.6 Explain oblique projection and derive an expression for it. Derive formulae for
a) Maximum Height b) time of ascent c) time of descent and d) time of flight
e) Horizontal Range, f) Maximum range
3.7 Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular velocity, angular
acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque
3.8 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
4.0 Concept of Friction

4.1 Define friction and classify the types of friction.
4.2 Explain the concept of normal reaction.
64
4.3 State the laws of friction.
4.4 Define coefficients of friction, Angle of friction and angle of repose.
4.5 Derive expressions for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane.
(Upwards and downwards)
4.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
4.7 Mention the methods of minimizing friction.
4.8 Explain why it is easy to pull a lawn roller than to push it.
4.9 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.
5.0 Concepts of Work, Power, and Energy

5.1 Definet h e t e r m s W ork, Power and Energy. State SI units and dimensional
Formulae.
5.2 Define potential energy and give examples, derive an expression for potential
energy.
5.3 Define Kinetic energy and give examples, derive an expression for kinetic energy.
5.4 State and derive Work-Energy theorem.
5.5 Derive the relation between Kinetic energy and momentum.
5.6 State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in the case of a freelyfalling
body.
6.0 Concepts of Simple harmonic motion

6.1 Define Simple harmonic motion, Give examples, state the conditions.
6.2 Explanation of uniform circular motion of a particle is a combination of two
perpendicular S.H.M.s.
6.3 Derive expressions for displacement, velocity, acceleration, Frequency, Time
period of a particle executing SHM.
6.4 Define phase of SHM.
6.5 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive expression for time period of simple
pendulum.
6.6 State the laws of motion of simple pendulum.
7.0 Concept of heat and thermodynamics

7.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases
7.2 State and explain Boyle’s and Charles laws.
7.3 Define absolute zero temperature, absolute scale of temperature
7.4 Define ideal gas and distinguish from real gas
7.5 Derive I deal gas equation. Define specific gas constant and universal gas
constant, write S.I unit and dimensional formula. Calculate the value of R.
7.6 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases
7.7 State and explain isothermal process a n d adiabatic process
7.8 State first and second laws of thermodynamics and state applications
7.9 Define specific heats and molar specific heats of a gas, Derive CP-CV =R
7.10 Solve t h e r e l e v a n t n u m e r i c a l problems
8.0 Concept of Sound

8.1 Concept of the sound, Wave motion. (longitudinal and transverse wave)
8.2 Distinguish between musical sound and noise.
8.3 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity level of sound.
65
8.4 Explain causes, effects and methods of minimizing of noise pollution.
8.5 Explain the phenomenon of beats state the applications.
8.6 Define Doppler effect, list the applications.
8.7 Define reverberation and reverberation timeand write Sabine’s formula.
8.8 Define and explain echoes state its applications.
8.9 State conditions of good auditorium.
9.0 Concepts of properties of matter
9.1 Explain the terms elasticity, stress, strain and types of stress and strain.
9.2 State and explain Hooke’s law.
9.3 Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus (K),
Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (),
9.4 Define surface tension and give examples.
9.5 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory.
9.6 Define angle of contact and capillarity and write formula for Surface Tension.
9.7 Explain the concept of viscosity, give examples, write Newton’s formula.
9.8 Define co-efficient of viscosity and write its units and dimensional formulaand
State Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity.
9.9 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
10. Concepts of Electricity and Magnetism

10.1 E xplain Ohm’s law in electricity a n d w r i t e t h e f o r m u l a .
10.2 Define specific resistance, conductance and state their units.
10.3 Explain Kichoff’s laws.
10.4 Describe Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
10.5 Describe Meter Bridge for the determination of resistivity with a circuit diagram.
10.6 Explain the concept of magnetism. State the Coulomb’s inverse square law of
Magnetism.
10.7 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force and write the properties of magnetic
lines of force.
10.8 Derive an expression for the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform
magnetic field.
10.9 Derive equations for Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
and on the equatorial line of a bar magnet.
10.10 Solvet h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
11.0 Concepts of modern physics

11.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect and Write Einstein‘s photo electric
Equation.
11.2 State laws of photo electric effect.
11.3 Explain the Working of photo electric cell, write its applications.
11.4 Recapitulation of refraction of light and its laws, critical angle, total Internal
Reflection.
11.5 Explain the principle and working of Optical fiber, mention different types of
Optical fiber, state the applications.
11.6 Define super conductor and super conductivity and mention examples.
11.7 State the properties of super conducting materials and list the applications.
11.8 Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications.
66
COURSECONTENT
1. Units and Dimensions:

Introduction, Physical quantity, Fundamental and Derived quantities, Fundamental and
Derived units, SI units, Multiples and Sub multiples, Rules for writing S.I. units, Advantages
of SI units. Dimensions and Dimensional formulae, Dimensional constants and
Dimensionless quantities, Principle of homogeneity, Advantages and limitations of
dimensional analysis, Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage
error, significant figures, Problems.
2. Elements of Vectors:
Scalars and Vectors, Types of vectors (Proper Vector, Null Vector, Unit Vector, Equal, Negative
Vector, Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and Position Vector).Addition of
vectors, Representation of vectors, Resolution of vectors, Parallelogram, Triangle and
Polygon laws of vectors, Subtraction of vectors, Dot and Cross products of vectors-Problems.
3. Dynamics
Introduction-Concept of acceleration due to gravity-Equations of motion for a freely falling
body and for a body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal and Oblique projections-
Expressions for maximum height, time of flight, range-Define force, momentum, angular
displacement, angular velocity, angular acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia,
torque–problems.
4. Friction:
Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of friction- Angle of repose-Angle of
friction- rough inclined plane- Advantages and disadvantages of friction-Methods of
reducing friction–Problems.
5. Work, Power and Energy:

Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential energy- kinetic energy-
Derivations of Potential and Kinetic energies-K.E and Momentum relation - Work-Energy
theorem- Law of Conservation of energy- Problems.
6. Simple Harmonic Motion:

Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples- Expressions for displacement,
velocity, acceleration, Time period, frequency and phase in SHM- Time period of a simple
pendulum- Laws of simple pendulum-seconds pendulum-Problems.
7. Heat and Thermodynamics:

Expansion of Gases, Boyle’s law, absolute scale of temperature- Charles laws- Ideal gas
equation- Universal gas constant- Differences between gas constant(r) and universal gas
constant(R),Isothermal and adiabatic processes, Laws of thermodynamics, Specific heats -
molar specific heats of a gas -Different modes of transmission of heat ,laws of thermal
conductivity, Coefficient of thermal conductivity-Problems.
8. Sound:
Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion -musical sound and noise- Noise pollution –
Causes &effects- Methods of reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler effect- Echo-
Reverberation-Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula-Conditions of good auditorium-
Problems.
67
9. Properties of matter
Definition of Elasticity –Definition of stress and strain -th e u n i t s a n d d i m e n s i o n a l
f o r m u l a e f o r s t r e s s a n d s t r a i n - T he Hooke’s law-Definitions of Modulus of elasticity,
Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus(K), Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (), relation
between Y, K, n and (equations only no derivation)
Definition of surface tension-Explanation of Surface tension with reference to molecular
theory - Definition of angle of contact -Definition of capillarity -The formula for surface
tension based on capillarity - Explanation of concept of Viscosity - Examples for surface
tension and Viscosity - Newton’s formula for viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of
viscosity- The effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseuille’s equation
for Co-efficient of viscosity- Th e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.
10. Electricity & Magnetism:

Ohm’s law and explanation, Specific resistance, Kirchoff’s laws, Wheatstone’s
bridge, Meter bridge, Coulomb’s inverse square law, magnetic field, magnetic lines of
force, magnetic induction field strength- magnetic induction field strength at a point on the
axial line - magnetic induction field strength at a point on the equatorial line–problems.
11. Modern Physics;

Photoelectric effect –Einstein’s photoelectric equation-laws of photoelectric effect-
photoelectric cell–Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal reflection- fiber optics-
-principle and working of an optical fiber-types of optical fibers - Applications of optical
fibers- superconductivity–applications-Nanotechnology definition, nano materials,
applications
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy ( English version ) Intermediate physics Volume-I & 2
2. Dr. S. L. Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha Unified physics Volume 1,2,3 and 4
3. Resnick& Holiday Text book of physics Volume I
4. Dhanpath Roy Text book of applied physics
5. D.A Hill Fiber optics
6. XI & XII Standard NCERT Text Books
68
 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for chapter and Cos
mapped
Marks wise Question wise
Mapped
Weight distribution of distribution of
S. Unit No of with CO
age of Weightage Weightage
No Title/Chapter Periods
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Units and 0 0
1 08 03 3 0 0 1 0 0 CO1
Dimensions
Elements of 0
2 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 CO1
Vectors
3 Dynamics 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 * CO2
4 Friction 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO2
Work, Power and 0 0
5 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
Energy
Simple harmonic 0 *
6 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
motion
Heat and 0 *
7 12 11 0 8 3 0 1 1 CO4
Thermodynamics
8 Sound 10 11 0 8 3 0 0 1 1 0 CO4
Properties of 0 0
9 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5
matter
Electricity and 0 0
10 12 14 6 0 8 2 0 1 CO5
Magnetism
0 0
11 Modern physics 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5
*
Total 120 110 24 64 22 0 8 8 4
10
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 3 or 6 or 7
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 4.9
 Model question paper for Unit Tests I,II,III with COs mapped
69
UNIT TEST –I
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (A-103)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks: 40
PART-A 16 Marks
(2) First question carries 4 marks and others carry 3 marks each.
(3) Answers for the Question numbers 2 to 5 should be brief and
straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.
1. i) The dimensional formula of force is ___________ (CO1)

ii) Which of the following is a scalar [ ] (CO1)
a) force b) work c) displacement d) velocity
iii) we can add a scalar to a vector (Yes / No) (CO1)
iv) Friction is a self-adjusting force. [True / False] (CO2)
2. Define dot product. Give one example. (CO1)
3.A force of 150 N acts on a particle at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. Find
the horizontal and vertical components of force(CO1)
4. Define projectile. Give two examples. (CO2)
5. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain (CO2)
PART—B 3x8=24
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions. Each question carries 8marks.
(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criteria for
evaluation is content but not the length of the answer.
6) (A) Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of resultant of two

Vectors using parallelogram law of vectors (CO1)
OR
(B) Write any four properties of dot product and any four properties of
Cross product (CO1)
7) (A) Show that path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique
Projection. (CO2)
OR
(B) Derive the expression for range and time of flight of a projectile (CO2)
8) (A) State and explain polygon law of vector addition with a neat diagram(CO1)
OR
(B) Derive the equation for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane(CO2)
***
70
UNIT TEST –II
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (A–103)
PART –A 16 Marks

Straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.
1) i) The value of 1000 C is equal to ___________ in Kelvin scale of temperature (CO4)

ii) Write the S.I unit of power (CO3)
Iii) A simple pendulum be used in artificial satellite (Yes / No) (CO3)
iv) Specific heat of a gas is constant for all gases in nature [True / False] (CO4)
2. Derive the relation between momentum and kinetic energy (CO3)
3. A girl is swinging by sitting in a swing, how the frequency changes if she
stands in the swing.(CO3)
4. Write the physical significance of universal gas constant. (CO4)
5. A body is projected in to the air in the vertically upward direction, find the
height at which its potential and kinetic energies are equal. (CO3)
PART—B 3x8=24 Marks

6) (A) State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in case of a freely
falling body. (CO3)
(OR)
(B) State and prove work energy theorem. (CO3)
7) (A) Define ideal simple pendulum and derive the equation for time period
of a simple pendulum (CO3)
(OR)
(B) State the conditions for S.H.M, derive the equation for velocity for a
Particle in S.H.M. (CO3)
8) (A) Define ideal gas, show that for an ideal gas the difference in specific heats is equal to
universal gas constant(CO4)
(OR)
(B) State gas laws and derive the ideal gas equation (CO4)
***
71
UNIT TEST –III
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (A–103)
PART –A 16 Marks
straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.
1) i) Photo electric cell converts light energy in to __________ energy (CO5)

ii) What is elastic limit ? (CO5)
iii) SI unit of Specific resistance is ------------ (CO5)
iv) Inside a bar magnet magnetic line of force will travel from North pole to South pole
[True / False] (CO5)
2. Distinguish between Musical sound and Noise (CO4)
3. What is the effect of temperature on Viscosity of liquids and gases (CO5)
4. The values of resistances P, Q, R are 50 Ω, 10Ω, 15 Ω respectively in the
balanced condition of Wheatstone bridge, find the unknown resistance (CO5)
5. What is nanotechnology and write any two uses. (CO5)
PART—B 3x8=24 Marks

6) (A) Explain Surface Tension based on the molecular theory (CO5)

(OR)
(B)Define Reverberation and Reverberation Time. Derive Sabine formula
for reverberation time. (CO4)
7) (A) Derive the balancing condition of Wheatstone bridge with neat circuit
Diagram. (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Derive an expression for the magnetic induction field strength at a
point on the equatorial line of a bar magnet.(CO5)
8) (A) Describe an experiment to determine the specific resistance of a wire using meter
bridge.(CO5)
(OR)
(B) Explain the principle and working of an optical fiber. (CO5)
***
72
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–20)
FIRST YEAR EXAMINATION
A–103, ENGINEERING PHYSICS
Time : 3 hours ] [ Total Marks : 80M

PART—A 3×10=30

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple
Sentences.
1. Write the dimensional formula of the following physical quantities (CO1)

(a) Velocity (b) Force (c) Angular momentum
2. Write any three properties of scalar product. (CO1)
3. Define projectile. Give two examples. (CO2)
4. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain. (CO2)
5. Define potential energy and kinetic energy. (CO3)
6. For a body in simple harmonic motion velocity at mean position is 4m/s, if the time period is
3.14 s, find its amplitude. (CO3)
7. State first and second laws of thermodynamics. (CO4)
8. Write any three conditions of good auditorium (CO4)
9. Define ohmic and non-ohmic conductors. (CO5)
10. State Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism. (CO5)
PART—B 8 ×5= 40
Instructions: (1) Each question carries eight marks.

(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
But not the length of the answer.
11. A) Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of the resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors. (CO1)
OR
B) Show that path of a projectile is parabola in case of oblique projection and derive
expression for maximum height. (CO2)
12. A) Derive expression for acceleration of a body sliding downwards on a rough inclined plane.
(CO2)
OR
B) Verify the law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body. (CO3)
73
13. A) Derive an expression for velocity and acceleration of a particle performing simple harmonic
Motion. (CO3)
OR
B) Define ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation. (CO4)
14. A) Two tuning forks A and B produce 4 beats per second. On loading B with wax 6 beats are
produced. If the quantity of wax is reduced the number of beats drops to 4. If the
frequency of A is 326 Hz, find the frequency of B. (CO4)
OR
B) Explain surface tension based on molecular theory. Write three examples of surface
tension. (CO5)
15. A) Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheat stone’s bridge with a neat circuit
diagram. (CO5)
OR
B) Explain principle and working of optical fibers. Write any three applications . (CO5)
PART C 1x10=10
16) Derive relationship between molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure Cp and molar
specific heat of a gas at constant volume Cv and hence show that Cp is greater than Cv. (CO4)
***
74
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
No. of Total No. of

Course code Course Title Periods per Periods Marks for FA Marks for SA
week
Engineering
Chemistry and
A-104 4 120 20 80
Environmental
Studies
Unit
S.No No of Periods COs Mapped
Title/Chapter
Fundamentals of
1 18 CO1
Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 CO1
3 Acids and bases 10 CO1
Principles of
4 8 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 CO2
6 Corrosion 8 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 CO3
8 Polymers 12 CO4
9 Fuels 6 CO4
Chemistry in daily
10 6 CO4
life
Environmental
11 16 CO5
Studies
Total 120
 Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies
1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the
process of various Engineering Industrial Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental issues
and concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that include
Course Objectives
physical, chemical, biological and socio cultural aspects of
environment.
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises
75
Course outcomes
Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole
CO1 concept, acids and bases, PH metallurgical process and
alloys
CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, emf and corrosion
Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of water
CO3
Course Outcomes by advanced method
Synthesise of Plastics, rubber and applications of fuel
CO4
chemical compounds used in our daily life.
Explain the causes, effects and control methods of air
CO5 and water pollution and measures to protect the
environment
Course code Engg. Chemistry and Environmental studies No Of periods 120

C-104 No of Cos;5
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing Level remarks
No PO in Col 1 1,2,3
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 60 50% 3 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO2 CO1,CO2 13 10.8% 1 level2(moderately
PO3 CO2,CO3 10 8.3% 1 addressed 5% to 25%
PO4 CO1 10 8.3% 1 level1 (Low addressed <
PO5 CO4,CO5 15 12.5 1 5%(not addressed)
PO6
PO7 CO4 12 10% 1
 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 1 1
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 1 2
CO5 3 3 1
3 = strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from
the following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii)
Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
76
 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for each chapter and
COs mapped
Weight distribution of distribution of
Unit No of Mapped
S.No age of Weightage Weightage
Title/Chapter Periods with CO
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Fundamentals
1 18 19 8 8 3 1 1 1 CO1
of Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 11 0 0 8 3 1 1 CO1
3 Acids and bases 10 11 0 8 0 3 1 1 CO1
Principles of
4 8 8 8 0 0 1 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 11 8 3 0 1 1 * CO2
6 Corrosion 8 8 0 8 0 1 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 11 8 3 0 1 1 CO3
8 Polymers 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 * CO4
9 Fuels 6 3 3 0 0 1 CO4
Chemistry in
10 6 3 0 0 3 1 CO4
daily life
Environmental
11 16 14 3 11 0 1 2 CO5
Studies
*
Total 120 110 12 6 6 6 20 35 5 10
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 5 or 8
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to learn out
ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1.0 Atomic structure

1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron)
and the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain t h e s i g n i f i c a n ce o f f o u r Quantum numbers.
1.4 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 Pauli’s exclusion principle 3 Hund’s rule.
1.5 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s, p and d- Orbitals.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency
1.9 Define and explai n Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , MgO, *H2,*O2 and
*N2. (* Lewis dot method)
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish
between their properties.
1.11 Structures of ionic solids-define a) Unit cell b) co-ordination number and the structures of
NaCl and CsCl unit cells.
77
2.0 Solutions
2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state and solubility
2.3 Define mole and problems on mole concept.
2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2.Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight and
calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids.(HCl,H2SO4,H3PO4)Bases
(NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3)
2.5 Define molarity and normality and numerical problems on molarity and normality
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality if weight of solute and volume of solution are
given
b) Calculate the weight of solute if Molarity or normality with volume of solution are given
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated
Solutions
3.0 Acids and bases
3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases and give the limitations of Arrhenius theory of
Acids and Bases.
3.2 Explain Bronsted–Lowry theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Bronsted–
Lowry theory of acids and bases.
3.3 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and
bases.
3.4 Explain the Ionic product of water
3.5 Define pH and explain PH scale and solve the Numerical problems on pH(Strong Acids and
Bases)
3.6 Define and explain buffer solution and give the examples of buffer solutions.
3.7 State the application of buffer solutions
4.0 Principles of Metallurgy
4.1 List out the Characteristics of Metals and non-metals
4.2 Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals
4.3 Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4.Flux5.Slag
4.4 Describe the methods of concentration of Ore; 1.Handpicking, 2.Levigation and 3. Froth
Floatation
4.5 Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
4.6 Explain the purification of Copper by Electrolytic Refining
4.7 Define an Alloy and Write the composition and uses of the following alloys. 1. Brass 2.
Germen silver 3. Nichrome.
5.0 Electrochemistry
5.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3.Insulator, 4.Electrolyte5.Non–
electrolyte.Give two examples each.
5.2 Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction
5.3 Explain electrolysis by taking example fused NaCl
5.4 Explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
5.5 Define 1 . C hemical equivalent (E) 2 . E lectrochemicalequivalent (e) and their relation.
5.6 Solve the Numerical problems on Faraday’s laws of electrolysis and applications of
electrolysis (Electro plating)
5.7 Define Galvanic cell and explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.
5.8 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.9 Explain the electrode potentials and standard electrode potentials
5.10 Explain the electrochemical series and its significance
78
5.11 Explain the emf of a cell and solve the numerical problems on emf of the cell based on
standard electrode potentials.
6.0 Corrosion
6.1 Define the term corrosion.
6.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
6.3 Describe the formation of a) composition cell b) stress cell c)concentration cell during
corrosion.
6.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
6.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion
a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings)
b) Cathodic pro tectio n (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process)
7. 0 Water Treatment
7.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
7.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
7.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water (with Formulae)
7.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
7.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L) or( ppm).
7.6 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Ion-exchange process, b)Permutit
process or zeolite process
7.7 State the essential qualities of drinking water.
7.8 Chemistry involved in treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, deflouridation)
7.9 Explain Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis with examples.
7.10 State the applications of Reverse Osmosis.
8.0 Polymers
8.1 Explain the concept of polymerisation
8.2 Describe the methods of polymerization a)addition polymerization of ethylene
b)condensation polymerization of Bakalite(Only flow chart)
8.3 Define thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with examples.
8.4 Distinguish between thermo plastics and thermosetting plastics
8.5 List the Characteristics of plastics and state the disadvantages of using plastics.
8.6 State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials.
8.7 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC, 2.Teflon, 3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6
8.8 Explain processing of Natural rubber and write the structural formula of Natural rubber.
8.9 List the Characteristics of raw rubber
8.10 Define and explain Vulcanization and List out the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber.
8.11 Define the term Elastomer and describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic
rubbers a) Buna-s and b)Neoprene rubber.
9.0 Fuels
9.1 Define the term fuel
9.2 Classify the fuels based on physical state and based on occurrence.
9.3 List the characteristics of good fuel.
9.4 State the composition and uses of gaseous fuels.
a)water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) Coal gas, e)Biogas.
10.0 Chemistry in daily life
10.1 Give the basic chemical composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of
a) soaps, and detergents b) vinegar c) Insect repellents d) activated charcoal e) Soft drinks
11.0 ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
11.1 Define the term environment and explain the scope and importance of environmental
studies
79
11.2 Define the segments of environment 1).Lithosphere, 2).Hydrosphere, 3).Atmosphere,
4).Biosphere,
11.3 Define the following terms 1)Pollutant, 2).Pollution, 3).Contaminant, 4)receptor, 5)sink, 6)
particulates, 7)dissolved oxygen (DO), 8)Threshold limit value (TLV), 9).BOD,10).COD 11)
eco system1 2 ) Producers1 3 ) C onsumers 14) Decomposers with examples
11.4 State the renewable and non renewable energy sources with examples.
11.5 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity
11.6 Define air pollution and classify the air pollutants-based on origin and physical state of
matter.
11.7 Explain the causes, effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals and control
methods of air pollution.
11.8 State the uses of forest resources.
11.9 Explain causes and effects of deforestation
11.10 Explain the causes and effects of the following
1.) Greenhouse effect, 2) Ozone layer depletion and 3) Acid rain
11.11 Define Water pollution, explain the causes, effects and control methods of Water pollution.
COURSE CONTENT
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers
–Aufbau principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d
orbitals - Electronic configurations of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – types of chemical bonds – Ionic and covalent bond with
examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds- structures of ionic crystals (NaCl and
CsCl).
2. Solutions
Introduction of concentration methods – mole concept, molarity and normality – Numerical
problems on mole, molarity and normality.
3. Acids and Bases
Introduction – Theories of acids and bases and limitations – Arrhenius theory- Bronsted –
Lowry theory – Lewis acid base theory – Ionic product of water- pH related numerical
problems–Buffer solutions, action of buffer and its applications.
4. Principles of Metallurgy
Characteristics of Metals and non-metals –Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals,
Define the terms i) Metallurgy ii) ore iii) Gangue iv) flux v) Slag - Concentration of Ore –Hand
picking, Levigation, Froth floatation – Methods of Extraction of crude Metal – Roasting,
Calcination, Smelting – Alloys – Composition and uses of brass, German silver and nichrome.
5. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – electrolysis –
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis-application of electrolysis(electroplating) -numerical problems
on Faraday’s laws – Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential – electrochemical series–emf
and numerical problems on emf of a cell .
6. Corrosion
Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - composition, stress and concentration cells–
rusting of iron and its mechanism – prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic
protection methods.
80
7. Water technology
Introduction–soft and hard water–causes of hardness–types of hardness
–disadvantages of hard water – degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – softening methods –
permutit process – ion exchange process– qualities of drinking water –Chemistry involved in
treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, defluoridation ) - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis
–Applications of Reverse osmosis.
8. Polymers
Introduction – polymerization – types of polymerization – addition, condensation with
examples – plastics – types of plastics – advantages of plastics over traditional materials-
Disadvantages of using plastics – Preparation and uses of the following plastics i).PVC ii) Teflon
iii) Polystyrene iv) .Nylonn 6,6 –Processing of natural rubber - Vulcanization – Elastomers-
Preparation and applications of Buna-s, Neoprene rubbers.
9. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels–characteristics of good fuel-composition and uses of
gaseous fuels.
10. Chemistry in daily life
Basic composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of soaps and
detergents, vinegar, insect repellents, soft drinks, activated charcoal.
11. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Introduction– environment –scope and importance of environmental studies – important
terms related to environment– renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Concept of
ecosystem – Biotic components –Forest resources – Deforestation -Biodiversity and its
threats-Air pollution – causes-effects–Global environmental issues – control measures – Water
pollution – causes – effects – control measures.
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2

2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi- Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit test 1, unit test 2 and unit test 3

Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.7
Model question paper for Unit Test with Cos mapped
81
UNIT TEST –I
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (A-104)
PART-A 16 Marks
(2) First question carries 4 marks and each of rest carries 3 marks.
(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
not exceed five simple sentences.
1. a) Number of neutrons in 11Na23 is ---------- (CO1)

b) The molarity and normality of HCl is the same (True or False) (CO1)
c)What is the pH range of base? (CO1)
d) Graphite is a good conductor of electricity (Yes or No) (CO1)
2. Distinguish between orbit and orbital. (CO1)
3. Define Covalent bond. Explain the formation of covalent bond in Oxygen and Nitrogen molecules.
(CO1)
4. Define mole. Calculate the number of moles present in 50 gm of CaCO3 and 9.8 gm of H2SO4.
(CO1)
H H
5. Define P . Calculate the P of 0.001M HCl and 0.01M NaOH solution. (CO1)
PART – B 3x8M = 24M
Answer either (A) or (B) from each questions from Part-B. Each question carries 8 marks.
6. A) Explain Postulations of Bhor’s atomic theory. Give its limitations. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain the significance of Quantum numbers. (CO1)
7. A) Express molarity normality with mathematical equation. Calculate the molarity and normality
of 10gm of NaOH present in 500 ml solution. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Classify solutions based the physical state of solute and solvent and give an example each.
(CO1)
8. A) What is buffer solution? Classify with examples and give it`s applications. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronsted-Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations. (CO1)
***
82
UNIT TEST –II
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40Marks

PART-A 16 Marks

(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
1. a) Bauxite is the ore of ............ metal (CO2)

b) What is the unit of electrochemical equivalent? (CO2)
c) CaSO4 is the permanent hardness causing salt. (True or False) (CO3)
d) Write the Chemical formula of rust. (CO2)
2. Write any three differences between metallic conduction and electrolytic conduction.(CO2)
3. Write the composition and applications of German silver and Nichrome. (CO1)
4. Mention any three disadvantages of using hard water in industries. (CO3)
5. Define electro chemical equivalent and chemical equivalent. Give the relation between
them. (CO2)
6. A) What is galvanic cell? Explain construction and working of galvanic cell with neat diagram
(CO2)
(OR)
B) State and explain Faraday`s laws of electrolysis. (CO2)
7. A) Explain different types of galvanic cells formed during the corrosion of metals.(CO2)
(OR)
B) What is hard water? Explain zeolite process of softening of hard water. (CO3)
8. A) Explain Froth floatation process. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Electrolytic refining processing of copper. (CO1)
***
83
UNIT TEST –III
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40
PART-A 16 Marks
(3) Answers for Q. No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
1. a) The monomer of PVC................ (CO4)

b) Sulphur is the vulcanising agent. (True/False) (CO4)
c) Give an example for secondary pollutant. (CO5)
d) Presence of ozone in stratosphere is a pollutant.( Yes/No) (CO5)
2. List any three characteristic properties of vulcanised rubber. (CO4)
3. Define primary fuel and secondary fuels give an example each. (CO4)
4. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
5. Write any three threats to the biodiversity. (CO5)

6. A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Give a method of preparation and applications of the following
i) Buna-S ii) Neoprene (CO4)
7. A) What is air pollution? Explain any three causes of air pollution. (CO5)
(OR)
B) Briefly explain ozone layer depletion and greenhouse effect. (CO5)
8. A) What is water pollution? Explain any three controlling methods of water pollution.(CO5)
(OR)
B) What are thermoplastics and thermo setting plastic? Write any four differences
between these two plastics. (CO4)
***
84
TIME: 3hrs Total Marks:80
PART-A
(2) Each question carries 3 marks.
1. Draw the shapes of s and p orbitals. (CO1)

2. Define mole. Find the mole number of 10 g of CaCO3 (CO1)
3. Define Buffer solution. Give any two examples. (CO1)
4. Define chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent. Give their relation. (CO2)
5. State name of the salts and their formulae that cause hardness. (CO3)
6. Write any three disadvantages of using plastics. (CO4)
7. Classify the fuels based on their occurrence. (CO4)
8. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
9. List out any three threats to biodiversity. (CO5)
10. Define pollutant and contaminant. Give an example each. (CO5)
PART – B
Each question carries eight marks. 8x5=40M
11. A) Explain Bhor’s atomic theory and give its limitations. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain ionic bond formation and covalent bond formation with one example each
(CO1)
12. A) Calculate the molarity and normality of 250 ml of sodium carbonate solution
that contains 10.6 gm of sodium carbonate. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronstead and Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations. (CO1)
13. A) Explain froth floatation and electrolytic refining of copper with neat diagrams.
(CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the construction and working of galvanic cell. (CO2)
14. A) Explain Cathode protection methods. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain ion-exchange of softening of hard water with a neat diagram. (CO3)
15. A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the causes and effects of air pollution. (CO5)
PART –C
Question carries ten marks 10x1 =10M
16. Analyse the products formed at cathode and anode with electrode reactions during
the Electrolysis of aqueous NaCl in compare with fused NaCl. (CO2)
***
85
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods per Year

ENGINEERING
A-105 04 120
MECHANICS
TIME SCHEDULE
Part – A Part – B Part – C
Weighta
Sl. Periods Short Essay Essay
ge
No Major topic Allocate Type Type Type
of
. d (3 (8 (10
marks
marks) Marks) Marks)
1 Statics 26 14 2 1
2 Friction 20 11 1 1
3 Simple machines 28 14 2 1
Basic Link
4 16 9 3 -
Mechanisms
Transmission of
5 30 22 2 2
power
Part – C Question having 10 marks 1
10
weightage from CO3 or CO5
Total 120 80 10 5 1
Course Code: A-105 Title: ENGINEERING MECHANICS Total No. Of Periods: 120
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Understand the effects of forces under equilibrium.
Course Objectives: 2.0 Apprehend the working principles of Simple Machines, friction and
mechanisms
3.0 Comprehend the differentmechanical means of power transmission.
CO No. Course Outcome

C01 A-105.1 Apply laws of equilibrium to solve simple problems in mechanics
C02 A-105.2 Apply the concepts of friction to solve simple problem in engineering
Evaluate condition for maximum efficiency and mechanical advantage in simple
C03 A-105.3
machines
C04 A-105.4 Describe various basic link mechanisms
C05 A-105.5 Solve numerical related to various methods of power transmission
Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Statics
1.1 Explain the meaning of mechanics in Engineering and state its importance.
1.2 Review the system of units used.
1.3 Explain the concept of force.
1.4 List the types of forces.
1.5 Explain the force system a) Co-planar and Non-Coplanar, b) Parallel and Non-Parallel,
c) Like and Unlike, d) Concurrent and Non-concurrent
86
1.6 Explain the concept of equilibrium.
1.7 State a) Parallelogram law of forces, b) Triangle law of forces, c) Polygon law of forces
d)Lami‘s theorem.
1.8 Explain the concept of free body diagram
1.9 Solve the problems involving concurrent coplanar forces, non-concurrent coplanar
forces and Lami‘s theorem
1.10 Define the term couple and moment of couple with legible sketch.
1.11 Explain the properties of a couple
1.12 State the condition of equilibrium of a body acted upon by co-planar forces.
2.0 Friction
2.1 Explain the concept of friction.
2.2 State the laws of friction.
2.3 Identify the machine members in which friction exists and desirable.
2.4 Explain the concept of friction in screw jack.
2.5 Compute the effort required raising and lowering the load by using screw jack.
2.6 Compute the efficiency of Screw jack.
2.7 State the purpose of bearings, types of bearings and designation of bearings.
2.8 Compute the friction in journal bearings.
2.9Resolve the forces acting on bodies moving on horizontal plane.
2.10 Resolve the forces acting on bodies moving along the inclined planes.
2.11 Solve the related numerical problems.
3.0 Simple Machines

3.1 Define the important terms of simple machines a) Machine, b) Mechanical Advantage,
c) Velocity Ratio, d) Efficiency.
3.2 Illustrate the use of three classes of simple lever.
3.3 Show that an inclined plane is a simple machine to reduce the effort in lifting loads.
3.4 Derive an expression for Velocity Ratio in cases of Wheel & Axle, Weston Differential
pulley blocks, Pulleys, Worm & Worm wheel, Winch crabs, Screw jack, Rack & Pinion.
3.5 Compute the efficiency of a given machine.
3.6 Compute effort required to raise or lower the load under given conditions.
3.7 Interpret the law of machine.
3.8 State the conditions for self-locking and reversibility.
3.9 Calculate effort lost in friction and load equivalent of friction.
3.10 Evaluate the conditions for maximum Mechanical Advantage & Maximum efficiency.
4.0 Basic Link mechanisms

4.1 Define important terms of basic link mechanism a) Link, b) Kinematic pair,
c) Kinematic chain, d) Mechanism & e) Machine
4.2 Explain kinematic pair and kinematic chain with the help of legible sketch.
4.3 List examples for Lower and Higher pairs.
4.4Explain four bar chain and its inversions.
4.5 Explain slider crank chain and its inversions.
87
5.0 Transmission of power
5.1 Identify various power transmitting modes like belt, chain, rope, gears.
5.2 Select suitable material for belt and explain the belt fasteners.
5.3 Derive the expression for velocity ratio of a belt drive
5.4 Explain the term slip in belt and its effect on velocity ratio and explain the combined effect
of belt thickness and slip on velocity ratio and calculate velocity ratio by considering this
combined effect .
5.5 Explain the use of jockey pulley.
5.6 Distinguish between open belt drive and cross belt drive and determine the length of the
belt in case of open belt and cross belt drives.
5.7 Explain the tensions in tight and slack sides of a belt and Calculate velocity ratio, angle of
contact, length of the belt and power transmitted bybelt drive.
5.8 Explain the rope drive, chain driveand gear drive state the advantages and limitations.
5.9 Explain the types of chain.
5.10 Classify the gears and explain nomenclature of gear
5.11 Discuss the simple and compound gear train.
5.12 Explain the applications of the above drives in engineering.
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code: A- Course Title:ENGINEERING MECHANICS No. of COs: No. of Periods:120
105 5
CO Periods Addressing
PO in Col. 1
POs Mapped with CO No. Level (1,2,3) Remarks
Num
Percentage
ber
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 31 25 2 > 40% Level 3 (Highly
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO5 20 17 1 Addressed)
PO3 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 23 19 1 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 25 21 1
Addressed)
PO5 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 21 18 1 5% t0 25% level 1 (Low
PO6 Addressed)
PO7 <5% Not Addressed
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX (1. Slight (Low) 2. Moderate (Medium) 3. Substantial (High))
CO No. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
A-105.1 1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
A-105.2 1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
A-105.3 1 3 3 2 2 2 3 2
A-105.4 1 2 3 2 2 2
A-105.5 1 3 2 3 2 2 3 2
the following:
88
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Statics
The meaning of word mechanics - Application of Mechanics in Engineering - System of Units
- Definition and specification of force - System of forces - Resolution of force - Equilibrium
and Equilibrant - Statement of Parallelogram law of forces, Triangle law of forces, Polygon
law of forces and Lami’s theorem - Drawing the free body diagram - Numerical problems
related to concurrent coplanar forces - Couple and moment of a couple - Condition for
equilibrium of a rigid body subjected to number of coplanar non-concurrent forces - Related
numerical problems
2.0 Friction
Definition of static friction, dynamic friction and impending friction - Laws of solid and fluid
friction - Derivation of limiting angle of friction and angle of repose - Concept of reduction in
friction by using bearings – types & Designation of Bearings - Friction in screw jack, journal
bearings -Resolution of forces considering friction when a body moves on horizontal plane -
Resolution of forces considering friction when a body moves on inclined plane - Numerical
examples on the above cases
3.0 Simple Machines

Definition of Simple machine, and uses of simple machine, levers and inclined plane -
Fundamental terms like mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency - Expressions for
VR in case of Simple/Differential pulley/pulleys of 3 systems, Worms and Worm wheel, Rack
and pinion, Winch crabs, & Screw jack - Conditions for reversibility and self locking - Law of
Simple Machine - Effort lost in friction, Load equivalent of friction, Maximum Mechanical
Advantage, and Maximum efficiency.
4.0 Basic Link Mechanism

Definition of terms: Link, Kinematic pair, Kinematic chain, Mechanism, Structure
andMachine. Differentiate structure and machine, machine and mechanism - Quadric cycle
chain and its inversions - Slider Crank chain and its inversion.
5.0 Transmission of power:

Belt drive, Materials for the belt drive and belt fasteners - (a) Explanation of the terms
i)Velocity ratio, in terms of diameters of pulleys - ii)Slip, percentage of slip and its effect on
velocity ratio - iii)Thickness of belt and its effect on velocity ratio - iv)Tight side and Slack side
of the belt - Open belt and Cross belt drive - Effective tension (T1 – T2) - Velocity of the belt
and Power transmitted by belt - Length of open belt and cross belt drives- Problems –
Velocity ratio, Slip, length of the belts and Power transmitted in a belt drive - Rope drive –
Advantages and limitations over a belt drive - Chain drive – Advantages and limitations over
a belt drive - Types of chains - Gears and Gear trains - Nomenclature of gear - Types of gears
– spur, helical, bevel, and spiral - Simple and compound gear trains - Velocity ratio in gear
drive processes and problems - Advantages and limitations gear drive over a belt drive.
89
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1 Basic Mechanical Engineering by V.N Kumar

2 Elements of Mechanical engineering by Roy &Choudary
3 Engineering Mechanics by Singer B.S.Publications
4 Engineering Mechanics by Basudeb Bhattacharya – Oxford
Publishers
5 Engineering Mechanics by A Nelson Mc Graw Hill Publishers
6 Engineering Mechanics by I.B.Prasad
7 Engineering Mechanics by R.S.KhurmiS.Chand& Comp
8 Theory of Machines by S.S.Rathan TMH P
9 Theory of Machines by R.S. Khurmi
10 Theory of Mechanisms and Machines by Malik &Ghoshe
Blueprint of Question Paper

A-105, ENGINEERING MECHANICS
Question wise
Weight Marks wise Distribution
Periods Distribution of Weight
age of Weight age
Sl. No Chapter Name Allocate age
Allocat
d
ed R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Statics 26 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 -
2 Friction 20 11 - 3 8 - - 1 1 -
3 Simple Machines 28 14 3 - 8 3 1 - 1 1
Basic Link
4 16 9 3 3 3 - 1 1 1 -
Mechanisms
Transmission of
5 30 22 3 3 8 8 1 1 1 1
Power
Part – C Question having 10
marks weightage from CO3 10 10 1
or CO5
Total: 120 80 12 12 35 21 4 4 5 3
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I,II& III
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.11
Unit Test – II From 3.1 to 4.5
Unit Test – III From 5.1 to 5.12
90
Unit Test - 1
Q.No Question Bloom’s Marks CO

category allocated addressed
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Statics R,U,Ap 8 CO1
2 Friction R,U,Ap 8 CO2
Part - B (24 marks)
3 Statics U,Ap 16 CO1
4 Friction U,Ap 8 CO2
Unit Test - 2

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Simple Machines R,U,Ap 8 CO3
2 Basic Link Mechanisms R,U,Ap 8 CO4
Part - B (24 marks)
3 Simple Machines U, Ap 16 CO3
4 Basic Link Mechanisms U, Ap 8 CO4
Unit Test - 3
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Transmission of power R,U,Ap 16 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
2 Transmission of power U,Ap 24 CO5
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application; An- Analylising
Model Question Paper for Unit Test I
91
C20-A-105
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION
UNIT TEST - 1
Time: 120 Minutes Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. 1st Question having 4 one mark questions, and remaining 4
Questions carry 3 marks each. (4 X 1+ 4 X 3 = 16 Marks)
1. (a) Define normal reaction.

(b) Define Angle of Repose
(c) Line of action of forces lie in same plane is called-----------------
(d) what is resultant of forces?
2. Write the classification of forces
3. Write the conditions for equilibrium of a body subjected to coplanar non-concurrent forces
4. A body of mass 20 kg is sliding down on an inclined plane of 60 0. If the coefficient of friction
between the plane and body is 0.25, find the magnitude of the force to be applied on the
body, parallel to the plane, to stop the motion of the body.
5. State the laws of solid friction.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all three questions. Each question carries 8 marks. (3 X 8 = 24 Marks)
6. Find the resultant of three tensile forces acting on the eye bolt shown in the fig.
(OR)
Find the magnitude and direction of the single force that brings the following system of
concurrent forces into equilibrium.
A force of 20 N acting due East.
A force of 25 N acting 40 0 North of East.
A force of 10 N acting 50 0 West of North
A force of 30 N acting vertically downwards.
7. Two forces 2kN and 1kN act on a particle. The angle between them is 60°. Find the
magnitude and direction of third force which shall bring the system into equilibrium.
(OR)
92
An electric light fixture weighing 15 N is hanged from point C, by two strings AC and BC. AC
is inclined at 60° to the horizontal and BC at 45° to the vertical as shown in fig. Using Lami’s
theorem determine the tensions in the strings AC and BC.
8. A body of weight 500 N is dragged up on a plane inclined at 300 to the horizontal. A force of
400 N inclined at 200 with the plane, can just move the body up the plane. Find (a) Normal
reaction (b) Limiting force of friction (c) Coefficient of friction.
(OR)
A body of weight 735 N rests on a rough inclined plane. The plane is inclined at an angle of 30°
with the horizontal and the angle of friction between the body and the plane is 15°. Find the
horizontal force required to hold the body from sliding down the plane.
 Model questions paper for End Exam with COs mapped
Q.No Question Bloom’s Marks CO addressed

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
1 Statics R,U 3 CO1
2 Statics R,U 3 CO1
3 Friction R,U 3 CO2
4 Simple machines R,U 3 CO3
5 Simple machines U,Ap 3 CO3
6 Basic Link Mechanisms R,U 3 CO4
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Statics Ap 8 CO1
12 Friction Ap 8 CO2
13 Simple machines Ap 8 CO3
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Part – C Question having 10 marks Ap 10 CO3,C05
93
C-20-A-105
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
Time : 3 hours Total Marks: 80
PART - A
Answer all the Questions. Each Question Carries 3 marks
1. What is force? State its units.

2. State the conditions of equilibrium of a body.
3. Distinguish between ball bearing and roller bearing.
4. Define a) Mechanical Advantage b) Velocity Ratio
5. The Velocity ratio of a simple machine is 12. The effort applied is 180 N.
Determine the load lifted if 20% of the effort is lost in friction.
6. Define a) Link b) Machine
7. What is kinematic chain?
8. Write the inversions of slider crank chain
9. Write various means to transmit the mechanical power
10. Differentiate between simple gear train and compound gear train.
PART – B
11. Find the magnitude and direction of the single force that brings the following system of
concurrent forces into equilibrium.
A force of 20 N acting due East.
A force of 25 N acting 40 0 North of East.
A force of 10 N acting 50 0 West of North
A force of 30 N acting vertically downwards.
Or
An electric light fixture weighing 15 N hangs from a point C, by two strings AC and BC. AC is
inclined at 600 to the horizontal and BC at 450to the vertical as shown in figure. Using Lami’s
theorem, Computerthe tensions in the strings AC and BC.
94
12. A body of weight 500 N is dragged up on a plane inclined at 300 to the horizontal. A force of 400
N inclined at 200 with the plane, can just move the body up the plane. Find (a) Normal reaction
(b) Limiting force of friction (c) Coefficient of friction.
or
A screw jack has a mean diameter of 80 mm and pitch of 15 mm. The coefficient of friction
between its screw and nut is 0.075. Find the effort required to be normally applied at the end of
its operating lever 800 mm long to i) raise a load of 20 KN , and (ii) lower the same load.
Find the efficiency under this load.
13. In a wheel and differential axle, the diameter of the wheel is 400 mm and the diameter of the
axles are 90 mm and 80 mm . If an effort of 245 N can lift a load of 14700 N . Find the efficiency
of the machine. Also find the effort lost in friction.
or
In a single threaded worm and worm wheel, the number of teeth on the worm wheel is 40. The
length of the effort handle is 300mm and the load drum is of 200mm diameter. Find the load
lifted by an effort of 250N, if the efficiency is 40%.
14. A man whose weight is 650 N raises a load of 1500 N by means of pulleys arranged in second
system. There are 4 pulleys in each block. Neglecting the weight of pulleys, find this thrust on
ground if the pulleys vertically downwards.
Or
Derive an expression for the velocity ratio of pulleys of second order.
15. A shaft running at 120 rpm carries a pulley of 400 mm diameter which drives a dynamo of 1000
rpm by means of a belt 10 mm thickness. Allowing for the thickness of belt and a total slip of
5% . Determine the diameter of the pulley on the dynamo.
Or
A belt is required to transmit 15 kW from a pulley 1000 mm. diameter at 420 rpm . The angle of lap is
1600 and µ = 0.3 . The safe working stress in belt material is 1.2 N/mm2 . Thickness of belt is 10 mm.
Find the width of belt.
PART – C
Answer the following Question. This Question Carries 10 marks
16. An open belt transmits 3 kW between two parallel shafts of 1.5 m apart. The diameter of pulley
and the follower pulley are 360 mm and 160 mm respectively. The larger pulley runs at 300
r.p.m. The coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley surface is 0.25. The permissible
tension per mm width of the belt is 20 N. Find (a) Tight side tension (b) slack side tension and (c)
width of the belt.
***
95
WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY
Course Title Course Code Periods per Week Periods per Year
WORKSHOP
A-106 04 120
TECHNOLOGY
TIME SCHEDULE
Part – A Part – B Part –
Sl. Short Essay C Essay
Major Periods Weightage
No Type Type Type
topic Allocated of marks
(3 (8 (10
1 Basic Workshop tools &
operations
(1.1) Carpentry 20 6 2 -
(1.2) Fitting 25 14 2 1
(1.3) Forging 15 11 1 1
(1.4) Sheet metal 12 6 2 -
2 Drilling 08 11 1 1
3 Foundry 22 11 1 1
4 Mechanical working of metals 18 11 1 1
Part-C Question having 10 marks weightage from
10 - - 1
CO2 or CO3 or CO4
Total: 120 80 10 5 1
Course Code: A-106 Course: Workshop Technology No. of Periods: 120

1.0 Know basic workshop tools and operations in carpentry, fitting, forging
COURSE OBJECTIVES and sheet metal
2.0 Know the drilling operation
3.0 Understand foundry and mechanical working of metals

A-106.1 Explain different tools and operations used in 1. Carpentry, 2. Fitting, 3.Forging
C01
and 4. Sheet metal
C02 A-106.2 Discuss various drilling machines and operations on drilling machine.
C03 A-106.3 Discuss the process of foundry.
C04 A-106.4 Analyse mechanical working of metals.
96
Learning Outcomes:Uponcompletionofthecoursethestudentshallbe ableto
1.0 Basic workshop tools and its operation

a. State the importance of workshop processes.
b. List the various workshop processes and explain briefly about each.
1.1 Carpentry
a. Identify various carpentry tools.
b. List work holding devices.
c. Explain wood working processes viz., sawing, chiselling and planning.
d. Explain the use of carpentry joints such as lap joint, dovetail Joint, mortise and
tenon joint with legible sketch
e. Explain the working of wood working machines.
1.2 Fitting
a. List various fitting tools.
b. Distinguish between marking and measuring tools.
c. List cutting tools.
d. List various work holding devices.
e. List various checking and measuring instruments.
f. Explain fitting operations such as marking, sawing, chipping, filing, grinding, drilling
and tapping with legible sketch
1.3 Forging
a. List various tools used in black-smithy.
b. List equipment used in a forging shop.
c. Explain the important smithy operations
d. Explain the working principle of machine forging
e. Explain machine forging operations such as upsetting, drawing down and
punching with legible sketch
f. Explain the working principle of forging press with legible sketch.
g. List the forging defects
1.4 Sheet Metal

a. List various marking tools in sheet metal work
b. List various stakes
c. List various measuring tools used in sheet metal work
d. List various sheet metal joints.
e. Describe sheet metal operations such as shearing, bending, drawing and
squeezing
f. Differentiate between riveting, soldering & brazing
2.0 Drilling
2.1 State the working principle of drilling.
2.2 List out different types of drilling machines.
2.3 Draw the line diagrams of the sensitive and radial drilling machines.
2.4 Identify the parts of sensitive and radial drilling machines
2.5 Describe the functions of each part of sensitive and radial drilling machines
2.6 List the different operations on drilling machine.
97
3.0 Foundry
3.1 Acquaint with foundry as a manufacturing process.
3.2 State the advantages of casting over other process.
3.3 State the limitations of the process.
3.4 List the various hand moulding tools.
3.5 State the properties of good moulding sand.
3.6 State the types of moulding sands.
3.7 List the ingredients in foundry sand and list the various types of patterns.
3.8 State the sequence of pattern making operations.
3.9 List the various moulding processes.
3.10 State the need and types of cores.
3.11 Describe the casting and special casting processes.
3.12 Identify the defects in casting.
4.0 Mechanical working of metals

4.1 Define mechanical working of metals.
4.2 Differentiate between cold working and hot working.
4.3 Illustrate the working principle of hot rolling, piercing, spinning, extrusion and
drawing.
4.4 State advantages and limitations of hot working.
4.5 Identify various cold working processes such as rolling, bending and squeezing.
4.6 State advantages and limitations of cold working.
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code: A-106 Course Title:Workshop Technology No. of COs: 6 No. of Periods:120
Mapped with CO CO Periods Addressing PO in Col. 1
POs Level (1,2,3) Remarks
No. Number Percentage
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4 31 25 2 > 40% Level 3 (Highly
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4 20 17 1 Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4 23 19 1 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4 22 18 1
Addressed)
PO5 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4 24 20 1 5% t0 25% level 1
PO6 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-106.1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
A-106.2 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
A-106.3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
A-106.4 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 3
the following:
98
COURSE CONTENT
1 Introduction :
Basic workshop tools and its operation
Methods of manufacturing processes - casting, forming, metal removal processes, joining
processes, surface finishing processes, basic workshop processes - carpentry, fitting, hand
forging, machine forging, sheet metal work, cold and hot working of metals.
1.1 Carpentry
Marking & measuring tools: scales, rules, fourfold wooden rule, flexible measuring rule (tape),
straight edge, try square, bevel square, combination square, marking knife, marking gauge,
mortise gauge, wing compass, trammel, divider, spirit level
Cutting Tools
Saws: ripsaw, cross cut saw (hand saw), panel saw, tenon or back saw, dovetail saw, bow saw,
coping saw, compass saw, pad or keyhole saw, specifications & uses.
Chisels: Firmer chisel, bevelled edge firmer chisel, parting chisel, mortise chisel, inside and
outside gauges, specifications and uses.
Planes: Jack plane (wooden jack plane, metal jack plane), rough plane, smoothing plane,
rebate plane, plough plane, router, spoke shave.
Boring Tools:Gimlet, braces-wheel brace, ratchet brace, bit shell bit, expansion bit, centre-
bit, countersink-bit,
Striking tools: Hammers - Warrington hammer, claw hammer, mallet,
Holding devices: Bench vice, bench stop, sash cramp (barcramp) G- cramp.
Miscellaneous tools: Rasps and files, scraper, oilstone, glass paper, pincer, screwdriver
Carpentry Processes: Marking, measuring, sawing, chiselling, planning, boring, grooving
Carpentry joints: Halving Joint, mortise and tenon joint, bridle joint, butt joint, dowel joint,
Tongue& groove joint, screw & slot joint, dovetail joint, corner joint.
Wood working machines: Wood working lathe (wood turning lathe), circular saw, band
saw, woodPlaner, sanding machine, belt sander
1.2 Fitting
Cutting tools
Chisels: Flat chisel, cross cut chisel, half round chisel, diamond point chisel, side chisel,
specifications and uses.
Files: Different parts of a file –Types of files- flat file, hand file, square file, round file,
triangular file, half round files, knife edge file, needle file –specifications and uses.
Scrapers: Flat, triangular, half round scrapers, specifications &uses.
Saws: Hand hacksaw - solid frame, adjustable frame, specifications & uses.
Drill bits: Flat drill, straight fluted drill, twist drill, parallel shank, tapered shank,
specifications & uses.
Reamer: Hand reamer, straight and spiral flutes reamers, specifications and uses.
Taps: Hand taps - taper tap, plug tap and bottoming tap, specifications and uses.
Dies & Sockets: Dies- solid, adjustable - specifications and uses.
Striking Tools
Hammers: Parts- ball peen, cross peen, straight peen hammers, soft hammer, sizes,
specifications and uses.
Holding Devices
Vices: Bench vice, hand vice, pin vice, tool makers vice, pipe vice, specifications and uses.
Marking Tools
Surface plate, V-block, angle plate, scriber, punch - prick punch, centerpunch, number
punch, letter punch, specifications and uses.
99
Miscellaneous Tools
Screwdrivers, spanners, cutting pliers, nose pliers,Allen keys.
Checking and measuring instruments
Checking instruments:
Callipers: Outside & Inside callipers, hermaphrodite (odd leg) calliper, spring callipers,
transfer calliper - uses, dividers - uses.
Measuring instruments:
Combination set, sine bar, Gauges- plug gauge, feeler gauge, Thread gauge, plate & wire
gauge, ring gauge, snap gauge specifications & uses, Vernier callipers, Vernier height gauge,
Vernier depth gauge, micro meter - outside & inside, - specifications and uses.
Fitting Operations:
Marking, sawing, chipping, filing, scrapping, drilling, reaming,grinding,tapping and dieing.
1.3 Forging
Hand forging tools: Anvil, swage block, hand hammers - types; sledgehammer,
specifications and uses, tongs - types, specifications & uses, chisel -hot & cold chisels
specifications & uses. Swages - types and sizes, fullers, flatters, punch and drift - sizes and
uses.
Equipment: Forge-parts-Open and closed hearth, heating furnaces, open and stock fire,
fuels-charcoal, coal, oil and gaseous fuels-characteristics of fuel.
Smithy Operations: Upsetting, drawing down, setting down, punching, drifting, bending,
welding, cutting, swaging, fullering and flattering.
Forging hammers - spring hammer, pneumatic hammer, drop hammer, hydraulic press -
line diagram, machine forging operations – Hot drawing, upsetting, punching, Advantages
and dis advantages of forging.
Forging defects: Types and remedies.
1.4 Sheet Metal Work

Metals used for sheet metal work.
Sheet metal hand tools:
Measuring tools - steel rule, circumference rule, thickness gauge, sheet metal gauge,
straight edge, scriber, divider, trammel points, punches, chisels, hammers, snips or shears,
straight snip, double cutting shear, squaring shear, circular shear, bench & block shears.
Stakes: Double seaming stake, beak horn stake, bevel edged square stake, Hatches stake,
needle stake, blow Horn stake, hollow mandrel stake,groovers and rivet sets, soldering iron,
specifications & uses.
Sheet Metal Operations
Shearing: Cutting off, parting, blanking, punching, piercing, notching, slitting,Lancing,
nibbling and trimming.
Bending: Single bend, double bend, straight flange, edge hem,Embossing,
Beading,planishing, flanging.
Drawing: Deep drawing, shallow or box drawing.
Squeezing: Sizing,coining, hobbing, ironing, riveting.
Sheet Metal Joints
Hem Joint: single hem, double hem & wired edge,
Seam joint -lap seam, grooved seam, single seam, double seam, dovetail seam, burred
bottom seam or flanged seam.
Notches – straight notch, square notch and slant notch
100
Fastening Methods
Riveting, soldering, brazing & spot welding.
2 Drilling
Type of drilling machines: sensitive & radial and their constructional details and specifications.
Operations: Drilling, reaming, boring, counter boring, counter sinking, tapping, spot facing and
trepanning.
3 Foundry
Introduction: Development of foundry as a manufacturing process, advantages and limitations
of casting over other manufacturing processes.
Foundry equipment:
Hand moulding tools: shovel, riddle, rammers, trowels, slicks, lifter, strike - off bar, sprue pin
bellow, swab, gate cutter, mallet, vent rod, draw spike, rapping plate or lifting plate, , spirit
level, moulding boxes, snap box & flash box.
Sands: Properties of moulding sand - porosity, flowability, collapsibility, adhesiveness,
cohesiveness and refractoriness.
Types of moulding sand : green sand, dry sand, loam sand, facing sand, backing sand, parting
sand, core sand, systems and their ingredients and uses.
Pattern making: Materials such as wood, cast Iron, aluminium, brass, plastics their uses and
relative advantages, classification of patterns such as solid (one piece),split pattern- two piece
and three pieces, gated patterns and sweep patterns, sequence in pattern making, pattern
allowances .
Cores: Need of cores, types of cores.
Casting: green sand and dry sand moulding, shell moulding, defects in castings and their
remedies.
Special casting processes: (Principles and applications only) die casting – hot chamber,
centrifugal casting, investment casting.
4 Mechanical working of metals
Introduction: Hot working and cold working
Hot working processes: rolling - types of rolling, two high mill, three high mills, four high mills,
piercing or seamless tubing, drawing or cupping, spinning, extrusion - direct or forward
extrusion, indirect or backward extrusion, tube extrusion, Impact extrusion.
Hot working operations, advantages & limitations of hot working of metals.
Cold working process: Rolling, drawing - wire drawing, tube drawing, bending, stretchforming,
angle bending, spinning, extrusion, squeezing, cold heading, thread rolling, peening.
Advantages & limitations of cold working.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Production Technology by Jain & Gupta (Khanna Publishers)

2. Elementary Workshop Technology by HazraChowdary& Bhattacharya (Media Promotors)
3. Manufacturing Technology (Vol I) by P N Rao (McGraw Hill)
3. Workshop Technology Vol I & II by Raghuvamshi
101
BLUEPRINT OF QUESTION PAPER
A-106, WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY

Period Weight
Distribution of Distribution of
s age
Sl. No Chapter Name Weightage Weightage
Alloca Allocat
ted ed R U Ap An R U Ap An
Basic Workshop tools

1
& operations
(1.1) Carpentry 20 6 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
(1.2) Fitting 25 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
(1.3) Forging 15 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
(1.4) Sheet metal 12 6 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
2 Drilling 08 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
`3 Foundry 22 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Mechanical working of
4 18 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
metals
marks weightage from CO2 or 10 10 1
CO3 or CO4
Total: 120 80 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I, II & III

Unit Test – III From 3.1 to 4.6
102
Unit Test - 1
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Carpentry R,U 7 CO1
2 Fitting R,U 5 CO1
3 Forging R,U 4 CO1
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Carpentry Ap 8 CO1
5 Fitting Ap 16 CO1
Unit Test - 2
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Forging R,U 4 CO1
2 Sheet metal R,U 5 CO1
3 Drilling R,U 7 CO2
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Forging Ap 8 CO1
5 Sheet metal Ap 8 CO1
6 Drilling Ap 8 CO2
Unit Test - 3
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Foundry R,U 8 CO3
2 Mechanical working of metals R,U 8 CO4
Part - B (24 marks)
3 Foundry Ap 8 CO3
4 Mechanical working of metals Ap 8 CO4
5 Foundry or Mechanical working of metals Ap 8 CO3,CO4
 Model Question Paper For Unit Test I
103
C20-A-106
UNIT TEST – 1
WORHSHOP TECHNOLOGY
Time : 120 Minutes Total Marks: 40
PART – A
Questions carry 3 markseach. (4 X 1+ 4 X 3 = 16 Marks)
1. (a) Which saw is used to cut along the grains of wood_______________.
(b) A Fitting File is a__________________.
(c)Sine bar is used always on _____________.
(d) Ring Tong is used for__________________.
2. Identify various carpentry tools.
3. Distinguish between marking and measuring tools.
4. Distinguish between tapping and dieing.
5. List equipment used in a forging shop.
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all three questions. Each question carries 8 marks.(3 X 8 = 24 Marks)
6. Explain the use of carpentry joints such as lap joint, dovetail Joint, mortise and tenon joint
with legible sketch.
Or
Name three Planes used in wood working. Briefly describe any one of them with neat sketch.
7. What is a file? Describe different types files with neat sketch.

Or
Explain the working of a combination set with help of a neat sketch.
8. Explain the working principle of outside micro meter with a neat sketch.
Or
Explain fitting operations.
***
104
Q.No Question from the topic Bloom’s Marks CO addressed

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
3 Fitting R,U 3 CO1
4 Fitting R,U 3 CO1
5 Forging R,U 3 CO1
8 Drilling R,U 3 CO2
9 Foundry R,U 3 CO3
10 Mechanical working of metals R,U 3 CO4
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Fitting Ap 8 CO1
12 Forging Ap 8 CO1
13 Drilling Ap 8 CO2
14 Foundry Ap 8 CO3
15 Mechanical working of metals Ap 8 CO4
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from any of the CO2 or CO3 or An 10 CO2 or CO3 or
CO4 CO4
105
C20-A-106
WORKSHOP TECHNOLOGY
Time : 3 hrs Total Marks: 80
PART - A
1. What is Gimlet?
2. What is the purpose of trammel?
3. List out different types of chisels.
4. What is scraper? Listout different types of scrapers.
5. What is the purpose of drift?
6. What is a double seaming stake?
7. Write the difference between drilling &reaming.
8. List out different metals used in sheet metal.
9. What is hot working write its advantages?
10. What is the purpose of sprit level & gate cutter ?
PART-B
11. What is a file? Describe different types files with neat sketch.
Or
Describe different filling operations with sketches.
12. Describe the construction of spring hammers with a neat sketch.

Or
Describe the working of pneumatic hammer with a neat sketch.
13. Describe the construction of radial drilling machine with a neat sketch.
Or
Describe the construction of sensitive drilling machine with a neat sketch.
14. Describe the properties of moulding sand.

Or
Describe the properties centrifugal casting process with a neat sketch .
15. Describe direct extrusion process with a neat sketch.
Or
Describe the following with neat sketches.
a) Hot spinning operation
b) Drawing & cupping operation
PART-C
16. Discuss modern moulding processes with simple sketches.
***
106
ENGINEERING DRAWING
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods Per Year

ENGINEERING
A–107 06 180
DRAWING
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of Short
S.No Drawing Weightage Answer Essay type
Major Topics Periods
plates of Marks Questions Questions
1 Importance of -- 01 - - -
Engineering Drawing
2 Engineering Drawing 01 05 - - -
Instruments
Free hand lettering & 01 06 5 1 -
3
Numbering
4 Dimensioning Practice 01 09 5 1 -
Geometrical 03 24 15 1 1
5
constructions
Projections of points,
6 Lines, Planes & 03 21 5 1
Auxiliary Views
7 Projections of Solids 01 12 10 1
8 Sections of Solids 01 21 10 - 1
9 Orthographic 01 30 10 - 1
Projections
10 Isometric Views 01 30 10 - 1
11 Development of 01 21 10 - 1
surfaces
Total 14 180 80 04 06
Course Code: A-107 Course: Engineering Drawing No. of Periods: 180

Upon completion of the course the student shall able to understand
COURSE OBJECTIVES the basic graphic skills and use them in preparation of engineering
drawings, their reading and interpretation
107
C01 A-107.1 Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments
A-107.2 Familiarise with the conventions to be followed in engineering drawing as per
C02
BIS specifications.
C03 A-107.3 Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering curves
Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of i) Points ii) Lines iii)
C04 A-107.4 Regular Planes iv) Regular Solids V) Sections of Regular Solids and the
isometric views of machine components
Draw the developments of surfaces of regular solids and thereby the
CO5 A-107.5
components used in daily applications
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to
1.0 Importance of Engineering Drawing

1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of
Mechanical Engineering
2.0 Engineering Drawing Instruments
2.1 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines / curves
2.2 Use correct grade of pencil to draw different types of lines and for different
purposes
2.3 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.4 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
2.5 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.6 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
Drawing Plate 1: (Having two exercises)
3.0 Free Hand Lettering and Numbering
3.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
3.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
3.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)
4.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
4.1 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of dimensioning in
engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
4.2 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of
dimensioning.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 08 to10 exercises)
5.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
5.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like i) dividing a line into equal parts
ii) exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles iii) tangent arcs to two
given lines and arcs
5.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when i) side length is given
ii) inscribing circle radius is given iii) describing circle radius is given
5.3 Draw the conics using general and special methods,
5.4 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid iii) helix
5.5 Identify the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
108
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involute, cycloid and helix
6.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines, planes &auxiliary planes

6.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
6.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes
(HP&VP)
6.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
6.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one
plane and inclined to other plane)
6.5 Identify the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
6.6 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points and Lines (15 exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6 exercises)
Drawing Plate -9: Having problems on auxiliary planes (Having 4 exercises)
7.0 Draw the Projections of Solids
7.1 Visualise and draw the projections of solids (up to axis of solids parallel to one plane
and inclined to other plane)
Drawing plate No.10: Having problems of projection of solids (10 exercises)
8.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
8.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
8.2 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
8.3 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids by applying the principles of
hatching.
Drawing Plate–11: Having problems of section of solids (6 exercises)
9.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection
9.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
9.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a givenobject fully.
Drawing Plate 12 : (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
10.0 Prepare pictorial drawings
10.1 identify the need of pictorial drawings.
10.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
10.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
Drawing plate 13: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
11.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
11.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
11.2 Draw the development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders,
cones, pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
11.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like i) funnel ii) 900
elbow
Drawing plate No. 14: (Having 05 exercises)
109
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.No Major topic Key Competency
 Explain the linkages between Engineering

1. Importance of Engineering Drawing drawing and other subjects of study in
Diploma course.
2. Engineering Drawing Instruments  Select the correct instruments to draw various
entities in different orientation
 Write titles using sloping and vertical lettering
3. Free hand lettering & Numbering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau of Indian
standards)
 Dimension a given drawing using standard
4. Dimensioning Practice notations and desired system of dimensioning
 Construct ellipse, parabola, rectangular

5. Geometrical construction hyperbola, involute, cycloid and helix from the
given data.
Projection of points, Lines, Planes &  Draw the projections of points, straight lines,
6.
Solids planes & solids with respect to reference
planes (HP& VP)
 Draw the auxiliary views of a given
7. Auxiliary views Engineering component
 Differentiate between Auxiliary view and
apparent view
 Differentiate between true shape and
8. Sections of Solids apparent shape of section
 Apply principles of hatching.
 Draw simple sections of regular solids
9. Orthographic Projection  Draw the minimum number of views needed
to represent a given object fully.
 Differentiate between isometric scale and true
10. Isometric Views
scale.
 Draw the isometric views of given objects,.
 Prepare development of Surface of regular
11. Development of surfaces solids and other components like i) funnel ii)
900 elbow
110
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code Course Title ENGINEERING DRAWING No. of CO’s: 5 No. of Periods : 180
: A-107
CO Periods
addressing PO in Level
POs Mapped with CO No. Remarks
Column 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 40 22 1 >40% Level 3
PO2 CO3, CO4, CO5 30 17 1 Highly addressed
25% to 40% Level 2
PO3 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 50 28 2
Moderately
PO4 CO1, CO3, CO4, CO5 26 14 1 Addressed
PO5 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 34 19 1 5 to 25% Level 1
PO6 Low addressed
PO7 <5% Not addressed
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-107.1 3 2 3 2 1 1 1
A-107.2 2 2 2 1 2 1
A-107.3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3
A-107.4 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2
A-107.5 3 2 3 3 2 3 2
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
NOTES: 1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.

2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing

Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance
as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-46 –1988 –
Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in engineering education – Link between Engineering
drawing and other subjects of study.
2.0 Engineering drawing Instruments
Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales
reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -
Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes,
111
Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet, Drawing
plate:
Lay out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
Simple Exercises on the use of Drawing Instruments. Importance of Title Block.
3.0 Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils
4.0 Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape description of
an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size description -Location of features,
surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension
line extension line, leader line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in
the use of above tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system ( SP-
46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard, features “Circles
(holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.
5.0 Geometric Construction
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts
Construction of tangent lines: to draw interior and exterior tangents to two circles of given
radii and centre distance
Construction of tangent arcs:
i) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right
and obtuse angles).
ii)Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
iii)Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given circles internally and externally.
Construction of polygon:construction of any regular polygon by general method for given
side length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscribing circle radius
Conics: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a loci of
a moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their Engg. Applications viz. Projectiles,
reflectors, P-V Diagram of a hyperbolic process,
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method, Oblong Method and Arcs of circles
method, Construction of parabola by rectangle method and Tangent method
Construction of rectangular hyperbola
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point,
their engineering application, viz., Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. –
their construction
6.0 Projection of points, lines and planes & Auxiliary views
Classification of projections,Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection,Reference
Planes, Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first
angle and third angle projections
Projections of points in different quadrants
Projections of straight line -
(a) Parallel to both the planes.
112
(b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
(c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes
Projections of regular planes
(a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes
(b) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
Auxiliary views
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of
drawing an auxiliary views explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -
Partial auxiliary view.
7.0 Projections of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
8.0 Sections of Solids
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular
solids inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane
9.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of engg.
objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle
projection -Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an
object – Use of mitre line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -Method
of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe an object
fully.
10.0 Pictorial Drawings
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and
perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of
visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric
scale, and ordinary scale difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection -
Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common features like rectangles,
circular - shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of box and offset methods
11.0 Development of Surfaces
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work-Concept of
true length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel
to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -
Development of simple solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders,cones, pyramid and truncation of
these solids-Types of development: Parallel line and radial linedevelopment -Procedure of
drawing development of funnels, 900 elbow pipes.
REFERENCE BOOKS
 Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – ( McGraw-hill)
 Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
 Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
 T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.
 SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.
113
C20-A-107
ENGINEERING DRAWING
Instructions: 01. All the dimensions are in mm

02. Use first angle projections only
03. Due weightage will be given for the dimensioning and neatness
PART – A 05 x 04=20
01. Answer all the questions
02. Each question carries FIVE marks
01. Write the following in single stroke capital vertical lettering of size 10mm
ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS
02. Redraw the given fig. and dimension it according to SP-46:1988.Assume suitable scale
03. Draw internal common tangents to two unequal circles of radii 26mm and 20mm.The
distance between the circles is 75mm.
04. Draw the projections of a regular pentagon of side length 40 mm inclined to the H.P. by 30 0
and perpendicular to V.P. using auxiliary plane method
PART – B 10 X 04 = 40
01. Answer any FOUR of the following questions
02. Each question carries TEN marks
05. Draw the involute of a circle of diameter 30 mm and also draw a tangent to the curve at a
distance of 60 mm from the centre of the circle.
114
06. A right circular cone of height 80 mm and base radius 60 mm is resting in the H.P. on one of
its generators and its axis is parallel to V.P. Draw the projections of the solid.
07. A regular hexagonal prism of height 80 mm and base side 40 mm is resting in the H.P. on its
base. It is cut by an auxiliary inclined plane of 600 inclination passing through the axis at a
distance of 30 mm from the top base. Draw the sectional views of the solid and the true
section.
08. A pentagonal pyramid of height 80 mm and base side 40 mm is resting in the H.P. on its base
such that one of the sides of the base is perpendicular to the V.P. It is cut by a section plane
perpendicular to the V.P. and inclined to the H.P. by 600 and passing through the axis at a
distance of 25 mm from the base. Draw the development of the lateral surface of the
truncated pyramid.
09. Draw the front view, top view and left side view of the object shown in the fig.
10. Draw the isometric view of the component whose orthographic projections are given below
***
115
BASIC WORKSHOP PRACTICE
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods per Year

Basic Workshop
A -108 06 180
Practice
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Major Topics No of Periods

1. Fitting shop 36
2. Forging shop 39
3. Carpentry shop 51
4. Sheet metal work 48
5 Plumbing 06
Total 180
Course Title: Basic Workshop Practice Total No. Of Periods:

Code: A-108 180

1.0 To Familiarize tools used in Basic workshop processes
Course
2.0 To handle the tools appropriately and safely
Objectives:
3.0 Toreinforce theoretical concepts by practising relevant exercises of basic
workshop process

C01 A-108.1 Practice the operations in Fitting Shop
C02 A-108.2 Practice the operations in Forging Shop
C03 A-108.3 Practice the operations in Carpentry Shop
C04 A-108.4 Practice the operations in Sheet metal Shop
CO5 A-108.5 Practice the operations in Plumbing
Learning Outcomes:
1. Perform Marking and Chipping operations on Mild steel flat of 12 mm thick
1.1 Identify appropriate measuring tool

1.2 Handle appropriate marking tool
1.3 Handle appropriate chipping tool
1.4 Mark the dimensions
116
2. Cutting with hack saw of MS flats of 6mm thick
2.1 Check the raw material for size

2.2 Fix the work piece in vice
2.3 Mark the work as per given dimensions
2.4 Perform dot punching
2.5 Load and unload hack saw blade from its frame
3. Drilling, chamfering on a MS flat of 2 mm thick

3.2 Apply the chalk on the surface and on all sides of the flat
3.3 Layout the dimensions and mark the lines using dot punch
3.4 Chamfer the edges through filing
3.5 Locate the whole centres using odd leg callipers and centre punching
3.6 Identify appropriate drill bit
3.7 Load and unload drill bit from the machine
4. Tapping and Dieing on a MS flat of 2 mm thick

4.2 Identify appropriate tap and die
4.3 Secure the tap in the wrench
4.4 Perform Tapping
4.5 Hold the bar in bench vice
4.6 Fix the die in die stock
4.7 Cut external threads using a Die
4.8 Check the fit for accuracy
5. .Assembling of two pieces, matching by filing
5.1 Cut the pieces to size using hack saw

5.2 File surface of flat for trueness
5.3 Mark the surfaces as per dimensions
5.4 Perform cutting with hack saw as per marked lines
5.5 Smooth the surfaces with file
5.6 Assemble the two pieces
6. Conversion of Round to Square
6.1 Identify the holding and striking tools

6.2 Heat the specimen to the appropriate temperature
6.3 Remove the specimen and hold it on the anvil
6.4 Hammer the specimen to the required shape
117
7. Conversion of Round to Hexagon

8. Preparation of a Chisel from round rod

9. Preparation of a ring and hook from M.S round

10. Preparation of a hexagonal bolt and nut

11. Cutting of wood with hand saw
11.1 Identify the orientation of grains

11.2 Select appropriate saw for cutting in each of the directions viz. across and along the
grains
11.3 Select appropriate work holding device
11.4 Handle appropriate measuring and marking tools(Steel rule, Try square, Marking
gauge)
11.5 Mark dimensions on work using Marking gauge
11.6 Fix the work in the vice
11.7 Perform cutting along the grains using Rip saw
11.8 Perform cutting perpendicular to the grains using cross cut saw
12. Planning of wood
12.1 Identify the direction for planning wood stock

12.2 Select appropriate jack plane
12.3 Prepare the jack plane for planning
12.4 Load and unload the blade of a jack plane
118
12.6 Perform marking on work using appropriate tool
12.8 Plane the surfaces on all four sides using jack plane
13. Chiselling of wood
13.1 Select appropriate chisels and saw
13.3 Select appropriate measuring and marking tools
13.5 Mark the position of grooves on work using marking gauge
13.6 Cut sides of grooves by hand saw
13.7 Chip the material using firmer chisel by applying pressure with mallet
13.8 Finish the grooves with rasp file
14. Preparation of a Dove-tail joint

14.1 Select the appropriate cutting tools and work holding devices
14.2 Plane the wooden pieces on all sides
14.3 Mark at an angle of 150 with bevel square
14.4 Trim the dovetail by chisel to exact size
14.5 Cut the dovetail groove on second piece
14.6 Finish the groove
14.7 Assemble the two pieces to prepare dovetail halving joint by using mallet
15. Preparation of Mortise and Tenon joint
15.1 Select the appropriate cutting tools and work holding devices
15.2 Plane the two pieces to the required size using jack plane
15.3 Mark the dimensions to make Tenon using mortise gauge
15.4 Cut tenon with tenon saw along the marked lines
15.5 Use firmer chisel to remove the excess material to set finished tenon
15.6 Mark the dimension to make mortise on the second piece with mortise gauge
15.7 Use mortise chisel to provide recess in the second piece to accommodate tenon
15.8 Assemble the two pieces by fitting the tenon into mortise
16. Wood turning on lathe
16.1 Select appropriate tools

16.2 Plane the four corners of the work piece using jack plane
16.3 Mark the centres of the work on either side
16.4 Mount the work between head stock & tailstock centres
16.5 Fix the tool in the tool post & Position it in appropriate height
16.6 Start the lathe to make the work piece to revolve at desired speed
16.7 Feed the bevel gauge against the rotating work to get the required size and shape
16.8 Use outside callipers to check the diameter of the pin
16.9 Use parting off tool to reduce the diameter on either ends of the pin
16.10 Remove the rolling pin between centres and cut off excess material on either sides
119
17. Preparation of any household article (ex: stool)
17.1 Prepare the drawings of a stool required for a particular drawing table
17.2 State the specifications of the wood stock required
17.3 Identify the type of joints to be made
17.4 Identify the operations to be made and their sequence
17.5 Perform operations to produce pieces of joint
17.6 Assemble all joints as per the drawing
18. Practice on cutting of sheet
18.1 Cut the required sheet from the stock using snip
18.2 Mark the dimensions on the sheet using scriber & steel rule
18.3 Draw the circular shapes using divider
18.4 Perform rough cutting of the curved shapes using chisel and finish cutting using
snips
18.5 Cut the straight edges using straight snip
19. Formation of joints like grooved joint, locked groove joint
19.1 Cut the sheet into two halves

19.2 Form the flange on the sheet by folding the sheet along scribed lines using mallet &
stakes
19.3 Perform bending edges of sheets applying moderate pressure using mallet
19.4 Interlock the bent edges and apply pressure with mallet to make required joint
20. Preparation of a rectangular open type tray
20.1 Draw the development of the object to be made

20.2 Place the pattern on the sheet
20.3 Mark the dimensions using scriber
20.4 Shear the required piece from the stock using straight snips
20.5 Mark the lines on the sheet to form bends
20.6 Strengthen the sides of sheet by single hem using hatchet stake
20.7 Form the sheet into desired shape using stakes
20.8 Seam the corners by inserting laps of the adjacent sides with single hem
21. Preparation of hollow cylinder
21.1 Draw the development of the object to be made

21.2 Place the pattern on the sheet
21.3 Mark the dimensions using scriber
21.4 Shear the required piece from the stock using straight snips
21.5 Mark the lines on the sheet to form bends
21.6 Strengthen the sides of sheet by single hem on top & bottom side using hatchet
stake
120
21.7 Form the flat sheet into cylindrical shape by cylindrical stake and apply pressure
using mallet
21.8 Prepare single hem on to longitudinal sides in opposite directions
21.9 Interlock the sides and apply pressure to make a strong joint
22. .Preparation of pipe elbow
22.1 Draw the development of a cylindrical pipe truncated at an angle of 450 on one side
22.2 Cut the sheet over the marked dimensions using curved snips
22.3 Form the sheet into cylindrical shape using stakes
22.4 Seam the sides of two pipes using mallet
22.5 Seam the two pipes
22.6 Solder the joint to make leak proof
23. Preparation of funnel
23.1 Draw the development of upper and bottom conical parts

23.2 Place the pattern on the sheet and cut to required size
23.3 Form the sheet into conical shape using appropriate stake and mallet
23.4 Seam the top conical part and bottom conical part to obtain required funnel
24. Preparation of utility articles such as dust pan, kerosene hand pump
24.1 Draw the development of given dust pan

24.2 Scribe the lines on the sheet and cut to required size
24.3 Hem all the four sides to strengthen the edges
24.3 Form the sheet into designed shape using suitable stakes and mallet
24.4 Solder the corner lap joints to make the required dust pan
24. Preparation of pipe joint with pipe fittings
24.1 Select the plumbing tools: pipe wrench, pipe vice, Hack Saw, Pipe Cutter, pipe
Threading Dies
24.2 select pipe fittings: Coupling, union, nipple, Elbow, Tee, Reducer
24.3 Perform pipe fitting operations on the pipe
24. Thread cutting on Pipe
25.1 Select the plumbing tools: pipe wrench, pipe vice, Hack Saw, Pipe Cutter, pipe
Threading Dies
25.2 Perform thread cutting on pipe
121
No. of No. of
Course Code: A-108 Course Title: Workshop Practice - I
COs: 5 Periods: 180
Level Remarks
Mapping with CO No PO in Col 1
POs (1,2,3)
No % >40% Level 3 (Highly
Addressed)
PO1 CO1,CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 24 13 1 25% to 40% Level 2
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 36 20 1 (Moderately Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 60 34 3 5% to 25% Level 1
PO4 CO1,CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 24 13 1 ( Low Addressed)
PO5 CO1,CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 24 13 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO6 CO2,CO5 12 7 1
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-108.1 3 1 1 3 3 3 2 3
A-108.2 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 1 3
A-108.3 3 2 2 3 3 2 1 3
A-108.4 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3
A-108.5 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 1 3
the following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit
vii) Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
COURSE CONTENT
FITTING SHOP
1. Marking and chipping on Mild – steel flat 12 mm thick.
2. Cutting with hack saw, M.S. Flats of 6 mm thick.
3. Marking, cutting, drilling, Chamfering and tapping on a M.S. Flat 12 mm thick.
4. Assembling of two pieces, Matching by filing (6 mm thick M.S. Plate)
FORGING SHOP
1. Conversion of round to square.
2. Conversion of round to Hexagon.
3. Preparation of chisel from round rod.
4. Preparation of ring and hook from M.S. round.
5. Preparation of a hexagonal bolt and nut.
CARPENTRY SHOP
1. Cutting of wood with hand saw.
2. Planning of wood.
3. Planning and chiselling of wood.
4. Orientation of wood grain.
122
EE -1
5. Preparation of dovetail joint.

6. Mortise and tenon joint.
7. Wood turning on a lathe.
8. Preparation of one household article.
SHEET METAL WORK
1. Practice on cutting of sheet
2. Formation of joints like grooved joints, locked groove joint
3. Preparation of a rectangular open type tray
4. Preparation of hollow cylinder
5. Preparation of pipe elbow
6. Preparation of mug.
7. Preparation of funnel
8. Preparation of utility articles such as dustpan, kerosene hand pump.
Plumbing Practice
1Familiarization of Plumbing Tools
2 Familiarization of Pipefitting
3. Familiarization of Plumbing Operations
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Manufacturing Technology (VolI ) by P N Rao (McGraw Hill)
2. Principles of Foundry Technology by P L Jain (McGraw Hill)
3. Workshop Practice Vol- I by HajraChoudhury Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt Ltd.
123
PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE
(C-20 CURRIUCULUM COMMON TO ALL
BRANCHES)
Subject Code Subject Title Periods per week Total periods per year
A-109 A Physics Laboratory 03 45
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No.of
Periods
1. Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers 03
2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge 03
3. Verification of Parallelogram law of forces and Triangle law of forces 03
4. Simple pendulum 03
5. Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method) 03
6. Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & Combination) (Single 03
lens only) index of solid using traveling microscope
Refractive
7. 03
8. Boyle’s law verification 03
9. Meter bridge 03
10. Mapping of magnet lines of force and locate null points 03
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
11. Surface tension of liquid using traveling microscope 03
12. Coefficient of viscosity by capillary method 03
Revision 06
Test 03
Total 45
Objectives:
1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes and areas of a cylinder and sphere
and their comparison etc .
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate, cross sectional area
of a wire and volumes of sphere and also their comparison etc
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum
5.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
centigrade.
6.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using distant object method , U-
method , U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods and their comparison.
7.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
8.0 Verify the Boyle’s law employing a Quill tube.
9.0 Determine the specific resistance of material of a wirel using Meter Bridge.
124
10.0 Drawing magnetic lines of force under N-S and N-N methods and locate null points.
11.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling Microscope (Demo)
12.0 Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method (Demo)

Name of the
Competencies Key competencies
Experiment
(Nopractice
1. Hands on of Periods)
on  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Vernier Calipers(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate the requisite
 Read the scales physical quantities of
 Calculate the physical given objects
quantities of given object
2. Hands on practice on  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Screw gauge(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass  Calculate cross section of
place and cross section of
wire and other quantities
wire and other quantities
3. Verification of  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

Parallelogram law of forces  Note the positions of equilibrium point
and Triangle law of threads on drawing sheet  Constructing
forces(03)  Find the angle at parallelogram
equilibrium point
 Construct triangle
 Construct parallelogram
 Compare the ratios of
 Compare the measured force and length
diagonal
 Construct triangle
 Find the length of sides
 Compare the ratios
4. Simple pendulum(03)  Fix the simple pendulum to  Find the time for number
the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of  Find the time period
pendulum  Calculate the acceleration
 Find the time for number of due to gravity
oscillations  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Find the time period
 Calculate the acceleration
due to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
125
5. Velocity of sound in air  Adjust the reservoir level
–Resonance method  Find the first and second
(03)  Arrange the resonance
apparatus resonanting lengths
 Adjust the reservoir level for  Calculate velocity of
booming sound sound at room
temperature
 Find the first and second
resonanting lengths  Calculate velocity of
sound at 00 C
 Calculate velocity of sound
6. Focal length and Focal  Calculate the focal

power of convex lens length and power of
 Fix the object distance
(Separate & Combination) convex lens
(03)  Find the Image distance
 Calculate the focal length  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
and power of convex lens graphs
and combination of convex
lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
graphs
7. Refractive index of solid  Find the least count of  Read the scale
using traveling vernier on microscope  Calculate the refractive
microscope(03)  Place the graph paper index of glass slab
below microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab
8. Boyle’s law verification  Note the atmospheric  Find the length of air
(03) pressure column
 Fix the quill tube to retort  Find the pressure of
stand enclosed air
 Find the length of air  Find the value P x l
column
 Find the pressure of
enclosed air
 Find and compare the
calculated value P x l
126
9. Meter bridge(03)  Make the circuit  Find the balancing length
connections  Calculate unknown
 Find the balancing length resistance
 Calculate unknown
 Calculate the specific
resistance
resistance
 Find the radius of wire
 Calculate the specific
resistance
10. Mapping of magnet lines  Draw magnetic
of force(03) meridian  Draw magnetic lines
 Placed the bar magnet of
in NN and NS directions force
 Draw magnetic lines of  Locate the neutral
force
points
 Locate the neutral
points along equatorial along equatorial and
and axial lines axial lines
11. Surface tension of liquid  Find the least count of  Read the scale
using traveling vernier on microscope  Calculate height of liquid
microscope(03)  Focus the microscope to the rise
lower meniscus & bent pin
 Calculate the surface
 Read the scale
tension of water
 Calculate height of liquid
rise
 Calculate the surface
tension of water
12.. Coefficient of viscosity  Find the least count of  Find the pressure head
by capillary method(03) vernier  Calculate rate of volume
 Fix the capillary tube to of liquid collected
aspiratory bottle
 Find the radius of
 Find the mass of collected
water capillary tube
 Find the pressure head  Calculate the viscosity of
 Calculate rate of volume of water
liquid collected
 Find the radius of capillary
tube
 Calculate the viscosity of
water using capillary
method
127
Scheme of Valuation for end Lab Practical Examination :
A. Writing Aim, Apparatus, Formula, Graph, Precautions carries 10 (Ten) Marks

B. For Drawing the table, taking Readings, Calculation work,
Drawing the graph, finding result carries 15 (Fifteen) Marks
C. Viva Voice 05 (Five) Marks
Total 30 (Thirty) Marks
 Course outcomes
Experiments with Vernier calipers, Screw gauge, Parallelogram law and
CO1
Triangle law
Experiments with Simple pendulum, Resonance apparatus (Velocity of
CO2
sound in air )
Course
Experiments with Convex lens, Refractive index of solid by travelling
Outcomes CO3
microscope
Experiments with quill tube (Boyles law verification), Meter bridge,
CO4
Mapping of magnetic lines of force
CO5 Experiments with Surface tension and Viscosity
 COs-PO mapping strength (as per given table)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 1 2
3 = strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped
128
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(C-20 curriculum common to all Branches)
Subject Subject Title Periods per week Total periods per

Code year
A-109B Chemistry Laboratory 03 45
CO1 Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of standard solution
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable precipitation
CO5 Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations with instrument for
investigation of water pollution parameters
PO CO mapping
Course code Chemistry Laboratory No Of periods 45

C-109B No of Cos;5
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing Level remarks
No PO in Col 1 1,2,3
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3, 9 20 1 level2(moderately
CO4,CO5 addressed 5% to 25%
PO3 level1 (Low addressed <
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 5%(not addressed)
CO4,CO5
PO5 CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5
PO6
PO7
COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 2 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 2 1
3=strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped
129
Note:
The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No.of Mapped
Periods with COs
1. a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
laboratory by senses. CO1
03
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis
2. Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions of different dilution 03 CO1

Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3 solution
3. solution. 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl solution 03 CO2
5. Estimation of H 2 SO 4 usingStd.NaOH solution 03 CO2
6. Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using Std.KMnO4 03 CO3
7. Determination of acidity of water sample 03 CO2
8. Determination of alkalinity of water sample 03 CO2
9. Determination of total hardness of water using Std. EDTA solution 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample 03 CO4
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O )in water sample 03 CO5
12. Determination of pH using pH meter 03 CO5
13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength 03 CO5
required level.
14. Determination of turbidity of water 03 CO5
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample 03 CO5
Total: 45
Objectives:
1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask,
burettes) and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making
dilutions, etc. To identify the chemical compounds and solutions by senses.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor
estimation of HCl
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for estimation
of NaOH
130
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. NaOH solution for
estimation of H 2 SO 4
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4solution for
estimation of Mohr’s Salt
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given samples
of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution
10.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the
given samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
11.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open
container / tap water)
12.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to
determine their pH using standard pH meter
13.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions
a) To determine conductivity
b) To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
14.0 Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non coloured) to determine
their turbidity in NTU
15.0 To determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one
surface / tap water)
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Familiarization of methods for
Volumetric analysis. Recognition -
of chemical substances And --
solutions(03)
 Weighing the salt to the  Weighing the salt to the

accuracy of .01 mg accuracy of .01 mg
Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and  Measuring the water with  Measuring the water with
making solutions of different volumetric flask, measuring volumetric flask, measuring
dilution(03) jar, volumetric pipette and jar, volumetric pipette and
graduated pipette graduated pipette
 Making appropriate dilutions  Making appropriate dilutions
 Cleaning the glassware and  Making standard solutions

Estimation of HCl solution using
Std. Na2CO3solution (03) rinsing with appropriate  Measuring accurately the
131
Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl solutions standard solutions and
solution (03)  Making standard solutions titrants
Estimation of H 2 SO 4 using  Measuring accurately the  Effectively Controlling the
Std.NaOH solution (03) standard solutions and titrants flow of the titrant
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using  Filling the burette with titrant  Identifying the end point
Std.KMnO4 (03)
 Fixing the burette to the stand  Making accurate
Determination of acidity of water  Effectively Controlling the flow observations
sample (03)
of the titrant
Determination of alkalinity of
 Identifying the end point
water sample (03)
 Making accurate observations
Determination of total hardness
of water using Std. EDTA solution  Calculating the results
(03)
Estimation of Chlorides present

in water sample (03)
Estimation of Dissolved
Oxygen(D.O) in water sample (By
titration method) (03)
 Familiarize with
Determination of pH using pH instrument
meter (03)  Choose appropriate
‘Mode’ / ‘Unit’  Prepare standard
 Prepare standard solutions / buffers, etc.
Determination of conductivity of
solutions / buffers, etc.  Standardize the
water and adjusting ionic strength
 Standardize the instrument with
to required level (03)
instrument with appropriate standard
appropriate standard solutions
solutions  Plot the standard curve
 Plot the standard curve  Make measurements
Determination of turbidity of  Make measurements accurately
water (03) accurately
 Follow Safety precautions
132
 Measuring the accurate
volume and weight of  Measuring the accurate
sample volume and weight of
 Filtering and air drying sample
without losing any filtrate  Filtering and air drying
Estimation of total solids present
 Accurately weighing the without losing any
in water sample (03)
filter paper, crucible and filtrate
filtrate  Accurately weighing the
 Drying the crucible in an filter paper, crucible and
oven filtrate
SCHEME OF VALUATION
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus ,principle and procedure 5M

B) Demonstrated competencies 20M
Making standard solutions
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant
Identifying the end point
Making accurate observations
C) Viva-voce 5M
---------------
Total 30M
---------------
133
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB
Course No. of Total No. of

Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods
A-110
Computer
(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)
Time schedule:
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of sessions No.of Periods
each of 3 periods
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90
Course i)To know Hardware Basics

Objectives ii)To familiarize operating systems
iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.
At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 A-110.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 A-110.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word
processing software
Course CO3 A-110.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to draw
Outcomes various graphs / charts.
CO4 A-110.4 Use Power point software to develop effective presentation
for a given theme or topic.
CO5 A-110.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop
134
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
A-110.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
A-110.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
A-110.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
A-110.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
A-110.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped
Learning Outcomes:
I. Computer Hardware Basics
1. a) To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections
b) To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c) To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV.Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout

14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT

23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
135
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop

33. To familiarize with standard toolbox
34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colours of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.
Key competencies:
Expt No Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies
1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to
Computer system and Computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power Switch
vi) Start Button vii) Reset
Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using
Start menu
b. Access application programs b. Use taskbar and

using Start menu, Task Task manager
136
manager
c. Use Help support
2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed the details
3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
present in your computer speed manager and find
b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related
status of devices like mouse to the details
and key board required
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename ,
arrange and search
b. Use copy / paste move for the required
commands to organize files folder/file
and folders
c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted files

Working with Files and size, type, Modified from Recycle bin
Folders d. Search a file or folder and find
Continued.... its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
137
5. To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
Accessories: Calculator accessories and
Calculator – Notepad – b. Access Calculator using Run select correct text
WordPad – MS Paint command editor based on the
c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and create and save in the
.jpeg, .bmp files using MS required format.
Paint
6. To familiarize with Ribbon a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document

layout of MS word. – b. Use Save and Save as features and name
Home – Insert- page c. Work on two Word appropriately and
layout- References-Review- documents simultaneously save
View d. Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
Printing options print options
7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and
Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace c. Use spell check/
features in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar
8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and
techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers
9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of rows fields – Deleting rows and word document and
and columns columns –inserting sub table – edit
marking borders. Merging and b. Use sort option for
splitting of cells in a Table arranging data.
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows / columns
138
features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order
10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.
11. To Use Mail merge feature a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical
symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and
b. Insert a symbol in the text Equations in the word
c. Insert mathematical equations document
in the document
13. To Practice with MS-EXCEL a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
spreadsheet and familiarize excel layout and
with MS Excel 2007 layout like use
MS office Button- b. Use various
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- features available
Title Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets- in toolbar
Formula Bar-Status Bar
14. To access and Enter data in a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap by various
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a addressing
File-Close Excel methods
b. Enter data and edit
15. To edit spread sheet Copy, a. Insert and Delete Columns and Format the excel
Cut, Paste, and selecting Rows-Create Borders-Merge sheet
cells and Center
b. Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
139
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in Enter formula for
Formulae automatic calculations
c. Use Automatic updating
function of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help
18. To Create Excel Functions, a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , involving cross
Count and Count If Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a
worksheet by
selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and
graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports of Create Lab reports using MS a. Insert Practical
respective discipline Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet in a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
Excel, page setup and print b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers
symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Ribbon Use various options in Access required
layout &features of PowerPoint options in the tool bar
PowerPoint 2007. a. Home
140
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint Presentation PowerPoint PowerPoint
b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipAr
c. PowerPoint Bullets t and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master Slide in a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
PowerPoint and add notes Template and format
b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
26. To Insert Text and Objects a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
b. Set Indents and line spacing Objects
c. Insert pictures/ clipart Use 3d features
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
141
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background
30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in
Add narration to the slide appropriate
b. Adjust the volume in the format.
settings b. Add narration to
c. Insert video file in the format the slide
supported by PowerPoint in a c. Use hyperlinks to
slide switch to
d. Use automatic and on click different slides
options and files
e. Add narration to the slide
f. Insert Hyperlinks
31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects

effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide show
d. Set up resolution c. Add timing to the
e. Exercise with Rehearse slides
Timings feature in PowerPoint d. Setup automatic
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool slide show
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out
33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph
standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color & Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text
Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
142
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool
34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image

b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of a corresponding tools.
photo
d. Remove the part of
photograph including graphics
and text
35 To insert Borders around a. Start with a single background Able to create a
photograph layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas add visual interest to
d. Create a border color a photo
e. Send the border color to the
back
f. Experiment with different
colors
36 To change Background of a a. open the foreground and Able to swap
Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools to using the Select and
paint over the image Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using: Able to control color
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool saturation
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment
layer tool
38 To prepare a cover page for a. open a file with height 500 and Able to prepare cover
the book in subject area width 400 for the cover page. page for the book
b. apply two different colors to
work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options
143
39 To adjust the brightness a. open a file. Able to control
and contrast of picture to b. Go to image→ adjustments→ brightness/contrast.
give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast.
c. adjust the brightness and
contrast.
d. Save the image.
40 To type a word and apply a. open a file Able to apply shadow

the shadow emboss effects b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended
option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
144
I YEAR INTERNAL LAB EXAMINATION
UNIT TEST - I
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: A-110

MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min
1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.
3. Identify the components on motherboard.
4. Perform the process of placing processor on CPU slot.
5. Perform the process of removing and placing the RAM in the corresponding slot.
6. Identify the CMOS battery and test whether it is working it or not.
7. Find details of following:
a) Operating System being used.
b) Processor name
c) RAM
d) Hard disk
8. Create a folder by your name, search a file or folder and find its path.
9. Draw the National Flag using MS Paint.
10. Create a word document that contains TEN names of your classmates (boys-5 & girls-5) and
perform the following tasks:
a) Save the document to your desktop.
b) Sort the names in each list alphabetically.
c) Set line spacing to 1.15.
d) Use bullet points for the names in both lists separately.
***
145
UNIT TEST - II

1. Write individually addressed letters to your friends about the Republic Day celebration
using Mail Merge.
2. Create a Word document about your college and insert page numbers in footer and College
Name in header.
3. Create your class time table using Tables in MS Word.
4. Create a 2-page document about your College& insert hyperlinks for courses offered in the
college and insert Bookmarks next to College Name.
5. Write individually addressed letters to your friends (at least 5 members) to intimate the
External Examination time table using Mail Merge.
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
6. Write an equation (𝑥−𝑦)2 = 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2 in MS word.
7. Create the organizational structure of your college in MS Word.

8. Create a spreadsheet by totalling marks of 3 or more subjects, then calculate percentage and
hence find grade based on boundary conditions of FIVE students:
Grades O >= 90%, A >=80%, B >=70%, C >=60%, D >=50%, E >=40%, F <40%
9. Create a Excel spreadsheet for the following data, making sure that the cell marked with
Category (A1) is pasted in cell A1 in the spreadsheet and perform the questions below.
Category (A1) Product Name Quantity Inventory Price per Unit Total Price
Office Supplies Binder 2 20 12.99 25.98
Office Supplies Pencil 20 20 0.99
Electronics Samsung 4K Smart TV 1 5 399.00
Electronics Bluetooth Speakers 4 5 44.49
Computers Lenovo X230 12in Laptop 2 2 279.90
a) Change the format of the “Total Price” column to “Currency” format.

b) Calculate Total Price by writing formula.
c) Turn on filtering for the table.
d) Sort the table by column “Category” from A to Z.
10. Create a spreadsheet to calculate Cumulative monthly attendance for a period of Three months.
***
146
UNIT TEST - III

1. Create a PowerPoint Presentation about your College in 5 slides only.

2. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Hardware in minimum 5 slides.
3. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Fundamentals with Entrance, Emphasis effects
in minimum 5 slides.
4. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on any topic with special animation effects like Entrance,
Motion Paths &Exit.
5. Resize the image using Photoshop.
6. Change the background of a Photograph.
7. Edit an image by using
a) Crop tool.
b) Resize the image
c) Save the new image with new name keeping original image as it is.
8. A Picture of two parrots (parrots.jpg) is given to you. Make anyone of one of the parrots in
Black & White.
9. Convert a colour image to monochrome and improve quality of photograph.
10. Copy three pictures and fit into the empty frames.
***
147
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
MODEL PRACTICAL QUESTION PAPER-YEAR END EXAM

MAX MARKS:60 TIME: 3HOURS
1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.
3. Write the procedure to create the files and folders
4. Write the procedure to access Calculator, Paint and Notepad application
5. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Size
(b) Change the Font Style
(c) Change the Text Size
6. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Color.
(b) Use Various Text Alignment Options.
(c) Format text in Bold, Italic and Underline.
7. Create the hierarchy of your family in MS Word.
8. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word:
(a) Insert a Table
(b) Add a Row
(c) Add a column
(d) Delete a Row
(e) Delete a column
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
9. Write the procedure to use Equation(𝑥−𝑦)2 = 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2 and Symbols.
10. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Excel

(a) To Modify Column Width
(b) To Modify Row Height
(c) Format text in Bold, Italic, and Underline.
11. Write the procedure to create charts and Graphs in MS Excel.
12. Write the procedure to create simple Power Point Presentation on your college in Three
slides.
13. Write the procedure to perform Animation on Text and Objects in your presentation.
148
14. Take a photographic image. Give a title for the image. Put the border. Write your names.
Write the Name of Institution and Place.
15. Prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area. Plan your own design.
16. You are given a picture of a flower and associated background (Extract.jpg).Extract the
Flower only from that and organize it on a background. Select your own background for
organization.
17. You are given a picture (BrightnessContrast.jpg). Adjust the brightness and contrast of the
picture so that it gives an elegant look.
18. You are given a picture (position.jpg). Position the picture preferably on a plain background
of a color of your choice - Positioning include rotation and scaling.
19. Remove the arrows and text from the given photographic image(Filename: photo.jpg).
20. Type a word; apply the following effects. Shadow Emboss.
***
149
III SEMESTER
150
III Semester
Instruction
Subjec Total
Name of the Subject Durat End Tota
t Code Periods Session
The Practical ion Exam l
al
ory /Tutorial (hour Mark Mar
Marks
s) s ks
THEORY
Engineering
A-301 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Mathematics - II
Automobile Power
A-302 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Plants
Automobile 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
A-303
Transmission System
Engineering Materials
A-304 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
and Manufacturing
Processes
A-305 Thermal Engineering 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
and Electronics 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
A-306
Systems
PRACTICAL
A-307 Machine Drawing - 6 90 3 40 60 100
Automobile Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100

A-308
A-309 Workshop Practice – II - 6 90 3 40 60 100

Automobile Electrical & - 3 45 3 40 60 100
A-310
Electronics Laboratory
TOTAL 24 18 360+270 - 280 720 1000
151
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Engineering
A-301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II

1 Indefinite Integration 22 CO1
2 Definite Integration and its applications 24 CO2
3 Differential Equations of first order 14 CO3
Total Periods 60
(i) To understand the concepts of indefinite integrals and definite integrals

with applications to engineering problems.
Course Objectives
(ii) To understand the formation of differential equations and learn various
methods of solving them.
CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

Course Outcomes CO2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
CO3 Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of first
order and first degree.
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.
L.O. 1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals  (u + v) dx
and  ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3. Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i)  f(ax + b) dx where f(x)dx is in standard form.
ii)  [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii)  f (x)/[f(x)] dx
iv)  f {g(x)} g (x) dx
152
1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.
1.6. Evaluate the integrals of the form sinmx cosn x dx where m and n are suitable positive
integers.
1.7. Evaluate integrals of suitable powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2
1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
1.9. Evaluate the integrals of the type
1 1 1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos d and  a cos  b sin   cd .
1.10. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.11. Solve problems using integration by parts.

1.12 . Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form u.vdx .
1.13. Evaluate the integrals of the form e [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
x
Unit-II
C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
L.O. 2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3. Solve problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above concept.
2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
2.6. Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.

2.7. Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
2.8. Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the functions in any given interval.
2.9. Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.
2.10. Solve some problems using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule for approximation of
integrals.
Unit -III
C.O. 3 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree.
L.O. 3.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
3.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
3.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
3.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable
method.
3.5 Solve Homogeneous differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.6 Solve exact differential equation of first order and first degree.
153
3.7 Solve linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q, where P and Q are functions
of x or constants.
3.8 Solve Bernoulli’s differential equation reducible to linear form.
3.9 Solve simple problems arising in engineering applications.
C-20
Engineering Mathematics – II
CO/PO – Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 3 2.3 2.6
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)
concerned teacher.
PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical techniques and to apply them in
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tools, along with analytical
applications.
154
CO periods addressing PO in
Mapped with CO Level
PO no column I Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)
Number %
1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 >40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 Highly
3 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 addressed
4 CO2, CO3 38 63.3% 3
5 25% to 40%
6 Level 2
7 Moderately
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 addressed
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 40 66.6% 3
5% to 25% Level
1 Low addressed
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 48 75% 3
<5% Not
addressed
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration.
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions. Properties of
indefinite integrals. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec
 sin
m
x, cosec x. Integrals of the form x.cos n x dx, where at least one of m and n is odd
positive integers. Integrals of suitable powers of tanx. secx and cosecx.cotx by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2
1 1 1
ii ) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions.
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form  ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-II
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum. Area under plane
curves – Area enclosed between two curves. Mean and RMS values of a function on a given
155
interval Volumes of solids of revolution. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an
approximate value of a define integral.
Unit -III
Differential Equations:
3. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation- formation of
differential equations-solutions of differential equations of first order and first degree using
methods, variables separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s
equation.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for third semester diploma courses, prepared &
prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
BLUE PRINT
S. Chapter/Unit No of Weight Marks wise Question wise COs

No title Periods age distribution of weight distribution of weight mapped
allotted age age
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I:
1 Indefinite 22 28 11 11 06 0 2 2 2 0 CO1
Integration
Unit – II:
Definite
2 Integration 24 33 11 03 11 08 2 1 2 1 CO2
and its
applications
Unit – III:
Differential
3 14 19 03 03 03 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Equations of
first order
Total 60 80 25 17 20 18 5 4 5 2
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5
Unit Test-II From L.O 2.6 to L.O 3.9
156
C –20, A-301
UNIT TEST MODEL PAPERS
UNIT TEST I
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: A-301
Part-A 16Marks
each.
 x dx
8
a. Evaluate (CO1)
1
b. Evaluate  4  x2
dx. (CO1)
 e  f ( x)  f ( x)  dx  e f ( x)  c is true/false
x ' x
c. (CO1)

2
d. Evaluate cos xdx 
0
(CO2)
 1

Evaluate  3cos ec x  2 tan x sec x 
2
2.  dx. (CO1)
x
sin  log x 
3. Evaluate  dx. (CO1)
x

x
4. Evaluate e sin 2 xdx. (CO1)

2
 sin
2
5. Evaluate xdx (CO2)
0
157
Part-B 3×8=24

1
6. A) Evaluate  dx. (CO1)
5  4 cos x
or

4 3
B) Evaluate sin x cos xdx. (CO1)
 1  x2 
7. 
A) Evaluate cos 1  2 
 1 x 
dx. (CO1)
or

4 2x
B) Evaluate x e dx. (CO1)

2
8. A) Evaluate  cos 4 x cos xdx
0
(CO2)
or

2
sin10 x
B) Evaluate 0 sin10 x  cos10 x dx (CO2)
-o0o-
158
C –20, A-301
Unit Test II
First Year
Sub Code: A-301
Part-A 16Marks

each.
a. Volume of the curve y  f ( x) over the interval  a, b  when rotated about X-axis is
____________ (CO2)
b. Mean value of f ( x) over the interval  a, b  is____________ (CO2)
d2y
c. Order of differential equation  p 2 y  0 is__________ (CO3)
dx 2
dy
d. Integrating factor of  Py  Q is________________ (CO3)
dx
2. Find the mean value of x 2  2 x  1 over the interval 1, 2 (CO2)
Find the area enclosed by curve x  4 y between the lines x  2 and x  4

2
3. (CO2)
4. Form the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants from
y  A cos 2 x  B sin 2 x. (CO3)
dy 1 y2
5. Solve  . (CO3)
dx 1  x2
159
Part-B 3×8=24

A) Find the area bounded between the curve y  x  5x and the line y  4  2 x
2
6.
(CO2)
Or
B) Find the R.M.S value of log x between the lines x  e to x  e2 (CO2)
x2 y 2
7. A) Find the volume of the solid obtained by revolving the ellipse   1 about x axis
16 25
(CO2)
or
6
1
B) Calculate the approximate value of  1  x dx by taking n  6 using Trapezoidal rule
0
(CO3)
8. A) Solve  y 2  2 xy  dx   2 xy  x 2  dy  0. (CO3)
or
dy y
B) Solve x   x3 y 6 . (CO3)
dx x
-o0o-
END EXAM MODEL PAPERS

160
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS A-301
PART-A
 4 
  2sin x  3 e 
x
1. Evaluate  dx. CO1
1  x2 
 e sin e dx.
x x
2. Evaluate CO1
3. Evaluate  sin 3x cos 2xdx. CO1
 xe dx.
x
4. Evaluate CO1
1
1
5. Evaluate  1 x
0
2
dx. CO2
6. Find the mean value of y  x 2 from x  0 to x  1 CO2
7. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve y  sin x from x  0 to x  
CO2
2
 d3y 
2
 dy 
8. Find the order and degree of the differential equation  3   3    x  1
2
 dx   
dx
CO3
dy 1  y 2
9. Solve  CO3
dx 1  x 2
10. Solve x 2
 y  dx   y 2  x  dy  0. CO3
PART-B
3x  1
11. A) Evaluate   x  1 x  3 dx. CO1
Or
1
B) Evaluate  5  4 cos x dx. CO1
12. A) Evaluate  x sin 3xcosxdx. CO1

161
Or
x
3
B) Evaluate cos xdx. CO1
1
x3
13. A) Evaluate  dx. CO2
0
1  x8
Or

2
1
B) Evaluate  1  tan
0
3
x
dx. CO2
14. A) Find the area of the region bounded by the curves y 2  4 x and x 2  4 y . CO2
Or
B) Find the R.M.S values of 27  4x 2 from x  0 to x  3 CO2
x2 y 2
15. A) Find the volume of the solid generated by revolution of the ellipse   1 about
16 25
X-axis CO2
Or
11
 x dx by using Simpson’s 1/3

3 rd
B) Calculate the approximate value of rule by dividing the
1
range into 10 equal parts. CO2

PART-C
dy
16. Solve 2sin x  y cos x  xy 3e x . CO3
dx
***
162
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER-II MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
 x 3
1. Evaluate 
 3 e  2cos x   dx.
x
CO1
 cos
2
2. Evaluate 2 xdx. CO1
tan 1 x
3. Evaluate  dx. CO1
1  x2
4. Evaluate  x cos xdx. CO1
2
1
5. Evaluate 
0 4  x2
dx. CO2
6. Find the mean value of i  a sin t over the complete wave. CO2
7. Find the volume generated by revolving the circle x 2  y 2  9 from x  0 to
x  2 about x-axis CO2

8. Obtain the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants A and B
from the curve y  Ae x  Be x CO3
dy
9. Solve  e2 x  y CO3
dx
dy y
10. Solve  x CO3
dx x
PART-B
1
11. A) Evaluate  2x 2
 3x  5
dx. CO1
Or
B) Evaluate  sin CO1
3
x cos5 xdx.
163
 2  sin 2 x 
e
x
12. A) Evaluate   dx. CO1
 1  cos 2 x 
Or
e
2x 4
B) Evaluate x dx. CO1
1
sec2 x
13. A) Evaluate  1  tan x 
0
2
dx. CO2
Or

2
B) Evaluate log 1  tan   d .
 CO2
0
14. A) Find the area bounded between the curves y  x 2 and the line y  3x  4 . CO3
Or
B) Find the R.M.S value of log x between the lines x  e to x  e2 CO2
15. A) Find the volume of right circular cone using integration. CO2
Or
1
1
B) Find the approximate value of  from  1 x
0
2
dx using Trapezoidal rule by dividing
0,1 into 5 equal sub-intervals. CO2
PART-C
16. Solve xy 2 dy   x3  y 3  dx  0 CO3
***
164
AUTOMOBILEPOWERPLANTS
Course Title Course Code Periods/Week Periods/Semester

Automobile Power
A-302 04 60
Plants
TIME SCHEDULE
Part – B Part – C
Sl. Weighta Part – A Short
Periods Essay Essay
No. Major Topic ge of Type
Allocated Type Type
marks (3 marks)
(8 marks) (10 marks)
1 EngineConstruction 8 7 1 ½
2 IC Engines 10 11 1 1
3 InletandExhaust System 06 6 2 0
Fuel supply System in Petrol
4 08 11 1 1
Engine
Fuel Supply System in Diesel
5 08 11 1 1
Engine
6 Lubrication System 06 11 1 1
7 Cooling System 06 7 1 ½
8 Fuels & Combustion 08 6 2 0

Part C Question having 10 marks
weightage from CO3 or CO4 or 10 1
C05
TOTAL 60 80 10 5 1
Course Code:
Title: Automobile Power Plants Total No. of Periods: 60
A – 302
1. Understand the constructional details and working of I.C. Engines
2. Understand the working of inlet, exhaust, cooling and lubrication
Course Objectives: system of I.C engine
3. Appreciate the working of fuel supply system in diesel and petrol
engines, fuel and combustion and combustion phenomenon in
petrol and diesel engines.
165
C01 A-302.1 Explain the classification and constructional details of I.C engine.
C02 A-302.2 Distinguish between 2 stroke and 4 stroke I.C. engine.
Discuss the working of 1. Inlet 2.exhaust, 3. Coolingand 4. Lubrication systems of
C03 A-302.3
an I.C engine.
C04 A-302.4 Analyse the fuel supply system in diesel and petrol engines
C05 A-302.5 Analyse the combustion phenomenon in diesel and petrol engines.
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Uponcompletionofthecoursethestudentshallbe ableto
1.0 Engine Construction
1.1 State the types of engines
1.2 List the components of I.C engine
1.3 Explain theconstructionaldetails,materials use and functions of engine components.
1.4 Explain the use of 1. Wet liner 2. Dry liner & 3. Piston ring.
1.5 State the firingorderarrangementfor4 -cylinders,6 - cylindersand 8 – cylinder in line and V-
type engines
1.6 Explainthe valvearrangement in L-type,I-type,F-type&T-typeengines with sketches
1.7 List typesof gaskets used in an engine and their material
1.8 State the function of valve actuating mechanism, its components, tappet and valve
1.9 Explain the overhead valve and i-VTEC (intelligent variable valve timing and lift electronic
control) mechanism with neat sketches.
1.10 State the function, importance of flywheel and vibration damper
2.0 I.C.Engines
2.1 List the Classification of I.C. Engines
2.2 Explain the working principle of 2 stroke and 4 stroke petrol engines with sketches
2.3 Explain the working principle of 2 stroke and 4 stroke diesel engines with sketches
2.4 Differentiate between petrol and diesel engines
2.5 Differentiate between 2 stroke and 4 stroke engines
2.6 Draw the valve timing diagram for 4 stroke petrol and diesel engines
2.7 State the function of combustion chamber
2.8 List types of combustion chambers in C.I and S.I (diesel and petrol) engine
2.9 Explain different types of C.I Engine combustion chambers with sketches
2.10 State the advantages and disadvantages of different types of C.I Engine combustionchambers
3.0 Inlet and Exhaust System
3.1 State the functions of air cleaner
3.2 List different types of air cleaners
3.3 Explaintheworking of differenttypesof Air cleaners
3.4 State the necessity of Manifolds
3.5 State the requirement of good manifold design
3.6 State the necessity of Mufflers
166
3.7 Describe different types of Mufflers with simple sketches
4.0 Fuel Supply System in Petrol (S.I) Engines
4.1 Sketch the line diagram of petrol engine fuel supply system and identify the parts
4.2 Describe the function of each component of fuel supply system viz., fuel tank, fuel filter, fuel
Pump, carburettor etc.,
4.3 List the types of fuel pumps
4.4 Explain the construction and working of mechanical and electrical fuel pumps
4.5 State the functions of carburettor
4.6 Describe simple carburettor with a sketch
4.7 List the types of defects in simple carburettor
4.8 State the air fuel ratio for different operating conditions of petrol engine
4.9 Explain various circuits of a carburettor
5.0 Fuel Supply System in Diesel (C.I) Engines
5.1 Draw the line diagram of fuel supply system in diesel engine and identify the parts
5.2 State the function of fuel filter, fuel feed pump, fuel injection pump and fuel injector
5.3 List the types of fuel filters and fuel Injectors.
5.4 State the requirement of fuel injection pump
5.5 List different types of fuel injection system in C I Engines like air injection, solid injection,
unit injection system, individual pump, distributor pump system, common rail diesel
injection system
5.6 Explain the layout of common rail diesel injection system (CRDI)
5.7Explain the working of fuel injection pump and fuel injector with neat sketches.
5.8State the function of governor and classify them
5.9Explain the working of mechanical and pneumatic governors.
6.0 Lubrication System
6.1 State the necessity of lubrication in I.C engines
6.2 ClassifythelubricantsusedinI.C.engines
6.3 Statethepropertiesoflubricants
6.4 Illustrate SAEnumber oflubricants
6.5 Describe construction & working of Petroil, Splash and Pressure or forced feed system of
lubrication with sketches
6.6 Explainthedrysumplubricating system
6.7 StatethedifferencebetweenBypassfilterandFullflowfilter arrangements
6.8 List the variousadditivesoflubricants
7.0 Cooling System
7.1 State the necessity of cooling system in I.C engines
7.2 List the types of coolingsystems
7.3 ExplaintheconstructionaldetailsandworkingprincipleofAircooling and Watercooling systems
withthehelpoflinediagrams
7.4 Explainthe functions and constructionaldetailsofwaterpump andthermostat
7.5 Explain different types ofThermostats, Radiator and Pressurecap
7.6 State the necessity of Anti-freeze and Anti-rusting liquids
7.7 List the Anti-freeze and Anti-rusting liquids
8.0 Fuels and Combustion
167
8.1 Define the term fuel
8.2 Classifydifferenttypesoffuels used in I.C. Engine
8.3 List thepropertiesoffuels
8.4 Define higher and lower calorific value of fuel
8.5 identify the importance ofOctaneand Cetanerating andHUCRandfueladditives
8.6 StatethemeaningofHomogeneousmixtureand Heterogeneous mixture
8.7 Discuss thestagesofcombustioninS.I.engines
8.8 State the Phenomenon of pre-ignition & detonation and their effects on the
performance of S.I. engine
8.9 Describe the stages of combustion in C.I. engines
8.10 Definedieselknockand aboutfactors influencing diesel knock
Cos – Pos Mapping
Course Course Title:

Code: Automobile No of CO: 5 No. of periods: 60
A-302 Power Plants
CO Periods Level
Remarks
Mapped with CO Addressing PO in Col 1 (1,2,3)
POs
No. >40% Level 3 (Highly
No %
Addressed)
CO1, CO2, CO3, 25% to 40% Level 2
PO1 25 42 3
CO4,CO5 (Moderately Addressed)
5% to 25% Level 1
PO2 CO2,CO4,CO5 10 17 1
( Low Addressed)
CO1, CO2, CO3,
PO3 10 17 1 <5% Not Addressed
CO4,CO5
CO2, CO3,
PO4 8 13 1
CO4,CO5
CO1, CO2, CO3,
PO5 7 11 1
CO4, CO5
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-302.1 3 1 2 1 2
A-302.2 3 2 1 2 2 1 2
A-302.3 3 1 2 1 1 2
A-302.4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2
A-302.5 3 2 1 3
the following:
168
COURSE CONTENT
1) Engine Construction
Engine – types of engines: EC and IC engines - Cylinder Block – Cylinder Bore and Stroke -
Cylinder Head - Cylinder Liners - ArrangementofCylinders– Crankcase - OilPan– Gaskets–
Piston - PistonPin - PistonRings– Connecting Rod– Crankshaft– FiringOrder–
ConnectingRodbearings– Flywheel– Vibrationdampers– Valves: L,I,FandT-type - Valve
mechanism - over-head valve - i-VTEC– function of components of valve actuating
mechanism: cam shaft, valve lifter, valve guide, valve spring, push rod, rocker arm, rocker
arm shaft, rocker arm spring
2) I.C. Engines
IntroductiontoInternalcombustionEngines - ClassificationofI.C.engines – working Principle of
2 strokeand4 strokepetrolengine - working Principle of 2 strokeand4 stroke diesel engine –
differences between petrol and diesel engines - comparison between 2-strokeand 4-stroke
engines - valvetimingdiagrams 4-stroke petrol and diesel engine - Combustion chamber –
Requirements of S.I. and C.I. Engine combustion chambers - Types of C.I. engine
combustion chambers and functions – Directinjectiontype,pre-
combustionchambers,Turbulencechamber type and Air cell combustion chamber -
Relative advantages and disadvantages.
3) Inlet and Exhaust System

Air Cleaners – constructional details of different types of air cleaners- Oil bathand Oil
wettedtype-InletandExhaustManifolds–Considerationfor good manifold design –
Types of Manifolds – constructional details – Mufflers–typesofMufflers–Constructional
Detailsandworkingprinciple of different types of Mufflers
4) Fuel Supply System in Petrol Engines

Line diagram of petrol engine fuel systems - details of fuel tank and fuel filters – working
principle with constructional details of fuel pumps Mechanical and Electrical -
constructional details of simple carburettor - defects in simple carburettor - air fuel ratios
for different operating conditions -Typesofcarburettors.
5) Fuel Supply System in Diesel Engines

Line diagram of diesel engine fuel system – Function of diesel fuel feed pump - Types of
Diesel filter – Requirements of fuel injection system – type of fuel injection systems –
layout of common rail system (CRDI) – constructional details and working of fuel injection
pump and injectors - types of injectors – Types of Nozzles – governing system – mechanical
and pneumatic types of governors.
6) Lubrication System
Requirements of lubrication of Motor vehicle engine and Other Components -
Typesoflubricants– Propertiesofalubricant –S.A.E Number -
GradesofLubricantsusedinEngine,Gear-Box,Differential - -Types of lubrication systems - Petroil
type, Splash type and Force feed lubrication system - Dry Sump Lubrication -Oilfilters -
Typesoffilters -FullflowandBy-passfilter arrangements -Additives ofLubricants
169
7) Cooling System
Necessity of cooling - Disadvantages of over cooling and under cooling -
TypesOfcoolingsystems - aircooling - constructionaldetailsofanAircooled engine -
watercooling types - Thermosyphon - Forcefeedtypewatercooling – types of Radiators -
Constructional details and Working principle of water pump - Radiators – Thermostat – Wax
pellet, Bellows type - Radiator pressure cap - Anti freezing additives - Antirustingadditives
8) Fuels and combustion

Definition of fuel – classification of fuels – properties of fuels – calorific valueoffuels–
H.C.V&L.C.V–FuelsusedinI.C.Engines–RatingofI.C engine fuels - Octane rating, Cetane rating,
and HUCR – Fuel dopes or additives - Combustionoffuels- Homogeneousmixture–
Heterogeneous mixture – Combustion in I.C. engines – Stages of combustion in S.I.
engines –detonation in S.I. engines – pre-ignition in S.I. engines – stages of
combustioninC.I.engines–Dieselknock,Factorsinfluencingdieselknock.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Heat Engines - by R.S. Kurmi – S.Chand & Company
3. HeatEngines - byPandyaandShah – Charotar Publishing House
4. AutomobileEngineeringVol–I&II - byKirpalSingh
5. AutomobileEngineering-byG.B.S.Narang –Khanna Publishers
6. AutomobileEngineering - byR.B.Gupta –Standard Publishers
7. Automobilemechanics-byWilliamChrouse – Mc Graw Hill Education.
8. Internal Combustion Engines - by Mathur &Sharma –Dhanpat Rai Publications
9. AutomobileEngineeringVolI-AnilChhikaria -SatyaPrakashanPublisherti
170
A – 302, Automobile Power Plants
Period Weight Marks wise Question wise
Sl. s age Distribution of Weight Distribution of Weight
Chapter Name Allocat
No Allocat age age
ed ed R U Ap An R U Ap An
EngineConstructi
1 08 7 3 4 1 1/2
on
2 IC Engines 10 11 3 8 1 1
InletandExhaust
3 06 6 3 3 1 1
System
Fuel supply
4 System in Petrol 08 11 3 8 1 1
Engine
Fuel Supply
5 System in Diesel 08 11 3 8 1 1
Engine
Lubrication
6 06 11 3 8 1 1
System
7 Cooling System 06 7 3 4 1 1/2
8 Fuels &
08 6 3 3 1 1
Combustion
Part – C Question
having 10 marks
10 10 1
weightage from CO3or
or CO4 or CO5
Total 60 80 12 18 40 10 4 6 5 1
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I & Unit Test-II

Unit Test – I 1.1 to 4.9
Unit Test – II 5.1 to 8.10
171
Model questions paper for Unit Test with COs mapped
Q. No Question Bloom’s Marks CO

Part - A (16 marks)
1 (a) EngineConstruction R 1 CO1
1 (b) IC Engines U 1 CO2
1 (c) InletandExhaust System U 1 CO3
1 (d) Fuel supply System in Petrol Engine U 1 CO4
2 EngineConstruction U 3 CO1
3 IC Engines U 3 CO2
4 InletandExhaust System R 3 CO3
5 Fuel supply System in Petrol Engine U 3 CO4
Part - B (24 marks)
6 EngineConstruction & InletandExhaust System AP 8 CO1 & CO3
7 IC Engines AP 8 CO2
8 Fuel supply System in Petrol Engine AP 8 CO4
C-20-A-302
172
UNIT TEST - 1
AUTOMOBILE POWER PLANTS
PART – A
1. (a) Firing order of four cylinder inline engine is -----------

(b) Diesel engines are the CI engines (True/False)
(c) What is the component used to reduce exhaust gases noise?
(d) -------------- air fuel mixture is used for accelerating condition of a vehicle.
2. State the function of flywheel.
3. Write any three differences between petrol engine and diesel engine
4. List any three types of mufflers.
5. Draw the line diagram of fuel supply system in petrol engine.
PART – B
6. Describe overhead valve mechanism with a neat sketch.

Or
Explain working of oil bath type air cleaner with a neat sketch.
7. Explain working of four stroke cycle diesel engine with a neat sketch.
Or
Name different types of combustion chambers in diesel engine and explain anyone
with a neat sketch.
8. Describe simple carburettor with a neat sketch

Or
Explain working of electrical fuel pump with a neat sketch.
173
Model questions paper for End Exam with COs mapped
Q. Question Bloom’s Marks CO

No category allocated addressed
Part - A (30 marks)
1 EngineConstruction U/R 3 CO1
2 IC Engines U/R 3 CO2
5 Fuel supply System in Petrol Engine U 3 CO4
6 Fuel Supply System in Diesel Engine R 3 CO4
7 Lubrication System U/R 3 CO3
8 Cooling System U/R 3 CO3
9 Fuels & Combustion U 3 CO5
10 Fuels & Combustion U/R 3 CO5
Part - B (40 marks)
IC Engines
11 AP 8 CO1 & CO2
Fuel supply System in Petrol Engine AP
12 8 CO4
Fuel Supply System in Diesel Engine AP
13 8 CO4
Lubrication System AP
14 8 CO3
EngineConstruction/Cooling System AP
15 8 CO1 & CO3
Part - C (10 marks)
Part – C Question having 10 marks weightage
16 from CO3 or CO4 or CO5 AN 10
174
C-20-A-302
Automobile Power Plants
PART - A
1. What is firing order? Write the firing order for 4-cylinder and 6-cyliner engines.
2. Draw the valve timing diagram for 4-stroke petrol engine.
3. List any four types of Mufflers.
4. State any four requirements for designing a good manifold.
5. State the functions of Carburettor.
6. List any three types of fuel injectors.
7. Define the terms (a) Viscosity (b) flash point
8. What are Anti-freezing agents in cooling system?
9. Define the term fuel and List any three properties of fuel.
10. Differentiate between HCV and LCV
PART – B
11. Explain the working principle of 4-stroke cycle diesel engine with a neat sketch
or
Explain different types of C.I Engine combustion chambers with neat sketches
12. Explain the working principle of simple carburettor with a neat sketch
or
Explain the working of AC mechanical fuel pump with a neat sketch.
13. Explain the fuel supply system in diesel engine with a neat sketch.
or
Explain the working of mechanical governor with a neat sketch.
14. Explain the pressure or force feed system of lubrication with a neat sketch.
or
Explain the dry-sump lubrication system with a neat sketch.
15. (a) Explain the function of vibration damper.

(b) Explain water cooling system of multicylinder engine with a neat sketch.
or
(a) Explain overhead valve mechanism with a neat sketch.
(b) Explain air cooling system of a single cylinder engine with a neat sketch.
PART – C
16. Analyse the CRDI fuel supply system with a sketch. CO4
***
175
AUTOMOBILE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
Course Title Course Code No. of periods/week Total Periods

/Semester
Automobile
A-303 04 60
Transmission Systems
TIME SCHEDULE
Part – A Part – Part – C

Perio Weighta Short B Essay
ds ge Type Essay Type
Sl. No Chapter Name
Alloca Allocate (3 Type (10
ted d marks) (8 Marks)
Marks)
Transmission system and
1 12 14 02 01
Clutch
2 Gear Box 12 14 02 01
Universal joint and propeller
3 06 08 00 01
shaft
4 Differential 10 14 02 01
5 Front axle &Rear axle 10 09 03 00
6 Wheels and Tyres 10 11 01 01
Part – C Question having 10 marks weight
10 01
age from CO2 or CO3 or CO4
Total 60 80 10 5 01
Course Code : Course Name : Automobile Transmission Systems No. of Periods : 60

A-303
1. Understand the need and working of an Automobile Transmission
system.
Course Objectives
2. Understand the function and working of clutch, gear box, gear shifting,
over drive, fluid coupling, torque converter, universal joint, propeller
shaft, differential, front axle and rear axle.
3. Appreciate the term wheels, tyres and dynamics of moving vehicles.

C01 A-303.1 Describe the need of transmission system and clutch.
C02 A-303.2 Discuss various types of Gear box used in automobiles
C03 A-303.3 Discuss universal joints and propeller shaft.
A-303.4 Discuss different types of 1.Front axles, 2. Rear axles, 3. Final drive and 4.
C04
Differential systems.
C05 A-303.5 Distinguish between different tyres and wheels.
176
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Transmission System and Clutch

1.1 State the necessity of Automobile transmission system.
1.2 State the functions of various components in Automobile transmission system.
1.3 Explain the arrangement of components of transmission system.
1.4 State the functions of a Clutch.
1.5 Describe the general requirements of an automobile clutch.
1.6 List any six types of clutches.
1.7 Explain the principles of operation of the clutch.
1.8 Explain the working of 1. Single plate, 2. Multi plate, 3. Centrifugal,Semi Centrifugal
and 4. Diaphragm Clutches with neat figures.
1.9 Explain the working principles of vacuum, electromagnetic, hydraulically operated
clutches.
1.10 Describe the types of friction materials used in clutches.
2.0 Gear Box
2.1 List three resistances encountered by vehicle.
2.2 Define the terms Traction and tractive effort.
2.3 Solve simple problems on the traction and tractive effort.
2.4 State the objectives of the gear box in the transmission system
2.5 Explain the principles and operation of sliding mesh, Constantmesh,and Synchromesh
and Epicyclic gear box.
2.6 Describe floor shifting & steering column mounted shifting mechanism.
2.7 Explain about Inter locking device.
2.8 Explain free wheel unit and overdrivemechanism.
2.9 Explain the working principle of the torque converter and fluid coupling.
2.10 List advantages of automatic transmission system
3.0 Propeller shaft and Universal joints
3.1 State the function of the propeller shaft.
3.2 Draw the line diagram of propeller shaft with slip joint and universal joints.
3.3 Explain the types of universal joints – Cross type or Spider and two yoke types, Ball and
trunnion type.
3.4 List the three types of Constant velocity type joints.
3.5 Explain the Rzeppa and Tripod type Constant velocity joints.
4.0 Differential unit
4.1Explain the purpose of the final drive – Hypoid gear arrangement - Worm andworm
wheel.
4.2 Explain the working principle of Single and Double reduction final drives.
4.3State the necessity of differential unit
4.4 Explain the working principle of differential and differential locking systems.
4.5Explain the working principle of Limited slip differential.
4.6 State the purpose of the four wheel drive.
4.7 Explain the working principle of four wheel drive.
4.8 Explain the working of Transaxle.
177
5.0 Front axle and Rear axle
5.1 Differentiate between live and dead axles.
5.2 List four components of front axle assembly.
5.3 Explain front axle assembly.
5.4Explain Stub axle and list various types of stub-axles.
5.5State four loads acting on the rear axles.
5.6Explain types of rear axles.
5.7List the types of rear axle casing.
5.8Explain Hotchkiss drive and Torque-tube drive.
5.9Describe the types of real axle drives.
6.0 Wheels and Tyres
6.1 State the requirements of automobile wheel.
6.2 List the types of automobile wheels and wheel rims.
6.3 Explain the wheel assembly and wheel balancing.
6.4State desirable properties of tyre.
6.5Explain Tube tyre and tubeless tyre.
6.6 Describe the construction of tyres andtyre designation.
6.7Explain carcass types – 1. Cross ply, 2. Radial ply and 3. Belted bias ply tyres.
6.8State tyre wear, its causes and tyre properties.
6.9Describe the tyre pressure monitor system.
6.10Define the terms 1. Tyre rotation, 2. Vulcanizing and 3. Retreading.
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code:A- Course Title: Automobile Transmission No. of No. of
303 Systems COs: 5 Periods:60
CO Periods Addressing PO in
Level
POs Mapped with CO No. Col. 1 Remarks
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 12 20 1 > 40% Level 3
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 16 26 2 (Highly Addressed)
PO3 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 8 14 1 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 12 20 1
Addressed)
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 12 20 1 5% t0 25% level 1
PO6 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-303.1 2 1 1 2 2 3 1
A-303.2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
A-303.3 2 3 2 1 2 2 3
A-303.4 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
A-303.5 3 2 1 3 2 2 2 1
178
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Transmission System and Clutch:
Purposes of the automotive transmission system – Manual Transmission-Arrangement and
functions of various components in the manualtransmission in automotive vehicle, Functions
of the clutch-General requirements of an automobile clutch - Principle of Operation--
constructional details of different types of clutches – Singleplate – Multi plate – Centrifugal –
Semi centrifugal – Diaphragm clutches –Working principles of vacuum, electromagnetic and
Hydraulically operated clutches - friction materials of clutch.
2.0 Gear box
Types of resistances encountered by a vehicle - Road resistance, Gradient resistance, Air
resistance-Traction -Tractate effort – Simple related problems, Object of the gear box in the
transmission system – types of gear boxes –Principles and operation of sliding mesh, constant
mesh and synchromesh gearbox- types of gear shifting mechanism – floor shifting and
steering column shifting-Inter lock devices –Automatic Transmission system-Epicyclic gear
box- principle and working of freewheeling –overdrive mechanism – transfer case- Fluid
coupling - Advantages and disadvantages –Constructional details of fluid coupling-Torque
converter and its principle –principleof automatic transmission system and advantages.
3.0 Propeller shaft and Universal joint:
Propeller shaft – Function of propeller shaft - slip joint or sliding joint – Universaljoint -. Types
of universal joints – cross type or spider and two yoke type – balland trunnion type – constant
velocity type– Different types of Constant velocityjoints – Rzeppaand Tripode type.
4.0 Differential:
Final drive – purpose of final drive, types of final drive – Bevel,worm and worm wheel, Hypoid
gear -single and double reduction final drives –Differential gear-differential - differential lock –
manual and Automaticdifferential locks – Four wheel drive – Transaxle.
5.0 Front Axle and Rear Axle:
Live and dead axles – Components of Front axle assembly –stub axle – types of stub axles –
Elliot – Reverse Elliot – Lamoine – Reverse Lamoine.Loads on the rear axle – Types of rear
axles - semi floating – Three quarter floating– fully floating axles,Types of drives – Hotchkiss
drive, Torque tube drive– Axle casings and types –Split, Banzo and Salisbury types.
6.0 Wheels and Tyres:
Wheel assembly – functions of the wheels – Types of wheels, types of rims– Types of tyres –
Construction of tyres-constituents of tyre- cross ply tyre – radial tyre –belted bias ply - merits
of radialtyre over cross ply tyre-tube tyre - tubeless tyre –tyre tread patterns – tyre pressure &
wear –Desirable tyre properties – causes of tyre wear – tyre designation- speed rating, width,
aspect ratio, load index, ply rating, tread wear indication,tyre pressure monitor system, Wheel
balancing- static and dynamic balancing, Tyre rotation –Vulcanizing –Retreading.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
179
1. Automobile Engineering- Vol-I & Vol –II –Kirpal Singh – Standard Publishers.
2. Automobile Engineering – R.B.Gupta – Standard Publishers.
3. Automotive Engineering - G.B.S. Narang – Khanna Publishers.
4. Automotive Mechanics – William Crouse – Mc Graw Hill Education
8. Problems in Automobile Mechanics - Dr. N K Giri – Khanna Publishers.

A-303, Automobile Transmission Systems
Period Marks wise Question wise
Weight
Sl. s Distribution of Distribution of
Chapter Name age
No Alloca Weight age Weight age
Allocated
ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
Transmission system
1 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
and Clutch
2 Gear Box 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Universal joint and
3 06 08 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0
propeller shaft
4 Differential 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
5 Front axle &Rear axle 10 09 3 6 0 0 1 2 0 0
6 Wheels and Tyres 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
marks weight age from CO2 10 10 1
or CO3 or CO4
Total: 60 80 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I & Unit Test-II

180
Unit Test with COs mapped
Unit Test - 1
Q.No Question from the topic Bloom’s Marks CO

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Transmission system and Clutch RU 5 CO1
2 Gear Box RU 7 CO2
3 Universal joint and propeller shaft RU 4 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Transmission system and Clutch AP 8 CO1
5 Gear Box AP 8 CO2
6 Universal joint and propeller shaft AP 8 CO3
Unit Test - 2

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Differential R,U 5 CO4
2 Front axle &Rear axle R,U 4 CO4
3 Wheels and Tyres R,U 7 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Differential AP 8 CO4
5 Front axle &Rear axle AP 8 CO4
6 Wheels and Tyres AP 8 CO5
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application ; An- Analylising
181
 Model Question Paper for Unit Test I
C-20-A-303
UNIT TEST - 1
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. 1st Question having 4 one-mark questions, and remaining 4
1. A) The clutch works on the principle of ____________

B) _____________is mounted between the engine and gear box.
C) _________________gear box eliminates clashing of the gears and make gear shifting
easier.
D) Joint which permits power to be transmitted from one shaft to another which are
not in alignment is known as an ________________.
2. What are the requirements of clutch?
3. What is tractive effort?
4. What is fluid drive?
5. What is the necessity of propeller shaft?
PART – B
6. Explain the construction and working principle of diaphragm clutch.

OR
Explain the working principle of vacuum clutch.
7. Explain the working principle of the torque converter.

OR
Explain the construction and working of synchromesh gear box.
8. Explain the construction and working of ball and trunnion type universal joint.
OR
Describe the working of Tripod type Constant velocity joints.
***
182

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
1 Transmission system and Clutch R,U 3 CO1
2 Transmission system and Clutch R,U 3 CO1
3 Gear Box R,U 3 CO2
4 Gear Box R,U,Ap 3 CO2
10 Wheels and Tyres R,U 3 CO5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Transmission system and Clutch AP 8 CO1
12 Gear Box AP 8 CO2
13 Universal joint and propeller shaft AP 8 CO3
14 Differential AP 8 CO4
15 Wheels and Tyres AP 8 CO5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO2 or CO3 or CO4 AN 10 CO2,CO3,CO4
183
C-20-A-303
PART - A
1. State any five functions of Automobile transmission system.
2. List six types of clutches used in automobiles.
3. List four types of gear boxes.
4. Find the total resistance for a car weighing 11282 N and has the frontal area of 2.2 m2
moving with a velocity of 112 Km/hr. Take coefficient of rolling and air resistances as 0.012
and 0.0007 respectively.
5. State the necessity of differential unit.
6. State the purpose of the four wheel drive.
7. List four components of front axle assembly.
8. List the three types of rear axle casing.
9. State four loads acting on rear axle.
10. State any four requirements of automobile wheel.
PART – B
11. Explain the working principles of vacuum clutch with a neat diagram.
Or
Draw the line diagram and explain the working of Single plate clutch.
12. Explain the working principle of the automatic transmission system.

Or
Explain the working and constructional details of fluid coupling.
13. Explain the working of ball and trunnion type universal joint.
Or
Explain the working of Rzeppa constant velocity joint.
14. Explain the working principle of Limited slip differential.

Or
Explain the working principle of Double reduction final drive.
15. Describe the construction of tyres.

Or
Explain the procedure of wheel balancing.
PART – C
16. Compare the working ofTorque convertor with fluid coupling.
***
184
ENGINEERINGMATERIALS AND MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
Total
Course Title Course Code No. of Periods/Week
periods/Semester
ENGINEERING
MATERIALS AND
A - 304 04 60
MANUFACTURING
PROCESSES
TIME SCHEDULE
Weightag Short Essay Essay
Periods
Sl. No Chapter Name e Type Type Type
Allocated
Allocated (3 marks) (8 Marks) (10 Marks)
Mechanical Properties
1 &testing procedure of
10 14 2 1
materials
Iron– Carbon equilibrium
2 06 14 2 1
diagram
Manufacture of Iron &steel
3 12 11 1 1
and Heat treatment
Ferrous and Non-ferrous
4 Metals and alloys 06 06 2 0
5 Welding 12 11 1 1
6 Lathe and lathe work 14 14 2 1

Part-C Question having 10 marks weightage
10 - - 1
from CO2 or CO5.
Total: 60 80 10 5 1
Course Code: Course Title:Engineering Materials and No. of Periods: 60

A-304 Manufacturing Processes
1. List the mechanical properties of materials and testing procedures
2. Understand Iron and Carbon equilibrium diagram and heat
treatment processes
COURSE OBJECTIVES 3. Know the manufacturing process of Iron and steel and to know
the properties and uses of ferrous and non-ferrous metals and
alloys
4. Understand the manufacturing process 0of welding and lathe
work
185
C01 A-304.1 Explain mechanical properties of materials and their testing procedures
C02 A-304.2 Analyse the Iron – Carbon equilibrium diagram
C03 A-304.3 Describe manufacturing of Iron, steel and various heat treatment processes
C04 A-304.4 Compare properties of ferrous and non-ferrous metals and alloys
A-304.5 Discuss the various types of welding, Lathe, capstan and turret lathe
C05
operation
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Mechanicalpropertiesandtheir testing procedures

1.1 StateTensile, compressivestrength,stiffness,elasticityand plasticity
1.2 Definethetermsductility,malleability, hardness, brittleness, toughness
impactstrength,fatigueandcreepresistance.
1.3 List thedifferent propertiesofmaterialsinengineering applications.
1.4 Describe the tensile and compressive tests on mild steel
1.5 Describetheteststomeasureimpactstrength of steel
1.6 List the principles of non-destructive testing methods.
1.7 Select the appropriate testing method for a given application
2.0 Iron – Carbon equilibrium diagram
2.1 Statethemeaningofspacelattice,unit cell.
2.2 Explain the three main types of space lattice
2.3 Explain the cooling curves of pure Iron
2.4 Listtheallotropicformsofpure ironwithtemperature,theircrystal structures.
2.5 DrawIron–Carbonequilibrium diagram.
3.0 Manufacturing methods of iron&steel and Heat treatment
3.1 Describethe operations involvedinthemanufacturing of cast-ironincupola furnace.
3.2 Explain the sequence of steps to be followed in the manufacture of steel by Bessemer
converter, L.D. process, electric arc furnace and electric induction furnace.
3.3 Explain these quench ofoperations involved for differentheattreatment methods such as
annealing, normalizing,hardening,tempering,case-hardening, Nitriding and carburizing.
3.4 Explain thechangeinmechanicalpropertiesofmaterialswhentheabove heat treatment
methods are used.
3.5 Describe theappropriateheattreatmentmethodsforagivenapplication.
4.0 Ferrous metals and Non-ferrousmetalsand their alloys
4.1 State thecompositionpropertiesandapplicationofdifferenttypesofcast iron and plain carbon
steel.
4.2 Describe theneedforalloyingsteelwithotherelements.
4.3 Describe thecompositionproperties,Industrialapplicationsofcommon alloy steels.
4.4 Describe the proper alloy steel for a given engineering application.
4.5 Describe thecomposition,propertiesandindustrialapplicationsofthenon-ferrousalloys.
4.6 State the proper non-ferrous alloys for given engineering applications.
5.0 principle of joining metals by fusion and explain welding processes of metals
5.1 Explain the working principle of arc welding process
5.2 List the equipment used in arc welding and state their functions.
186
5.3 State the principle of gas welding and List the procedure of gas welding
5.4 Explain three types of flames Used in gas welding and list their applications.
5.5 List any three limitations of gas and arc welding processes.
5.6 Describe arc welding, metal arc welding, inert gas welding, TIG welding, MIGWelding,Atomic
hydrogen welding and submerged arc welding processes.
5.7 State the principle of electric resistance welding and its type’s spot welding, seam welding.
6.0 Working principle of lathe and Capstan& Turret lathes
6.1 List the classification of lathe and State the parts of lathe and their functions.
6.2 List the steps to be followed in the following operations involved in turning, facing, forming,
taper turning, screw cuttings and knurling.
6.3 Explain any three Methods of taper turning
6.4 Explain the working principle of Turret and Capstan Lathes.
6.5 Compare the Capstan and Turret lathes
6.6 Explain the working of Turret Indexing mechanism.
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code: A-304 Course Title: Engineering No of No. Of
materials and manufacturing Cos:5 periods:60
process
POs Mapped with CO No. CO Periods Addressing Level Remarks
PO in Col 1 (1,2,3)
>40% Level 3 (Highly
No %
Addressed)
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 25% to 40% Level 2
12 20 1
(Moderately Addressed)
PO2 CO2,CO5 5% to 25% Level 1
12 20 1
( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO3 10 17 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO5 16 26 2
PO5 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 10 17 1
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-304.1 3 2 1 3
A-304.2 3 2 1 3 2 3
A-304.3 2 1 3 2 3
A-304.4 2 3 2 3
A-304.5 3 2 3 3 2 3 3
the following:
187
COURSE CONTENT
1. Mechanical properties and testingprocedure of Materials

Introduction–ImportanceofmaterialsinmodernTechnology-Mechanical properties: Tensile
strength, compressive strength, stiffness, elasticity, brittleness,
ductility,malleability,hardness,toughness, fatigueresistance, creep, impact strength
Types of testing: Destructive and non-destructive - testing methods to determine tensile
strength, compressive strength, impact strength – non-destructivetests: Magnetic
particles test, Radiography (X-rayandGammaray) Test, Ultrasonic test, Spark stream.
2. Iron – Carbon equilibrium diagram
Spacelattice, unitcell,typesofmetallicspacelattices: BCC, FCCandHCP–
CoolingcurveforpureIron–allotropicformsofpureiron– Iron - Carbon equilibrium diagram
3. Manufacture of Iron& Steel and Heat Treatment
Manufacture of cast iron – Cupola Furnace - manufacture of steel – Bessemer converter –
L.D. process – Electric arc furnace- Electric Induction furnace. Heat Treatment - Purpose of
Heat Treatment – Types of Heat treatment processes - brief description of annealing,
hardening, tempering, normalizing - case hardening: Nitriding - carburizing – Applications of
these heat treatment processes.
4. Ferrous and Non–FerrousMetalsandAlloys
Typesofcastiron: white, grey, modular, malleable and alloy cast iron – properties and uses
of white and grey cast iron - Types of plain carbon steel: low carbon, medium and
highcarbonsteel –alloying elements in steel – purpose of adding alloying elements –
composition, properties and uses of alloy steels: stainless
steelandhighspeedsteel,composition, properties and uses of non-ferrous alloys: brass,
bronze, gunmetal and solder metal
5. Welding
Introduction – Types of welding: pressure and Non-pressure welding - Principle of Electric
Arc, Metal Arc, Atomic Hydrogen, TIG, MIG and submerged Arc welding processes – types of
welding rods - Principle of Resistance, spot, seam and Butt welding processes – Principle of
oxy-acetylene gas welding -Types of oxy-acetylene gas flames and their uses
6. Lathe and lathe work
Types of lathes - engine Lathe – engine lathe construction and working – lathe Specifications
– Work holding Devices – Tool holding Devices - Lathe operations: plain turning, step
turning, taper turning, thread cutting, knurling, facing, parting off, drilling, boring, reaming -
methods of taper turning – Constructional details and working principle of capstan and
turret lathes - comparison between capstan and turret lathe - principle of turret indexing
mechanism.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Engineering Material and Manufacturing Processes – byV.N. Kumar Falcon Publishers.
2. EngineeringMaterials-byRay&Chowdhury –S. Chand Publishing.
3. ElementsofworkshopTechnologyVolI&II-HazraChowdhary –Media Promoters & Publishers.
5. AcourseinworkshopTechnologyvol. I &vol. II- by Raghuvamsi – Dhanpat Rai & Co.
188
A-304, ENGINEERING MATERIALS & MANFACTURING PROCESSES
Weig Marks wise Question wise

Perio
ht Distribution of Distribution of
ds
Sl. No Chapter Name age Weightage Weightage
Alloc
Alloc
ated R U Ap An R U Ap An
ated
Mechanical Properties
1 &testing procedure of 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
materials
Iron– Carbon equilibrium
2 06 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
diagram
Manufacture of Iron
3 12 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
&steel and Heat treatment
Ferrous and Non-ferrous
4 Metals and alloys 06 06 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 Welding 12 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
6 Lathe and lathe work 14 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
10 10 1
from CO2 or CO5
Total: 60 80 18 12 40 10 6 4 5 1

 Model questions paper for Unit Test with COs mapped

189
UNIT TEST I

category allocated
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Mechanical properties & testing procedure of R,U 4 CO1
materials
2 Iron carbon equilibrium diagram R,U 6 CO2
3 Manufacture of iron steel & heat treatment R,U 6 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
5 Mechanical properties & testing procedure of AP 8 CO1
materials
6 Iron carbon equilibrium diagram AP 8 CO2
7 Manufacture of iron steel & heat treatment AP 8 CO3
UNIT TEST II

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Ferrous & nonferrous metals alloys R,U 4 CO4
2 Welding R,U 6 CO5
3 Lathe & lathe work R,U 6 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
5 Ferrous & nonferrous metals alloys AP 8 CO4
6 Welding AP 8 CO5
7 Lathe & lathe work AP 8 CO5
190
C-20-A-304
UNIT TEST - 1
ENGINEERING MATERIALS & MANFACTURING PROCESSES

PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. 1st Question having 4 one mark questions, and
remaining 4Questions carry 3 marks each (4 X 1+ 4 X 3 = 16 Marks).
1. a) _________________ may be detained as the ability to with stand load.

b) Ability to with stand repeatedly applied load (or) stress is known as
_________________
c) Spark –steam test is a destructive test (True /False)
d) ___________ is the property of of material to deform under load and regain
its original shape when the load is removed
2. What is space lattice.
3. List out allotropic forms of pure iron
4. List out different furnace used in making of iron and steel.
5. Write the composition of cast iron.
PART B
6. Explain the procedure for conducting Tensile strength test on utm with a neat
sketch of UTM
or
Explain the procedure for conducting impact strength test on izod & charpy testing
equipment with a neat sketch
7. Describe BCC FCC HCP structures with neat sketch
Or
Draw iron –carbon equilibrium diagram.
8. Explain the manufacture of cast iron from cupola furnace with a neat sketch
Or
Explain the manufacture of steel from Bessemer converter with a neat sketch
191

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
1 Mechanical properties & testing procedure of R, U 3 CO 1
materials
2 Mechanical properties & testing procedure of R, U 3 CO 1
materials
3 Iron carbon equilibrium diagram R, U 3 CO 2
4 Iron carbon equilibrium diagram R, U 3 CO 2
5 Manufacture of iron steel & heat treatment R, U 3 CO 3
6 Ferrous & non-ferrous metals alloys R, U 3 CO 4
7 Ferrous & non-ferrous metals alloys R, U 3 CO 4
8 Welding R, U 3 CO 5
9 Lathe & lathe work R 3 CO 5
10 Lathe & lathe work R 3 CO 5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Mechanical properties & testing procedure of AP 8 CO 1
materials
12 Iron carbon equilibrium diagram AP 8 CO 2
13 Manufacture of iron steel & heat treatment AP 8 CO 3
14 Welding AP 8 CO 5
15 Lathe & lathe work AP 8 CO 5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO2 or CO5 AN 10 CO2, CO5
C-20-A-304
192
ENGINEERING MATERIALS & MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
PART - A
1. Define tensile strength & compressive strength.
2. List out different non – destructive tests.
3. Write the allotropic forms of iron.
4. What is space lattice & unit cell?
5. What is annealing& different types of annealing?
6. Write properties of copper
7. Write any 3 properties of zinc
8. Give the classifications of welding operations
9. Write the specifications of lathe
10. List out any four operations carried out on lathe machine.
PART-B
11. Explain the procedure for conducting impact strength test on Izod & Charpy testing Equipment
with a neat sketch
or
Explain the procedure for conducting tensile strength test on UTM with neat sketch
12. Describe the following
a) BCC structure
b) FCC structure
c) HCP structure
Or
Draw iron carbon equilibrium diagram
13. Explain the manufacture of cast iron from cupola furnace with a neat sketch
or
Describe the following
i. Nitriding
ii. Carburizing
14. Describe arc welding operation & the equipment required for arc welding operation with a
neat sketch
193
or
a) Atomic hydrogen welding
b) TIG welding operation
15. Explain the construction of caption lathe with a neat sketch
Or
a) Tail Stock with a neat sketch
b) Carriage with a neat sketch
PART-C
16. Discuss the working principle of Turret Indexing mechanism.
***
THERMALENGINEERING
194
Course Title Course Code Periods / Week Periods /Semester
Thermal Engineering A–305 04 60
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major Topic Periods Weightage Part – A Part – B Part – C

No. Allocated of marks Short Essay Type Essay Type
Type (8 marks) (10 marks)
(3 marks)
Fundamentals of
1 10 14 2 1
Thermodynamics
2 Laws of perfect gases 10 14 2 1
Thermodynamic
3 14 17 3 1
Processes
4 Air Standard Cycles 14 14 2 1
Performance of IC
5 12 11 1 1
engines
Part – C Question having
10 marks weightage from - 10 - - 1
CO3 OR CO5
Total: 60 80 10 5 1
Course Code : A-305 Course Title : Thermal Engineering No of Periods : 60

1. Understand the laws of thermodynamics and laws of perfect gases.
Course Objectives 2. Understand the thermodynamic processes.
3. Understand the air standard cycles and performance of Internal
combustion engines.

C01 A-305.1 Explain fundamentals and laws of thermodynamics.
C02 A-305.2 solve simple problems on laws of perfect gases
Develop an expression to evaluate work done in various thermodynamic
C03 A-305.3
processes.
C04 A-305.4 Solve problems in various air standard cycles.
A-305.5 Explain various performance parameters andcalculation of performance
C05
parameters.
Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Fundamentals and laws of Thermodynamics
195
1.1 Define the various terms associated with the Thermodynamic System.
1.2 Name the types of thermodynamic Systems.
1.3Explain the closed system and open system with Examples.
1.4Explain the isolated system with Examples.
1.5 List the thermodynamic Properties of System.
1.6Define the various thermodynamic properties.
1.7State quasi-static work, flow of work, Zeroth law of thermodynamics, first law of
thermodynamics and second law of thermodynamics.
1.8Solve problems dealing with conversion of heat into work and vice–versa.
1.9Write non-flow energy equation and steady flow energy equation.
1.10Solve simple problems on non-flow energy equation.
2.0 Laws of perfect gases

2.1 Define the term Perfect Gas.
2.2 State 1. Boyle‘s Law, 2. Charle‘s Law, 3. Avagadro‘s Law, 4. Regnault‘s Law and5. Joule‘s
Law.
2.3Derive Characteristic gas equation.
2.4Write the Universal Gas Equation.
2.5State relationship between characteristic gas constant (R), Universal gas constant(G) and
molecular weight (M).
2.6Define Specific heat, Specific heat at constant pressure (CP) and Specific heat at constant
volume (CV).
2.7Derive the relationship between CP , CV and R .
2.8 Solve problems using gas laws.
3.0 Thermodynamic Processes on gases

3.1 List out the different thermodynamic processes on gases.
3.2 Derive expression for work done in Iso-choric process, Iso-baric process, hyperbolic
process, Polytropic process and Isentropic process.
3.3Compute the change in internal energy of gas during a process.
3.4Explain the relationship between heat supplied, internal energy and work done.
3.5Solve problems on these processes.
4.0 Study of air standard cycles

4.1 Define the term Air Standard cycle, Reversible Cycle and Irreversible cycle.
4.2 Explain with the help of a p-v and T-S diagram the Working of carnot cycle.
4.3State the assumptions made in Carnot cycle.
4.4Derive the formula for the air standard efficiency of a Carnot cycle.
4.5Solve problems on Carnot Cycle.
4.6Explain the working of Otto Cycle with the help of a p-v and T-S diagram.
4.7State the assumptions made in Otto Cycle and diesel cycle.
4.8 Derive the formula for air standard Efficiency of Otto Cycle and diesel cycle.
4.9Solve problems on Otto Cycle and diesel cycle.
4.10Explain the working of a Diesel cycle with the help of a p-v and T-S diagram.
196
5.0 Performance of Internal Combustion Engines
5.1 Compute Indicated Power, Brake Power and Frictional Power.
5.2 Compute Mechanical efficiency and Specific Fuel consumption.
5.3 Compute Indicated, Brake Thermal Efficiency and Volumetric Efficiency.
5.4 Prepare Heat Balance sheet for a given test result of an Internal Combustion engine.
COs – POs Mapping

No of No. Of
Course Code: A-305 Course Title: Thermal Engineering
Cos:5 periods:60
POs Mapped with CO Periods Addressing Level Remarks
CO No PO in Col 1 (1,2,3)
Addressed)
PO1 CO1, CO2, 20 33 2 25% to 40% Level 2 (Moderately
CO3,CO4,CO5 Addressed)
PO2 CO1, CO2, CO3, 16 26 2 5% to 25% Level 1
CO4,CO5 ( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO5 14 24 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO5 4 7 1
PO5 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 6 10 1
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-305.1 3 3 2 2 3
A-305.2 3 3 1 2 1 3
A-305.3 3 3 2 1 3
A-305.4 3 3 1 3
A-305.5 2 3 1 3 3 3 3 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Fundamentals and laws of Thermodynamics
197
Definitions for system - boundary, surrounding, state of a system-Types of thermodynamic
systems – closed, open and isolated systems withexamples- Properties of a system- Intrinsic
and Extrinsic properties with examples- Definitions for properties like Pressure (p), Volume
(v), Temperature (T),Enthalpy (H), Internal energy (U) and their units - Definitions for quasi-
static work,flow- work, Zeroth, first, second laws of thermodynamics, simple problems on
conversion of Heat into Work and vice versa – Non flow energy equation, Steady flow energy
equation (without proof) - simple problems of elementary type.
2.0 Laws of perfect gases

Brief explanation of perfect Gas Laws – Boyle‘s law, Charle‘s Law – Avagadro‘s, Joule‘s law
and Regnault‘s law- Derive characteristic gas equation – universalgas equation- universal gas
constant and their relationship with molecularweight of gas – Specific Heat, Specific heat at
constant pressure, specific heat at constant volume for a gas. Derivation for an expression
showing the relationship between the two specific heats and characteristic gas constant -
Simple problems on gas equation.
3.0 Thermodynamic processes on gases

Types of thermodynamic processes - Isochoric, Isobaric, Isothermal, Isentropic and
Polytropic- Equations representing the processes-- Derivation for work done and change in
internal energy for the above processes -Calculation of heat supplied or rejected during the
above processes - Simple problems on the above processes.
4.0 Air standard cycles

Air standard cycle-Applications -Reversible and irreversible process - Brief description of
Carnot cycle with P-V and T-S diagrams - Assumptions made – Efficiency - Problems on
Carnot cycle - Brief explanation of Otto cycle with P-V and T-S diagrams- assumptions made
– Efficiency - Simple problems on Otto cycle – Brief description of Diesel cycle with P-V and
T-S diagrams- Assumption made –Efficiency - Simple problems on Diesel cycle.
5.0 Performance of I.C. Engines

Need for Engine performance testing – Mean effective Pressure - Indicated, Brakeand
Frictional Power - Mechanical Efficiency and Thermal Efficiency – Specific FuelConsumption -
Volumetric efficiency - Heat Balance - Problems pertaining toperformance of Internal
combustion Engines and heat balance.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Thermal Engg.Vol I & Vol II Mathur & Mehta Jain Brothers.
2. Heat Engines R. C. Pate &KaramchandanAcharya
3. IC. Engine Fundamentals - Heywood Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Engineering Thermodynamics P. K. Nag Tata McGraw-Hill
5. Engineering Thermodynamics C. P. Arora Tata McGraw-Hill
6. Thermal Engineering - R. S. KhurmiSChand
7. Thermal Engineering Kumar &VasundariSChand
A-305, THERMALENGINEERING
198
Period Weigh
Sl. s tage
Chapter Name Weightage Weightage
No Alloca Alloca
ted ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
Fundamentals of
1 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Thermodynamics
2 Laws of perfect gases 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Thermodynamic
3 14 17 6 3 8 0 2 1 1 0
Processes
4 Air Standard Cycles 14 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Performance of IC
5 12 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
engines
Part – C Question having 10 marks
10 - - - 10 - - - 1
weightage from CO3 or or CO4 or CO5.
Total: 60 80 18 12 40 10 6 4 5 1

199
UNIT TEST I

category allocated
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Fundamentals of thermodynamics R, U 7 CO 1
2 Laws of perfect gases R, U 5 CO 2
3 Thermodynamic processes R, U 4 CO 3
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Fundamentals of thermodynamics AP 8 CO 1
5 Laws of perfect gases AP 8 CO 2
6 Thermodynamic processes AP 8 CO 3
UNIT TEST II

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Thermodynamic processes R, U 4 CO3
2 Air standard cycles R,U 7 CO4
3 Performance of IC engines R,U 5 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Thermodynamic processes AP 8 CO3
5 Air standard cycles AP 8 CO4
6 Performance of IC engines AP 8 CO5
 Model Question Paper For Unit Test I
200
C20-A-305
UNIT TEST - 1
THERMAL ENGINEERING
PART – A
Instructions: Answer all questions. 1st Question having 4 one mark questions, and
remaining 4Questions carry 3 marks each (4 X 1+ 4 X 3 = 16 Marks)
1. a) Any process whose end state are identical is called _________________.

b) Equal volumes of all gases at NTP contains equal no of molecules, this is
_________________law .
c) Cp/Cv is always ____________ than 1.
d) The other name of isobaric process is ___________ process.
2. State the first law of thermodynamics.
3. How do you classify thermodynamic systems?
4.State Boyle’slaw.
5. Write the equation representing constant volume process and draw P –v diagram.
PART – B
6. (a) Explain clausius statement.
(b) During the compression stroke of an engine, the work done on the working
fluid in the engine cylinder is 75KJ/kg and the heat rejected to thesurrounding is
42KJ/kg. find the change in internal energy
or
(a) Define pressure and volume.
(b) A system is supplied 20KJ of heat energy the output of the system is8 KJ.
What is the change in internal energy?
7. Prove that the gas constant R is equal to the difference of two specific heats
(Cp and Cv )
Or
2 kg of ideal gas heated from 25 C and 105 C. Assume R=0.265 KJ/Kg 0k and
0 0
ƴ=1.18 for the gas

Find
a) Specific heats
b) Change in internal energy
c) Change in enthalpy
8. Derive an expression for workdone in an adiabatic process
Or
Derive an expression for workdone in polytropic process
201
category allocated
1 Fundamentals of R,U 3 CO1
thermodynamics
2 Fundamentals of R,U 3 CO1
thermodynamics
3 Laws of perfect gases R,U 3 CO2
4 Laws of perfect gases R,U 3 CO2
5 Thermodynamic R, U 3 CO3
processes
6 Thermodynamic R, U 3 CO3
processes
7 Thermodynamic R,U 3 CO3
processes
10 Performance of IC R,U 3 CO5
engines
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Fundamentals of AP 8 CO1
thermodynamics
12 Laws of perfect gases AP 8 CO2
13 Thermodynamic AP 8 CO3
processes
14 Air standard cycles AP 8 CO4
15 Performance of IC AP 8 CO5
engines
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO3 or AN 10 CO3, CO4, CO5
CO4 or CO5
C-20-A-305
202
THERMAL ENGINEERING
PART - A
1. State second law of thermodynamics.

2. Define Thermodynamic System, Boundary and surroundings.
3. State Charle’s law.
4. Define Specific Heat at constant volume.
5. List out any three Non-Flow Thermodynamic processes.
6. A close vessel contains 1Kg of air At 20°C Temperature and 1 bar pressure. Heat is supplied to
the vessel till the pressure increases to 2 bar.Find the final temperature of air.
7. Distinguish between Isothermal and Adiabatic Process.
8. What are the assumptions made in Air-Standard Cycles?
9. A Heat Engine working on Carnot cycle works between 600°K and 310°K. Find Air Standard
Efficiency of Cycle.
10. Define
(a) Indicated power.
(b) Brake power
(c) Friction power.
PART – B
11. (a)Define Internal Energy and Enthalpy.

(b)One Kg of air is heated from 20°C to 105°C. Find the change of internal energy and change of
enthalpy. Assume Cp = 1.01KJ/Kg K and Cv = 0.72KJ/Kg K.
or
A system executes a cyclic process during which there are four heat transfers, namely, Q1= 20KJ,
Q2 = -4KJ, Q3 =15KJ, Q4 = 4KJ. At four points work is done three of which are W1= 3.6KJ, W2=
-2.6KJ and W3= 4KJ. What is the fourth quantity? State whether work is done by the system or
on the system.
12. A certain quantity of gas has a pressure of 350Kpa when its volume is 0.03m3 and temperature
is 35°C. If gas constant is 0.29KJ/Kg K for this gas, determine the mass of gas present. If the
pressure is increased by 1Mpa while volume remains constant, what will be the new
temperature?
Or
An ideal gas is expanded from 4 bar and 0.04 m3 to 1.2bar and 0.1 m3.The temperature fell
down during this process was observed as 146°C. If the value of Cp and Cv are 1.024KJ/Kg K and
0.726KJ/Kg K respectively. Find (a) The mass of gas (b) the change in internal energy.
13. 2Kg of air at 10 bar and 327°C expands adiabatically to a pressure of 1 bar.
Determine (a) Final volume
203
(b) Final temperature
(c) Work energy transferred during this process.
For air Cp = 1.005KJ/Kg K and R= 0.297 KJ/Kg K
or
0.0001m of air at 1000 KN/m expands isothermally to a volume of 0.001 m3, the initial
3 2
temperature is 25°C. Assume, R = 0.297KJ/Kg K, Find

(a) The mass of air (b) final pressure
(c) Work transferred (d) heat transferred
14. Derive an expression to find Air standard Efficiency of Otto Cycle with aid of P-V and T-S
diagrams.
or
An ideal diesel cycle has a compression ratio of 16 with lowest temperature and pressure 27°C
and 1 bar respectively. If heat added during the cycle is 500KJ/Kg of air, determine (a) pressure
and temperature at the each salient point, (b) thermal efficiency of cycle. Take R = 0.287 KJ/Kg-K
and Cp= 1.005KJ/Kg-K.
15. A two cylinder four stroke cycle I.C. engine is to be designed to develop 16 KW indicated power
at 1500 rpm. The mean effective pressure of cycle is limited to 7bar. Determine the bore
diameter and stroke of the engine if the stroke is equal to 1.2 times bore diameter.
or
The following details refer to a four stroke diesel engine:
Cylinder diameter = 220 mm.
Length of stroke = 330 mm.
Speed = 300 rpm.
Effective brake load =500 N.
Mean circumference of brake drum = 4.5 m.
Indicated Mean Effective Pressure = 5.6 bar.
Calculate (a) IP; (b) BP; (c) Mechanical efficiency.
PART – C
16. Develop an expression for Work done in adiabatic process by P-V diagram.
***
AUTOMOBILE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS SYSTEMS
204
Total periods
Course Title Course Code No of periods/week
/Semester
and Electronics A-306 04 60
Systems
TIME SCHEDULE
Weighta
Periods Short Essay Essay
Sl. ge
Major Topic Allocate Type Type Type
No. of
d (3 (8 (10
marks
Basic Electrical and
1. Electromagnetic Induction 8 9 3 -
laws
Electronic devices in
2. 8 9 3 -
Automobiles
3. Batteries 8 11 1 1
4. Ignition Systems 8 11 1 1
5. Starting System 8 11 1 1
6 Generating System 8 8 - 1
Automobile Wiring
7. Systems, Lighting and 12 11 1 1
Accessories
Part – C Question having 10 marks weightage 01
10
from CO3 or CO4 or CO5
Total 60 80 10 5 1
Course Code: Title: Automobile Electrical and Total No. Of Periods:

A-306 Electronics Systems 60
1.0 Apprehend the basic principles of electrical and electronics.
Course
2.0 Understand the electrical systems used in automobiles.
Objectives:
3.0 Understand the wiring system and lighting system in the automobiles.
205
Define basic electrical and electromagnetic induction laws and solve simple
C01 A-306.1
problems based on them.
C02 A-306.2 Interpret the functions of basic electronics devices
C03 A-306.3 Analyse the features ofbatteries used in automobiles
Discuss the Ignition System, Starting System and Generating System of an
C04 A-306.4
automobile
Describe the features of Automobile Wiring Systems, Lighting System and
C05 A-306.5
Electrical Accessories
Learner Outcomes: Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Basic Electrical and Electromagnetic Induction laws

1.1 State and explain Ohm’s Law
1.2 Differentiate between series and parallel Electrical circuits
1.3 Compute the resistance of a conductor for a given length, area and resistivity.
1.4 State the Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.
1.5 State Fleming’s Right hand rule
1.6 State Lenz’s law
1.7Distinguish between self and mutual inductance.
1.8 Calculate inductance of a given coil.
1.9State the Energy stored in a magnetic field (only formula)
1.10Describe the Lifting power of a magnet (no derivation)
2.0 Electronic devices in automobiles
2.1 Define conductors, insulators and semiconductors & their applications
2.2 State the formation of P-N junction diode and its applications
2.3 State the formation of P-N-P & N-P-N transistors and their applications.
2.4 Explain the Binary system and its suitability to switching
2.5 Define integrated circuits and list the types
2.6 List the different voltage levels required for Automobiles.
2.7 Describe the basic microprocessor (8085) and list its functions
2.8 Describe the basic micro controller (8051) and list its functions
2.9 Explain the interfacing of Microprocessor and microcontroller with sensors.
2.10 Explain electronic navigation system in Automobiles.
3.0 Batteries
3.1 List the types of battery; and parts of Lead acid battery
3.2 State the three functions of batteries.
3.3 State the physical and chemical changes noticed during the charging and discharging of a
lead acid battery.
3.4 State the ampere hour and watt-hour efficiency of the battery
3.5 List three different methods of charging of battery.
3.6 Explain the trickle charging of battery.
3.7 List the four methods to test a lead acid battery for fully charged and discharged
condition.
3.8 State the maintenance of a lead acid battery.
3.9 Describe the maintenance free battery.
4.0Ignition Systems
206
4.1 Explain the working principle of ignition system
4.2 Explain the necessity of ignition system.
4.3 Draw the circuit diagram of coil ignition system and identify its components.
4.4 State the function of each component of coil ignition system
4.5 Explain the constructional details of distributor.
4.6 State the function of contact breaker points and the condenser.
4.7 State the specifications of a spark plug.
4.8 State the terms spark plug, plug gap and C.B. point gap.
4.9 State the principle of Electronic ignition system.
4.10 Explain the working principle of transistorized ignition system
4.11 List five Advantages of transistorized ignition system over conventional ignition system
and state applications of magneto ignition systems.
4.12 Describe the magneto ignition system
5.0 Starting System
5.1 State the principle of DC Motor.
5.2 State the functions of self-starter.
5.3 Explain the conditions for starting an engine by a self-Starter motor.
5.4 Describe the use of series motor as self-starter.
5.5 Explain the working principle of Bendix drive with a sketch.
5.6 Explain the constructional details of self-starter.
5.7 Describe the working of Lucas drive and Follow-through drive with sketches.
5.8 State the functions of over running clutch drive.
5.9 Explain the working principle of a solenoid switch with a sketch.
6.0 Generating System
6.1 Sketch the components of DC Generator
6.2 Explain the function of each component
6.3 State the need of cut out in charging system
6.4 Explainthe working principle of cut out
6.5 State the need for voltage and current regulation while charging the battery by using
dynamo
6.6 Describe generation of alternating emf and alternating currents.
7.0 Automobile Electrical wiring systems, Lighting and Accessories
7.1 Differentiate between earth return and insulated return wiring systems.
7.2 State the meaning of wire harnessing.
7.3 Analyse the wiring layout of a passenger car with petrol engine with diagram.
7.4 Analyse the wiring layout of a commercial vehicle with diesel engine with diagram.
7.5 Analyse the wiring layout of two wheeler with diagram.
7.6 Explain the constructional details of sealed beam head light.
7.7 Describe the adjustment of head lights.
7.8Identify the colour code and Symbols used in Automotive wiring Diagram.
7.9 Explain the working principles of 1. Horn, 2. Wind screen wiper,
3. Traffic indicator, 4. Flash type directional indicator lights, 5. Fuel, 6. Oil and 7. Water
Gauge circuits with circuit diagrams.
207
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: A- Course Title: Automobile Electrical and No. of No. of
306 Electronics Systems COs:5 Periods:60
CO Periods Addressing PO
Level
POs Mapped with CO No. in Col. 1 Remarks
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO1 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 9 15 1 > 40% Level 3
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 22 37 2 (Highly Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO3, CO4, CO5 15 25 2 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 14 23 1
Addressed)
PO5 5% t0 25% level 1
PO6 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-306.1 3 3 1 2 2 3
A-306.2 2 3 1 2 3
A-306.3 3 3 1 2 1 3
A-306.4 3 2 1 3 1 3 2
A-306.5 3 1 2 2 1 3 2
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Basic Electrical and Electromagnetic Induction laws:
Electrical Units of current, voltage, power, Energy – S.I. Units –Ohm’s Law – Series and parallel
circuits - Resistance of a conductor– Determination of total resistance of a given conductor - Basic
principle of flux production due to electric current - Fleming’s Right hand rule - Lenz’s law -
Faradays laws of electromagnetic induction – Self and Mutual Inductance.
2.0 Electronic Devices in Automobiles

Conductors, insulators and semiconductors - P-N Junction Diode & its applications – PNP and NPN
transistors & their applications – Introduction to Binary system - Suitability of Binary system in
switching – Integrated Circuits and types - Basic Microprocessor (8085) - Basic Microcontroller
(8051) – Interfacing of Microprocessor and Microcontroller with Sensors – Electronic Navigation
system in Automobiles.
3.0 Batteries
Types of batteries – Primary and secondary cells –Different types of batteries – Parts of a lead acid
battery - Constructional features of a lead acid battery - Chemical reaction during charging and
discharging - Ampere-hour efficiency- Watt-hour efficiency –Charging of a battery – different
methods [trickle charging] - Battery tests – voltage test, specific gravity test, high discharge test,
cadmium cells test - Care and maintenance of lead acid battery maintenance free battery.
208
4.0 Ignition systems
Requirements of ignition system - Types of ignition system-coil ignition and magneto ignition
systems - Constructional details and working principle of coil and magneto ignition systems with
circuit diagrams-study of the components in detail –Distributor, C B Points, Condenser ,H T Coil,
Spark Plug- Specifications of a spark plug - Ignition Timing – advancing and retarding of ignition-
Automatic advance mechanics - - Electronic ignition - Transistorized ignition system and Capacitor
Discharge Ignition (CDI)-working principle with circuit Diagrams-advantages over conventional
ignition systems
5.0 Starting Motors

Working principle of a D.C. Motor - Need of self-starter - Conditions of self-starter during starting of
an engine - Need of series motor as self-starter –Constructional details of self-starter and solenoid
switch – Self Starter Drive mechanisms – Bendix drive, Folo through drive - Over running clutch
drive.
6.0 Generating System:

Principle of DC Generator – Constructional details of DC Generator – Function of Cut-out - Voltage
and current regulator – Limitation of DC Generator – Principle of alternating current – constructional
details of alternator –advantages.
7.0 Automobile Wiring System, Lighting and Accessories

Types of wiring systems- earth return and insulated return system – 12v and 24 volts systems -
Meaning of wire harnessing - Principle of Automobile Illumination - Head lamps – construction of
sealed beam lamps – Halogen screen wiper circuit - Traffic Indicators - Instrument panel –
Speedometer, Odometer - Fuel level gauge - Oil pressure gauge - Water temperature gauge-
Automatic wiper-Automatic Head lamp -Colour code & Symbols of wiring Diagram
REFERENCES
1. Automotive Electrical systems equipment: by N.R. Khatawate - (S.Chand& Co.)

2. Basic Electrical Engineering. : by M.L. Gupta
3. Electrical Technology: by B.L.Theraja
4. Electrical Equipment of Automobiles: by Parker Smith
5. Automobile Electrical Equipment: by P.L. Kohli
6. Basic Automobile Electricity: by C.P. Nakra
7. Automobile Electrical Engineering: by Arora &Dass
8. Automobile Engineering: by K.K. Ramalingam
9. Microcontroller & application (8051): Mazdi&Mazdi
10. Digital Electronics- Morris Mano
11. Instrumentation by – A.K.Sawhaney
12. Automotive Mechanics- S.Srinivasan
209
A-306, Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems

Weight Distribution of Distribution of
Sl. Periods
Chapter Name age Weightage Weightage
No Allocated
Allocated
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Basic Electrical and
1. Electromagnetic 8 9 3 3 3 - 1 1 1 -
Induction laws
Electronic devices in
2. 8 9 3 3 3 - 1 1 1 -
Automobiles
3. Batteries 8 11 3 - 8 - 1 - 1 -
4. Ignition Systems 8 11 - 3 8 - - 1 1 -
5. Starting System 8 11 - 3 8 - - 1 1 -
6 Generating System 8 8 - - 8 - - - 1 -
Automobile Wiring
7. Systems, Lighting and 12 11 3 - 8 - 1 - 1 -
Accessories
or CO4 or CO5
Total: 60 80 12 12 46 10 4 4 7 1

Unit Test – II From 5.1 to7.9
210
Unit Test - 1

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Basic Electrical and Electromagnetic induction Law R 4 CO1
2 Electronic devices in Automobiles R,U 6 CO2
3 Batteries R 3 CO3
4 Ignition system U,R 3 CO4
Part - B (24 marks)
5 Basic electrical Electronic AP 8 CO1
6 Electronic devices - - -
7 Batteries AP 8 CO3
8 Ignition system AP 8 CO4
Unit Test - 2

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Starting Systems R,U 7 CO4
2 Generating system U 6 CO4
3 Automobile wiring systems, lighting and R 3 CO5
Accessories
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Starting Systems AP 8 CO4
5 Generating system AP 8 CO4
6 Automobile wiring systems, lighting and AP 8 CO5
Accessories
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application ; An- Analysing
C20-A-306
211
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,
UNIT TEST - 1
Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems
PART – A
(a) ______________is the unit for current

(b) ______________is the unit for voltage
(c) ______________is the unit for power
(d) List different Electrical circuits.
2 Define (a) Conductor (b) Semi-Conductor (c) Insulator
3 List the functions of basic micro processor
4 State the Ampere hour efficiency and battery
5 State the functions of condenser
PART – B
6 State and explain Ohms law
Or
Compute the resistance of a conductor for a given length, area and resistivity
7 Explain the trickle charging of batteries
Or
Explain the methods to test a Lead acid battery, for charged and discharged condition.
8 Explain the principle of electromagnetic induction
Or
Explain the working of coil ignition system with a circuit diagram
212

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
1 Basic electrical and electronics R 3 CO1
4 Electronic devices R 3 CO2
5 Electronic devices R 3 CO2
6 Electronic devices R, AP 3 CO2
7 Batteries R 3 CO3
8 Ignition R 3 CO4
9 Starting R 3 CO4
10 Auto wiring and lighting R 3 CO5
Part - B (40 marks)

11 Batteries U,AP 8 CO3
12 Ignition U,AP 8 CO4
13 Generating system AP 8 CO4
14 Starting system AP 8 CO4
15 Auto wiring U,AP 8 CO5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question having 10 marks weightage U 10 CO3,CO4,CO5
C20-A-306
213
Automobile Electrical and Electronics Systems
PART - A
1. State Faraday’s first law of electromagnetic induction.
2. The resistance of a conductor of length 2m, specific resistance 1.59 X 10-8 Ω-m is 100Ω. What is
the area of cross section of that conductor?
3. Write any three differences between series and parallel electrical circuits.
4. Define integrated circuit.
5. Write the applications of P-N Junction diode.
6. What are the functions of microprocessor (8085)?
7. What are the methods to charge lead – acid batteries?
8. Write any three advantages of transistorised ignition system over conventional ignition system.
9. What are the conditions for starting an engine by a self-starter motor?
10. What is wire harnessing?
PART – B
11. Explain the physical and chemical changes noticed after the battery is fully charged and
discharged.
Or
What are different tests carried out to estimate the condition of a battery? Describe each of
them briefly.
12. What is the principle of Electronics Ignition system? Explain it.

or
Explain with the circuit diagram the constructional details and working of coil ignition system.
13. Explain the constructional details of a alternator with a neat sketch.

or
Explain the working principle of Bendix drive with a sketch.
14. Explain constructional details of a DC generator with a neat sketch.

Or
What is the need of Cut – out in charging system? Explain the working of Cut – out.
15. Explain the working of oil pressure gauge circuit with the help of a neat sketch.
Or
Explain the constructional details of sealed beam head light
PART – C
16. Compare computerized ignition system with electronic ignition system and suggest reason for
adopting computerized ignition system.
***
MACHINE DRAWING
214
Periods per
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week
Semester
MACHINE DRAWING A-307 6 90
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. No Chapter Name Periods Allocated Weightage Allocated
1 NutsandBolts 18 15
2 Rivetsand Riveted joints 21 15
3 Keys 12 10
4 Assembly Drawing* 39 20
Total: 90 60
Course Code: Title: MACHINE DRAWING Total No. Of Periods: 90

A-307
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to draw to scale the
various views of Machine elements like
Course
1.0 Various types of nuts and bolts..
Objectives:
2.0 Varioustypesofrivetedjoints & keys and
3.0 Varioustypesof joints,couplings &bearings.

Draw to scale various views of different types of nuts and bolts, from the given
C01 A-307.1
data or drawing.
Draw to scale various views of different typesof rivets &rivetedjoints from the
C02 A-307.2
given data or drawing.
Draw to scale various views of different typesof keys and joints- knuckle & cotter
C03 A-307.3
joints from the given data or drawing.
Draw assembly drawing to the given parts of the couplings, knuckle and cotter
C04 A-307.4
joints.
C05 A-307.5 Draw assembly drawing to the given parts of the bearing
Learning Objectives: Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to draw to scale of
different views of
1.0 NUTS AND BOLTS

1.1 . Draw Screwnomenclature, Externalandinternalthreads – front view.
1.2 Draw Lefthandandrighthand threads – front view.
1. 3 Draw Multiplethreads – front view.
1.4 Draw Formsof Vthreads-B.S.W.threads,B.A,threads,
Multiplethreads,sellersthreads,metricthreads –front view.
1.5 Drawtheformsofsquarethreads,knucklethreads Acme,Buttressthreads
International metric thread form –front view.
1.6 Draw the hexagonal nut, square nut,cap nut, capstan nut, and flanged nut –front view,
top view.
215
1.7 Draw the hexagonal headed bolt –front view, side view.
1.8 Draw Square headed bolt, Cheese head boltand Cupheadedbolt–front view, side
view
1.9 Draw Hookbolt and Eye bolt–front view, side view.
1.10 Draw Foundationbolts-Lewis foundation bolt, eye foundation bolt, Rag foundation bolt
–front views.
2.0Rivets and riveted joints

2.1 Drawthevarioustypesofrivets: Snap, cup, conical. Round conical, countersunk - front
views.
2.2 Draw Lapjoint:singlerivetedanddouble riveted Lapjoints(ChainandZig- Zag) - front view,
top views.
2.3 Draw Butt joint:Singlecoveranddoublecoverof single riveted and double riveted (Chain
and Zig - Zag) Butt joints - front view, top view.
3.0 Keys
3.1 Draw Sunk Taper key –front view, side view.
3.2 Draw Saddle keys – flat, hollow keys –front view, side view.
3.3 Draw Feather keys and types – peg, single head, double headed feather keys – front
view.
3.4 Draw Gib headed key–front view, side view.
3.5 Draw Wood ruff key –front view, side view.
4.0 Assembly drawing

4.1. Draw Joints:Knucklejoint&Cotterjoint –sectional front view, top view.
4.2. Draw Couplings:Muffcoupling, SplitMuffcoupling, Oldham’scoupling - –sectional
front view, side view.
4.3. Draw Flange coupling, protected type flange coupling and Universal coupling -
sectional frontview, side view.
4.3 Draw Bearings: Solid bearing -front view, top view, Bushedbearings, pedestalbearings
and Footstepbearings- sectional front view, top view.
CO – PO MAPPING
216
Course
Course Title:
Code:A- No of COs:05 No. Of periods: 90
MACHINE DRAWING
307
Pos Mapped with CO No CO Periods Level Remarks
Addressing (1,2,3)
PO in Col 1
Addressed)
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 15 17 1 25% to 40% Level 2
( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 10 11 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 40 44 3
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 10 11 1
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-307.1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3
A-307.2 3 1 1 3 2 1 3
A-307.3 3 2 1 3 3 1 3
A-307.4 3 1 1 3 3 1 3
A-307.5 3 1 1 3 3 1 3
the following:
*Assembly drawing is compulsory question and its weightage is 20

marks,Shortanswerquestionsweightageiseach5marks,Remainingessay
questionsweightageiseach10 marks.Allquestionsarecompulsory.
COURSE CONTENT
1. NutsandBolts
Screwnomenclature,externalandinternalthreads,lefthandandrighthand
threads,multiplethreads,formsof Vthreads,B.S.W.threads,B.Athreads,
Multiplethreads,sellersthreads,metricthreadsandabletodraw.
Drawtheformsofsquarethreads,knucklethreads,Acme,Buttressthreads International Metric
thread form.Draw the hexagonal nut square nut, cap nut, capstan nut, and flanged nut.
Draw the hexagonal headed bolt square headed bolt, cheese head bolt,
cupheadedbolthookbolt,eye, bolt,andfoundationbolts-Lewis foundation bolt, eye foundation
bolt, Rag foundation bolt.Drawthecollarstud,squareneckstud,roundneckstud.
217
2. RivetsandRivetedjoints:
Drawthevarioustypesofrivets;lapjoint:singlerivetedanddouble riveted
Lapjoints(ChainandZig- Zag), butt joint:Singlecoveranddoublecoverof single riveted and
double riveted (Chain and Zig - Zag) Butt joints.
3. Keys
Drawthe views differenttypesofKeys.
4. Assemblydrawing
Joints:Knucklejoint,Cotterjoint,
Couplings:Muffcoupling,splitMuffcoupling,Oldham’scoupling,flange coupling-
protected type flange coupling- universal coupling
Bearings: Solid bearing, Bushedbearings,pedestalbearings-Footstepbearings.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. MachineDrawingby N. D. Bhatt – Charokar Publications
2. MachineDrawingby N.Siddeswar,Kannaiah,Sastri-Mc Graw Hill Educations
3. MachineDrawingby G.R.Nagpal – Khanna Publishers
4. MachineDrawingby R.B.Gupta – Tech India Publication Series.
BLUE PRINT OF MARKS

A-307, MACHINE DRAWING

Perio Weig
ds ht age
Alloca Alloca
ted ted
R U Ap An R U Ap An
NutsandBolts
1 18 15 5 10 1 1
Rivetsand Riveted
2 21 15 5 10 1 1
joints
3 Keys 12 10 5 5 1 1
Assembly Drawing*
4 39 20 20 1
Total: 90 60 15 25 20 3 3 1

A-307 MACHINE DRAWING
218
PART—A5 x4=20
Instructions: (1) Answer allquestions.

(2) Each question carries fivemarks.
(3) Draw proportionatesketches.
(4) All dimensions are in mm and use first angle ofprojection.
1. Draw the thread profiles of square and Buttressthread

with suitable proportions.
2. Draw the following rivet heads with suitable

proportions, taking rivet diameter as 20 mm:
(a) Snaphead
(b) Flathead
3. Draw the two views of flat saddle key in assembly with

shaft and hub. Assume shaft diameter as 30 mm and
hub diameter as 60 mm.
4. Drawthefrontviewofkeywithgibheadinassemblywithshaftandhub.
Assume shaft diameter as 25 mm and hub diameter as 50 mm.
PART—B 10+10+20=40
Instructions: (1) Answer allquestions.

(2) Marks are indicated at the end of eachquestion.
(3) Assume any missing datasuitably.
5. Draw two views of the hexagonal headed bolt and nut with washerby taking
the boltdiameter as20mm.
6. Draw the two views of single riveted double-strap butt joint, taking the
thicknessofplatesas10mmanddiameterofrivets as18mm.
7. The details of knuckle joint are shown in the figure below, draw
its assembled
(a) sectional frontview
(b) topview
219
***
220
AUTOMOBILE LABORATORY
Course Title Course Code Periods per week Total
Periods/Semester
Automobile
A-308 3 45
Laboratory
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major Topic Periods

No.
1. Identification of tools and equipment 5
2. Demonstration of working of two and four stroke petrol and diesel engines 8
3. Dismantling and assembling of engine 10

Demonstration of working procedure of fuel supply, cooling, lubrication and intake
4. 10
and exhaust system of an engine with the aid of simulator
Dismantling and assembling of mechanical fuel pump, carburettor, single and multi-
5. 12
plate clutch, constant and synchromesh gear box and differential
Demonstration of driving skills( One batch will go for Two wheeler driving practice
6.
and another batch will do the experiment)
Total: 45
Course Code: A-308 Course Title: AUTOMOBILE LABORATORY No. of

Periods: 45
1. Understand the dismantling of engine, identify the components and
assemble the engine components
COURSE 2. Know the working procedure of fuel supply, cooling, lubrication and
OBJECTIVES
intake and exhaust system of an engine with the aid of simulator
3. Understand the dismantling and assembling of Mechanical fuel pump,
carburettor, clutch, gear box and differential also know the driving skills

C01 A-308.1 Identify the tools and equipment used in automobile laboratory
Assemble the dismantled engine
C02 A-308.2
Demonstrate the working procedure of 1.fuel supply, cooling, and 2. Lubrication 3.
C03 A-308.3
intake and exhaust system of an engine with the aid of simulator
Manage the dismantling and assembling of 1. Mechanical fuel pump, 2 Electrical
C04 A-308.4 fuel pump. 3. Carburettor,4. Single plate clutch, 5. Multi plate clutch, 6. Constant
mesh gear box 7. Synchromesh gear box and 8. Differential
C05 A-308.5 Demonstrate driving skills on two wheeler vehicle
LEARNING OUTCOMES:Upon completion of the course the student shall able to
221
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Identify the different tools, gauges and various instruments used in Automobile Laboratory
2. Demonstrate working principle of two stroke and four stroke engines (Petrol and Diesel) with
the aid of cut model
3. Dismantle a given I.C. Engine and identify the various basic components such as
Cylinder,Cylinder block, Cylinder head, Piston, Piston rings, Connecting rod, Crank shaft, Valves,
Valve actuating mechanism, Timing gears, Crankcase, Spark plug, Fuel pump, Carburettor, Fuel
Injector, Fuel Injection pump
4. Demonstrate the fuel system of a multi cylinder petrol and diesel engines with the aid of
simulator
5. Demonstrate the Inlet and Exhaust system of a multi cylinder engine with the aid of a simulator
6. Demonstrate the lubrication system of a multi cylinder engine with the aid of a simulator
7. Demonstrate the water cooling system of a multi cylinder engine with the aid of a simulator
8. Dismantling and Assembling of A.C. Mechanical fuel pump and Electrical fuel pump.
9. Dismantling and Assembling of Carburettor
10. Dismantling and Assembling of a single plate clutch and multi plate clutch
11. Dismantling and Assembling of Constant mesh & synchromesh gear box.
12. Dismantling and Assembling of a Differential
13. Demonstrate the driving skills on Two wheeler vehicle/driving simulator
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code: A-
Course Title: Automobile Laboratory No of Cos:5 No. Of periods:45
308
POs Mapped with CO No CO Periods Level Remarks
Addressing PO in (1,2,3
Col 1 )
No % >40% Level 3 (Highly Addressed)
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 10 22 1 25% to 40% Level 2 (Moderately
Addressed)
PO2 CO2,CO3,CO4 10 22 1 5% to 25% Level 1
( Low Addressed)
PO4 CO1, CO2,CO3, CO4,CO5 5 11 1
PO5 CO1, CO2,CO3, CO4,CO5 15 33 2
PO6 CO2,CO3,CO4 5 11 1
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-308.1 3 3 1 3 3
A-308.2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
A-308.3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
A-308.4 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
A-308.5 3 3 3 3
the following:
222
The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student
S Title of the
Key competencies Competencies
no experiment
1) Identify the tools required for
a
Particular task. 1) State different types of tools and their
Identification Of
2) Identify the gauges required applications.
Tools,gauges
for 2) State different types of gauges.
1 and
a particular task and also able 3)State different types of measuring
Instruments.
to identify the ranges. Instruments and also use of each
3) Identify the measuring instrument
Instrument required for a
Particular task.
working Identify the engine parts in cut Appreciate the working principle of two
principle of two model of petrol and diesel stroke and four stroke petrol and diesel
2 stroke and four engine engines
stroke engines
(Petrol&Diesel)
1) Identify the tools required for
Dismantling.
1) Dismantle the Engine from
2) Use Of appropriate tools dismantle the
the
engine parts and keep the parts without
Vehicle.
Engine damage in order.
2) Dissemble the engine
3 Dismantling 3) Clean all the parts with appropriate
3) Report on the condition
and assembling tool / medium.
4) Assembling the Engine
4) Assemble all the parts in order.
5) Check the Running Condition
5) Check the running condition of the
of the engine.
engine.
1) Identify the components of a

Fuel System of a
Fuel system. 1)Draw a line diagram of a fuel System of
4 Multi Cylinder
2) Know the function of each a given Multi Cylinder Engine
Engine.
component in the system
Inlet and 1) Understand the need of inlet
1)Draw a line diagram of a Inlet and
Exhaust System and exhaust system.
5 Exhaust System of a given Multi Cylinder
of a Multi 2) Know the function of each
Engine
Cylinder Engine. component in the system
Lubrication 1) Identify the components of a
System of a Lubricating system. 1)Draw a line diagram of a Lubrication
6
Multi Cylinder 2) Know the function of each System of a given Multi Cylinder Engine
Engine component in the system
1) Identify the components of a 1)Draw a line diagram of a Cooling System
Cooling System
Cooling system. of a given Multi Cylinder Engine
7 of a Multi
2) Know the function of each
Cylinder Engine
component in the system
223
S Title of the
Key competencies Competencies
no experiment
AC Mechanical 1) Dismantle the component fromthe 1) Identify the tools required for
Pump& Vehicle. Dismantling the component.
8
Electrical fuel 2) Dissemble the component 2) Use of appropriate tools to
pump 3) Report on the condition dismantle the component
4) Assembling the component 3) Keep the dismantled parts
9 Carburettor 5) Check the Running Condition without any damage in order
of the component 4) Clean all the parts with
appropriate tool / medium
Single plate and
5) Assemble the component
10 Multi plate
6) Check and bring to the operating
clutch
condition
Constant mesh
and
11
synchromesh
Gear box
12 Differential
1) Know the foot controls of the 1) Identify the Hand & Foot Controls of a
vehicle Two Wheeler i.e A,B,C
2) Know the hand controls of the 2) State the Purpose of Foot
vehicle Controls.
3) Familiarity of all Driving Controls 3) Operate the foot controls
4) Operate all the above Controls efficiently
simultaneously whenever 4) Operate to change of gear by
13 needed. gear Shift lever
Driving Practice 5) To Know the various Road signs 5) Identify the various accessories
and signals used while driving a like Horn, Lights and Indicators.
vehicle. 6) Operate all the above Controls
6) Legal requirements to drive a Simultaneously.
vehicle on road.
224
WORKSHOP PRACTICE – II
Periods per
Course Title Course Code Periods per Week
Semester
Workshop Practice- II A – 309 6 90
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Major Topics Periods
1. Machine Shop (Turning) 30
2. Welding Practice 30
3. Special Machine Shop 30
Total 90
Course Title: Workshop Practice- II Total No. Of Periods: 90

Code: A-309
Course 1.0 Perform various operations on lathe
Objectives: 2.0 Practice the arc welding
3.0 Practice on special machines

A-309.1 Produce an object as per model by performing on or more of the following
C01 operations viz., plain turning, step turning, taper turning, knurling and thread
cutting.
A-309.2 Design and model a lap joint, a butt joint and a T – joint by fastening the plates
C02
with arc welding.
Prepare a component by using shaping machine, milling machine and planer
C03 A-309.3
machine.
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Perform various operations on the Lathe

1.1 Perform a plain turning operation on a lathe machine.
1.2 Select proper tool to perform the job.
1.3 Centering the job by dial gauge
1.4 Select the suitable speed for different operations
1.5 Make use of various measuring instruments for taking dimensions.
1.6 Perform step turning operation on lathe.
1.7 Calculate the taper angle.
1.8 Practice the different taper turning methods on lathe
1.9 Turn the required tapers by swivelling the compound rest.
1.10 Produce articles of industrial application such as ring gauges, plug gauges, handle
etc.
2.0 Practice the Arc Welding
2.1 Prepare the edges for welding
225
2.2 Select the suitable electrode, voltage and current
2.3 Handle the Electrode Holder for laying welding beads.
2.4 State the operation of welding transformer and generator.
2.5 Perform various weld joint operations.
3.0 Hands on practice on Special Machines

3.1 Perform the operation of groove cutting by using Shaper.
3.2 Perform the operation of gear cutting by using Milling Machine
3.3 Perform the surface finishing operation by using planning machine.
COURSE CONTENT
1 Machine Shop (Turning)
a. Plain Turning
b. Step Turning
c. Taper Turning
d. Turning Collars
e. Knurling
f. Facing
2. Welding
a.Practice of Handling of Electrode
b. Butt joints.
c. Lap joints.
d. T-Joint.
3.0 Special Machines
a. Shaping (Preparation of Groove)

b. Milling (Gear Cutting Operation)
c. Planning (Surface finishing Operation)
226
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: A-309 Course Title: Workshop Practice - II No. of No. of Periods:
COs: 6 90
Level
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3 05 6 1 > 40% Level 3
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3 05 6 1 (Highly Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO3 05 6 1 25% to 40% level 2
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3 24 26 2 (Moderately
Addressed)
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3 23 25 2 5% t0 25% level 1
PO6 CO1,CO2,CO3 23 25 2 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-309.1 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 2
A-309.2 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 2
A-309.3 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 2
Title of the experiment Key competency

 Centering of the work piece using dial gauge
 Fixing the cutting tool at proper inclination
Plain turning  Selecting the suitable speed, feed and depth of cut for
rough and finishing operations
 Checking the dimensions
Step turning
 Selecting the suitable speed, feed and depth of cut for
Taper turning
 Rotating the compound rest to the suitable angle

Knurling
 Fixing the knurling tool and selecting the suitable
speed and feed
227
Title of the experiment Key competency
Thread Cutting
 Fixing the knurling tool and selecting the suitable
speed and feed
 Edge preparation
Welding  Holding the electrode at suitable angle and distance
with respect to the work piece to maintain the arc
 Checking the bead
 Holding the electrode at suitable angle and distance
Lap joint
Butt joint  Holding the electrode at suitable angle and distance
T-Joint  Holding the electrode at suitable angle and distance
 Prepare the work surface
 Holding the component on a T slotted table fixed to
Shaping
the vice and check thedistance with respect to the
work piece to maintain tool clearance
 Shape the component on given sides
 Position the given milling cutter
Milling  Hold the work piece at suitable position and maintain
thedistance with respect to the milling cutter to attain
milling operation
 Clean the machine before and after use
 Position the tool head
Planning  Hold the work piece at suitable position and maintain
the distance with respect to the cutting tool to attain
planning operation
 Clean the machine before and after use
228
Automobile Electrical and Electronics Laboratory
Course Title Course Code Periods per Week Periods per Semester
and Electronics 45
A – 310 3
Laboratory
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. No. Major Topics Periods
1. Automobile Wiring System 8
2. Batteries 8
3. Automobile Ignition System 10

4. Automobile Charging System 10
5. Automobile Electrical Accessories 9
Total 45
Course Title: Automobile Electrical and Electronics Total No. Of Periods:

Code: A-310 Laboratory 45

Course 1.0 Familiarize the Automobile Electrical Circuits
Objectives: 2.0 Handle the tools appropriately and safely
3.0 To reinforce theoretical concepts by practising relevant exercises.

C01 A-310.1 Identify different colour code systems used in automotive wiring diagrams
C02 A-310.2 Able to conduct Service of lead – acid batteries
Diagnose Ignition System, Starting system, Charging System and Electrical
C03 A-310.3
accessories.
C04 A-310.4 Test Starter Motor, Alternator and overhaul it.
Learning Objectives:
1. Identify different colour code systems used in automotive wiring system.

2. Prepare Electrolyte for Lead – Acid battery
3. Conduct a test on different batteries and their construction
4. Diagnose the ignition system
5. Dismantling and assemble the starter motor used in automobile.
6. Test the given starter Motor and Alternator
7. Dismantling and assemble the alternator used in automobile.
8. Diagnose the wiring of Head light, Trafficators, and Horn
9. Test the various sensors used in automobiles.
229
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: A-310 Course Title: Automobile Electrical and No. of No. of Periods: 45
Electronics Laboratory COs: 4
CO Periods Addressing PO in Col.

Level
POs Mapped with CO No. 1 Remarks
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO1 CO1, CO2,CO3,CO4 6 13 1 > 40% Level 3
PO2 CO1, CO2,CO3,CO4 5 12 1 (Highly Addressed)
PO3 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4 CO2,CO3 6 13 1
Addressed)
PO5 CO1, CO2,CO3,CO4 14 31 2 5% t0 25% level 1
PO6 CO1, CO2,CO3,CO4 14 31 2 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-310.1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
A-310.2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3
A-310.3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3
A-310.4 3 2 2 2 3 3 3
AVERAGE 3 2.5 1.5 2.25 2 3 2.75 3
the following:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions (vi) Quiz (vii)
Industry visits (viii) Tech Fest ( ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits.
Key competencies to be achieved by the students:
Exp No. Name of the Experiment Key Competencies

1. Identify different colour code systems Comprehend the commonly used colour codes in
used in automotive wiring system automotive wiring system.
a. Starting circuit – Red
b. Charging circuit – Yellow
c. Relays and switches – Black
d. Wiper circuit – Blue
Various colours for various Fuse boxes.
2. Prepare Electrolyte for Lead – Acid a. Prepare electrolyte for Lead – Acid battery by
battery mixing proper ratio of acid and distilled water.
b. Check the specific gravity of electrolyte.
3. Conduct a test to study different a. Inspect battery condition
battery condition and construction b. conduct open circuit voltage test
c. Hydrometer test to get specific gravity of the
electrolyte
d. battery load test
4. Diagnose the Ignition System a. Check primary circuit
b. secondary circuits
230
5. Dismantle and assemble starter motor a. Familiarize with the parts of starter motor.
used in automobile. b. Test the starting motor for continuity, faults,
if any
c. Step by step dismantling of starting motor
d. Chronological order to be followed for
assembling the starter motor.
Exp No. Name of the Experiment Key Competencies
6. Conduct a test on Starter Motor and a. Check the condition of carbon Brushes
Alternator to identify the condition of b. Check the movement of Bendix drive
various parts. c. Conduct no load test on starter motor
d. Check Alternator performance characteristics.
e. Test Alternator output
f. Check Cut – in and Cut – out voltage of
alternator
7. Dismantle and assemble the alternator a. Step by step dismantling of alternator.
used in automobile. b. Chronological order to be followed for
assembling the alternator.
8. Diagnose the wiring of Head light, a. Check the fuse in fuse box and replace
Trafficators, and Horn b. Check the connection to the battery
c. Check the brightness of the head lamps and
honk horn d. Check the alignment of head lamps
9. Test the given sensors a. Test Temperature Sensor
b. Test O2 Sensor
c. Test Throttle position sensor
c. Test Pressure sensors
231
IV SEMESTER
232
IV Semester
Instruction

Subjec Total
Name of the Subject Durat End Total
t Code Practic Periods
Theor ion Sessiona Exam
al/Tut Mark
y (hour l Marks Mark
orial s
s) s
Engineering
A-401 3 45 20 80 100
Mathematics - III
Strength of Materials
A-402 5 75 20 80 100
and Fluid Mechanics
Automobile Chassis
A-403 4 60 20 80 100
and Body Engineering
A-404 4 60 20 80 100
and Maintenance
Special Purpose
A-405 4 60 20 80 100
Vehicles
Motor Transport
A-406 4 60 20 80 100
Organisation
PRACTICALS
A-407 Automobile - 6 90 3 40 60 100
Engineering Drawing
Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

A-408
A-409 - 6 90 3 40 60 100
and Maintenance
Laboratory
Hydraulic and
A-410 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Pneumatic Controls
Laboratory
TOTAL 24 18 360+270 - 280 720 1000
233
C-20
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III
Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Title
Engineering
A-401 3 45 20 80
Mathematics-III

Higher order Linear Differential
1 15 CO1
equations with constant coefficients
2 Laplace Transforms 18 CO2
3 Fourier Series 12 CO3
Total Periods 45
(i) To learn the principles of solving differential equations of second

Course Objectives
and higher order.
(ii) To comprehend the concept of Laplace transformations and
inverse Laplace transformations.
(iii) To understand the concept of Fourier Series expansion of
functions.
CO1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential

equations of second and higher order.
Course Outcomes
CO2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various
functions.
CO3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier
Sine and Cosine series.
234
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
Differential Equations of higher order
C.O. 1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equation of second and higher
order.
L.O 1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a, b, c are real numbers and
provide examples.
1.2 Solve higher order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients and provide
examples.
1.3 Define complementary function, particular Integral and general solution of a non-
homogeneous differential equation.
1.4 Describe the methods of solving f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of nth order and X is a
function of the forms k , eax , sin ax, cos ax, x, x n and their linear combinations where n is a
positive integer, with examples.
Unit-II
Laplace Transforms
C.O. 2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various functions.
L.O. 2.1 Define Laplace Transform and explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace
Transform
2.2. Obtain Laplace transforms of standard functions and solve simple problems.
2.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem (without
proof) and Change of Scale property and solve simple problems.
2.4. Write the Laplace Transform of unit step function and second shifting theorem (without proof)
and solve simple problems.
n
2.5. Write formulae for Laplace transform of functions with multiplication by t and division by t,
Laplace transform of derivatives, evaluation of some definite integrals using Laplace
Transforms and solve simple problems.
2.6 Define inverse Laplace Transform, obtain inverse Laplace Transforms of standard functions
and solve simple problems.
2.7 Write linearity property, first and second shifting theorems (without proof), change of scale
property of inverse Laplace transform and solve simple problems.
2.8 Write inverse Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals and solve simple problems.
2.9 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions with multiplication by s and division by s and
solve simple problems.
2.10 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions using partial fractions and solve some simple
problems.
2.10 Define convolution of two functions, state convolution theorem (without proof) and solve
simple problems.
235
Unit-III
Fourier series
C.O. 3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier Sine and Cosine
series
L.O. 3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the intervals (c, c  2 ) and (c, c  2l ) and write the
Euler’s formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series expansion of a function.
3.4 Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0 , 2π) and (-π , π)
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval ( ,  ) and (l , l ) expand
simple functions.
3.6 Write Fourier series expansion of a function over the interval (0, 2l) and (l , l ) and expand
simple functions.
3.7 Write half-range Fourier sine and cosine series of a function over the interval (0, π) and (0, l )
and expand simple functions.
Engineering Mathematics – III

CO/PO - Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.66 2.33 2.33 2.66 3 2.66
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)
Note:
concerned teacher.
PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
applications.
236
C-20
CO periods addressing PO in
Mapped with Level
PO no column I Remarks
CO no (1,2 or 3)
No %
1 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3
>40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3
Highly
3 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3
addressed
4 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3
25% to 40%
5
Level 2
6
Moderately
7 addressed
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3 5% to 25%
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 36 80% 3 Level 1 Low
addressed
<5% Not
addressed
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III

(Common Subject)
Course Content
Unit I: Differential Equations of higher order

1. Solve Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and
higher with emphasis on second order.
2. Solve Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)
y = X where X is in the form k(constant), eax, sinax, cosax, xn, where n is a positive integer, finding
complimentary function, particular integral and general solution.
Unit II: Laplace Transforms
3. Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of elementary functions, linearity property,
state first shifting theorem, change of scale property, multiplication by tn, division by t, LT of
derivatives and integrals, LT of unit step function, state second shifting theorem, inverse Laplace
transforms- state shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by sn and division
by s, derivatives, integrals, examples of inverse LT using partial fractions, state convolution
theorem with simple examples.
Unit III: Fourier series
4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the
interval  c , c  2  and  c , c  2l  , Euler’s formulae , sufficient conditions for existence of
Fourier series expansion of a function, Fourier series expansion of basic functions limited to
k(constant), x, x2 ,sin ax, cos ax, eax and their combinations over the intervals
 0, 2  ,   ,   ,  0, 2l  ,  l , l  , Fourier series for even and odd functions over
  ,   and  l , l  , Fourier half-range sine and cosine series over  0 ,   and  0, l 
237
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers
2. M.R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline of Laplace Transforms, Schaums’ Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers,
Moscow.
Blue print
Weighta Marks wise Question

S. Chapter/ No of COs
ge distribution of wise distribution
No Unit title Periods mapped
allotted weightage of weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I
Higher order
Linear
1 Differential 15 28 11 11 3 3 2 2 1 1 CO1
equations
with constant
coefficients
Unit - II
CO2
2 Laplace 18 33 11 11 11 0 2 2 2 0
Transforms
Unit - III
3 12 19 3 3 3 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Fourier Series
Total 45 80 25 25 17 13 5 5 4 2

C-20
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered
Unit Test-I From LO 1.1 to 2.5
Unit Test-II From LO 2.6 to 3.7
238
Unit Test I C –20, A-401
First Year
Sub Code: A-401
Part-A 16Marks

each
1. Answer the following:

a. Write the auxiliary equation for given differential equation D 2
 4 y  0 (CO1)
b. For given differential equation f ( D) y  0 , if roots of auxiliary equation are 1,-
1,then y  _____________ (CO1)
c. L e3t   ___________ (CO2)
d. L  f (t )  f (s) then L e at
f (t )  f (s  a) : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
2. Solve D 2
 2D  1 y  0. (CO1)
3. Find the particular integral of D 2

 D  4 y  ex ( CO1)
4. 
Evaluate L  t  1
2
 (CO2)
5. Evaluate L t 2
 2cos t  3sin t (CO2)
239
Part-B 3×8=24

6. A) Solve D 4
 5D2  4 y  0. (CO1)
or
B) Solve  D  D  6 y  1  e . (CO1)
2 3 x
A) Solve  D  3D  2  y  x  sin x. (CO1)

2 2
7.
or
B) Solve D 2
 D  y  2e x  3cos x. (CO1)
8. A) Evaluate L e 3t
cos2 t (CO2)
or

B) Evaluate L et  t  1
2
 (CO2)
-o0o-
240
C –20, A-401
Unit Test II
First Year
Sub Code: A-401
Part-A 16Marks

each
1. Answer the following:
a. L  f (t )  f (s) then L tf (t )   d

 
f ( s) : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
ds
 1 
b. L1  ? (CO2)
 s  3
 1 
c. L1  2 2   ? (CO2)
s  a 
d. Write the Fourier series for the function f ( x) in the interval c  x  c  2 . (CO3)
2. Evaluate L te .
t
(CO2)


3t
3. Evaluate e sin 4tdt. (CO2)
0
 3
1 2 s 
4. Evaluate L   2  2 . (CO2)
 s  4 s  16 s  4 
5. Evaluate Fourier coefficient a0 for f ( x) in the interval   ,   . (CO3)
241
Part-B 3×8=24

6. A) Evaluate L te t
cos t. (CO2)
or
 cos at  cos bt 
B) Evaluate L  . (CO2)
 t 

 s 

7. A) Evaluate L1  . (CO2)

  s  1  s 2
 1 

or

 s

B) Evaluate L1   . (CO2)
  
4

 s 1 

8. A) Obtain the Fourier series for the function f ( x)  e x in the interval  0, 2  . (CO3)
or
B) Obtain the half range Fourier cosine series of f ( x)  x 2 in  0,1 . (CO3)
-o0o-
242
END EXAM MODEL PAPER
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS –A- 401

PART-A

1. Solve D  3D  2 y  0. CO1
2


2. Solve D  D  1 y  0. CO1
2

 
3. Find the particular integral of differential equation D  4 y  sin 2 x. CO1
2
 
4. Find the particular integral of differential equation D  3D  2 y  e . CO1
2 3x

5. Find L 2e  sin 3t  cosh t . CO2
3t

 t
6. Find L e cos 4t . CO2 
1 1 4 3s 
7. Find L   2  2  . CO2
s s  4 s 9
2
8. Find the value of a0 in the Fourier expansion of f ( x)  e x in the interval  0, 2  . CO3
9. Find the Fourier coefficients of f ( x) in the interval   ,   . CO3
10. Find the value of a1 in the half range cosine series of f ( x)  k in the interval
 0,   . CO3
243
PART-B
11. A) Solve D 3
 6D2  11D  6  y  0. CO1
Or

B) Solve D  9 y  e  e
2
 3x 3 x
. CO1

12. A) Solve D  4D  4 y  sin 3x. CO1
2

Or
 
B) Solve D  2D  2 y  x  x  1. CO1
2 2

13. A) Evaluate L te cos t . CO2
t

Or
 2
B) Evaluate L t cos 2t . CO2 
 sin 5t sin t 
14. A) Evaluate L   . CO2
 t 
Or

sin t
B) Evaluate  dt. CO2
0
t

1  1 
15. A) Find L   . CO2
 s  s  1 s  2  
Or

 s 

B) Using convolution theorem find L1  2  . CO2

  s  1 s 2
 4  

PART-C
16. Find the Fourier expansion of f ( x)  x  x 2 in the interval   ,   and hence
1 1 1 1 2
deduce that 2      . CO3
1 22 32 42 12
***
244
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – A-401
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- 2 MAX.MARKS : 80M

PART-A
1. Solve D 2
 4D  4 y  0. CO1
2. Solve  D  9  y  0. CO1
2
dy
3. Find the particular integral of differential equation 2sin x  y cos x  xy 3e x . CO1
dx
 3
4. Find the particular integral of differential equation   3 e x  2 cos x   dx. CO1
 x
5. Find  cos 2 2 xdx. CO2
tan 1 x
6. Find  1  x2 dx. CO2
1 1 4 3s 
7. Find L  2 2  2  . CO2
s s  4 s 9
8. Find the value of a0 in the Fourier expansion of i  a sin t
in the interval x 2  y 2  9 CO3
9. Write Euler’s formula of Fourier expansion of f ( x) in the interval x  2 CO3

dy
10.Find the value of a1 in the half range cosine series of  e2 x  y in the interval
dx
 0,   . CO3
PART-B
1
11. A) Solve  dx. CO1
2 x  3x  5
2
Or
B) Solve  sin 3 x cos5 xdx. CO1
245
 2  sin 2 x 
12. A) Solve  e x   dx. CO1
 1  cos 2 x 
Or
B) Solve  e2 x x 4 dx. CO1
13. A) Evaluate L e 3t
cos2 t. CO2
Or
B) Evaluate L t 2
cos 2t. CO2
14. A) Evaluate y  x 2 CO2

Or
B) Using Laplace transforms evaluate y  3x  4 CO2

  s 2  1  
15. A) Find L1 log   . CO2
  s  12  

  
Or
B) Using convolution theorem find x  e CO2
PART-C
16. Find the Fourier expansion of x  e2 in the interval 0  x  2 and hence deduce that
1 1 1 2
       . CO3
12 22 32 6
***
246
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND FLUID MECHANICS
Subject Title Subject Code Periods /week Periods

/year/Semester
Strength of Materials
A – 402 5 75
and Fluid Mechanics
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major topic Periods Weight Part – A Part – B Part – C

No Allocate age Short Essay Essay
. d of Type Type Type
marks (3 (8 (10 Marks)
marks) Marks)
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
1. Simple stresses, strains 12 11 1 1

&Torsion
2. Geometrical Properties of 12 14 2 1
sections
3. S.F and B.M diagrams 12 14 2 1
FLUID MECHANICS
4. Properties of Fluids 12 14 2 1
5. Flow of fluids 12 07 1 1/2
6 Oil Power hydraulics & 10 06 2 -

Pneumatics
7 Hydraulic Machinery 05 04 0 1/2
Part – C Question having 10 marks 1

- 10 - -
Total: 75 80 10 05 1
Course Title: Strength of Materials and Fluid Total No. Of Periods: 75

Code: A-402 Mechanics
1.0 Understand the behaviour of materials under simple stresses and strains and
Torsion.
Course 2.0 Understand the centre of gravity,centroid,Moment of inertia& Radius of
Objectives: gyration for a given area of cross section.
3.0 Understand types of Beams,properties of fluids and concept of flow of fluids
4.0 Understand the concept of oil power Hydraulic control unit ,pneumatics and
hydraulic machinery.
247
C01 A-402.1 Explain the behaviour of materials under simple stresses, strains and Torsion
C02 A-402.2 Determine centroid, Moment of Inertia and Radius of gyration.
C03 A-402.3 Evaluate shear force and bending moments in various types of beams.
C04 A-402.4 Analyse the concept of fluid flow.
C05 A-402.5 Explain oil power-hydraulic control unit, pneumatics and Hydraulic machinery
Learning Objectives: Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Simple stresses, strain and Torsion.

1.1 Define the terms: 1. Stress, 2. strain, 3. Modulus of elasticity, 4. longitudinal strain, 5. lateral
strain, 6. Poisson’s ratio, 7. Modulus of rigidity, 8. Bulk modulus, 9. working stress, 10. factor
of safety.
1.2 Distinguish between different kinds of stresses and strains.
1.3 Explain the salient points in stress-strain curve for ductile materials (mild steel)
1.4 State Hooke’s law and limits of Proportionality.
1.5 Solve problems on relationship between simple stress and simple strain under axial
loading on uniform bars and stepped bars.
1.6 State the relationship between the elastic constants.
1.7 Solve Problems on relationship between elastic constants.
1.8 Explain the concept of torque equation.
1.9 State the assumptions made in pure torsion.
2.0 Geometrical properties of sections

2.1 Define centroid, centre of gravity, centre of mass, Moment of inertia, and radius of
gyration.
2.2 State the necessity of finding the centroid and centre of gravity for various engineering
applications.
2.3 Calculate positions of centroids for simple plane figures from first principles.
2.4 Explain the method of determining the centroid by ‘ method of moments’.
2.5 Determine the position of centroids of standard sections-T and I-sections.
2.6. Define moment of inertia and radius of gyration.
2.7. State the necessity of finding moment of inertia for various engineeringapplications.
2.8 Determine MI of standard sections by applying parallel axes and perpendicular axis theorem
2.9 Explain the term radius of gyration
3.0 SF & BM Diagram

3.1 Define different types of beams Viz., a) Cantilever beam and b) Simply supported beam
c) Overhanging beam
3.2 Define different types of loads viz., a) Point load and b) Uniformly distributed load
3.3 Discuss the termsa) Shear force and b) Bending moment
3.4 State the relationship among the rate of loading, shear force and bending moment.
3.5 Evaluate shear force and bending moments on cantilever and simply supported beam for
Simple cases of loading as Point load, uniformly distributed load.
3.6 Describe the procedures for sketching the shear force diagrams (SFD) and
248
Bending Moment diagrams (BMD)
3.7 Develop Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and Bending Moment Diagrams (BMD) for cantilever and
Simply Supported Beams.
3.8 Define Point of contra flexure
3.9 Evaluate the Shear Force, Bending Moment and Point of contra flexurefor overhanging
beams.
3.10 Develop Shear Force Diagrams (SFD) and Bending Moment Diagrams
(BMD) for overhanging beams.
4.0 Properties of fluids

4.1 Analyse between compressible and Incompressible fluids.
4.2 Discuss various properties of fluids.
4.3 Analyse Pascal law and its applications
4.4 Evaluate a). Atmospheric pressure, b).Absolute Pressure and c). Pressure head of fluid.
4.5 Discuss the working principle of pressure Gauges.
4.6 Problems on manometers.
5.0 Flow of fluids

5.1 Explain the fluid flow of steady, unsteady, laminar and turbulent flows.
5.2. Write the Equation of continuity of flow and work done in overcoming pressure.
5.3 Solve 1. Total energy equation of fluid in motion. 2. Bernoulli’s theorem (proof not necessary)
and its practical applications in venturimeter and Simple problems.
5.4 Explain the laws of fluid friction, Reynolds number, change of stream lined flow into Turbulent
flow and critical velocity.
5.5 Explain the various losses in a fluid flow. Loss of friction – Darcy’s expressions (without proof)
simple problems.
6.0 Oil power hydraulics andPneumatics

6.1 Explain the function of the power source
6.2 List the parts of the power source.
6.3 Explain the function of each part of the power source.
6.4 Classify the a). Gear pump, b). Vane pump and c). Rotary pump (other pumps not necessary).
6.5 Explain the constructional details of a). Gear pump (external and internal gear type), b).Vane
pump, c).Rotary pump and the working principle.
6.6 List the different types of actuators.
6.7 Explain the concept of pneumatics.
6.8 Write the basic symbols used in pneumatic circuit.
6.9 List Advantages and limitations of Pneumatics over hydraulic control.
7.0 Hydraulic Machinery
7.1 Explain Hydraulic press
7.2 Describe Hydraulic jack
7.3 Explain the working principle of Hydraulic lift
7.4 Discuss the working of Hydraulic crane
249
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: Course Title: STRENGTH OF MATERIALS & No. of No. of Periods:
A-402 FLUID MECHANICS COs: 5 75
Level
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO3 CO4,CO5 11 15 1 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4 CO3,CO4,CO5 20 27 2
Addressed)
PO6 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-402.1 3 2 2 2 2 2
A-402.2 3 2 1 2 2
A-402.3 3 2 1 0 1 1 2
A-402.4 3 2 1 2 3 2 2
A-402.5 3 0 2 1 1 2 2
the following:
COURSE CONTENT:
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
1.0 Simple stresses, strains&Torsion
Simple stresses and strains – strain diagram, Hooke’s law, Factor of Safety- Ultimate stress and
Design stress - Young’s modulus, ,Modulus of Rigidity - Bulk Modulus – Poisson’s ratio - Relation
among elastic constant, Torsionequation, assumptions in it.
2.0 Geometrical properties of sections
Centre of gravity of geometric figures - Square, Rectangle, Triangle and Circle - neutral axis- Moment
of Inertia- Radius of gyration- Parallel and perpendicular axis theorems- Polar moment of inertia –
Calculation of moment of inertia of I, T, C and L – sections
250
3.0 S.F. and B.M. diagram
Types of beams – Cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams -subjected to point or
concentrated and U.D. loads - S.F. and B.M. calculations and diagrams for the above cases – Bending
Moment, Shear force and load.
FLUID MECHANICS
4.0 Properties of fluids
Definition of fluid – compressible and incompressible fluids – Properties - Density, Specific weight,
viscosity, surface Tension – Pressure- Pascal’s law – Intensity of pressure – Gauge and absolute
pressure – Measurement of pressure by Piezo meter, U- tube and differential manometers.
5.0 Flow of Fluids
Types of flow- concept of Reynolds’s number – Equation of continuity of flow – Bernoulli’s equation
and practical applications – Problems on Bernoulli’s equation – Loss of head in pipes due to friction –
Darcy’s (without proof) – Hydraulic Gradient – Total energy line – Power transmitted – Condition for
maximum power transmission (without Derivation)- Simple problems.
6.0 Oil power hydraulics & Pneumatics

Basic components of an oil power hydraulic control circuit like power source, control element and
actuator, Function of each basic component- Major parts of the power source – types of oil pumps
and their constructional details-Definition of Pneumatics-Advantages and limitations of Pneumatics
over hydraulic control.
7.0 Hydraulic Machinery
Constructional details and working principle of

1. Hydraulic press
2. Hydraulic jack
3. Hydraulic lift
4. Hydraulic crane
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Strength of Materials-by R.S.Khurmi –S.Chand Publications
2. Solid Mechanics -by Pakirappa– Durga Publishing House.
3. Strength of Materials -by Ramamrutham –Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
4. Hydraulics-by R.S. Khurmi – S.Chand Publications
5. A Test book of FM & Hydraulic Machine –by Dr. R.K Bansal-LP Publishers
6. Hydraulics -by Reya and Rao – Radiant Publishing House.
7. A text book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines – R.K. Rajput-S.Chand Publications
251
A-402, STRENGTH OF MATERIALS & FLUID MECHANICS

Periods Distribution of Distribution of
htage
Sl. No Chapter Name Allocat Weightage Weightage
Alloca
ed
ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
Simple stresses and
1 12 11 3 8 1 1
strains &Torsion
Geometrical Properties
2 12 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
of sections
3 S.F and B.M diagrams 12 14 3 3 8 1 1 1

4 Properties of Fluids 12 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
5 Flow of fluids 12 07 3 04 1 ½
Oil Power hydraulics &
6 10 6 3 3 1 1
Pneumatics
7 Hydraulic Machinery 05 04 04 1/2

10 10 1
marks weightage from CO4
4 4
Total: 75 80 18 16 36 10 6 1
1/2 1/2

252
Unit Test - 1

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Simple stresses & strains R,U, 4 CO1
2 Geometrical properties of section R,U, 4 CO2
3 Shear force and Bending moment diagrams R,U, 8 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Simple stresses & strains Ap 8 CO1
5 Geometrical properties of section Ap 8 CO2
6 Shear force and Bending moment diagrams Ap 8 CO3
Unit Test - 2

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Properties of Fluids R,U 4 CO4
2 Flow of fluids R,U,Ap 4 CO4
3 Oil Power hydraulics & Pneumatics R,U 4 CO5
4 Hydraulic Machinery R,U 4 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
5 Properties of Fluids Ap 8 CO4
8 Hydraulic Machinery R,U 4 CO5
253
C20-A-402
UNIT TEST - 1
Strength of Materials and Fluid Mechanics
PART – A
1. (a) The point at which the area of a lamina is assumed to be concentrated is called----------
(b) write the relation between young’s modulus and modulus of rigidity.
(c) The Bending moment at which zero is called --------------
(d) The continuous beam is supported by-------------------
2. A mild steel bar carries an axial load of 70 kN. If the allowable tensile stress is 50 N/mm 2,
find the diameter of the rod.
3. A simply supported beam of length 5 m carries a uniformly distributed load of 2 kN /m2 over
entire span. Draw shear force and bending moment diagrams.
4. Define(a) shear force (b)Bending moment diagram (c)Reactions.
5. Find the centroid of a T – section having dimensions 50 mm X 10 mm for both the flange and
web.
PART – B
6. A steel circular bar has three segments as shown in the fig. Determine the total elongation of
the bar. Take E = 210 GPa.
(OR)
A 25 mm bar of diameter is subjected to a 50 kN pull. The measured extension over a gauge
length of 200 mm is 0.1 mm and change in diameter is 0.0035 mm. Find the Poisson’s ratio
and elastic constants.
7. Find the MI of an angle-section shown in figure below about its centroidal axes:
(OR)
An I-section made up of top flange 100 mmX20 mm and web 120 mm X 30 mm and bottom
flange 160 mm X 30 mm. Determine Ixx of the section.
254
8. Draw SF and BM diagrams for a beam shown below:
(OR)
Draw SFD and BMD for the following loaded beam:

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
1 Simple stresses and strains &Torsion R,U,Ap 3 CO1
2 Geometrical Properties of sections R,U,Ap 3 CO2
3 Geometrical Properties of sections R,U,Ap 3 CO2
4 S.F and B.M diagrams R,U,Ap 3 CO3
5 S.F and B.M diagrams R,U,Ap 3 CO3
6 Properties of Fluids R,U,Ap 3 CO4
7 Properties of Fluids R,U,Ap 3 CO4
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Simple stresses and strains &Torsion U, Ap 8 CO1
12 Geometrical Properties of sections Ap 8 CO2
13 S.F and B.M diagrams U,Ap 8 CO3
14 Properties of Fluids U,Ap 8 CO4
Flow of fluids U,Ap 4 CO4
15
Hydraulic Machinery U 4 CO5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO3 or CO4 U,Ap 10 CO3,CO4
255
C20-A-402
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND FLUID MECHANICS
PART - A
1. Define factor of safety and also write its importance.

2. Differentiate between centre of gravity and centroid.
3. State perpendicular axis theorem and write the expression.
4. List different types of loads acting on beams.
5. Draw SF and BM diagrams for a cantilever beam with a UDL throughout its length.
6. Define (a) specific weight and (b) gauge pressure.
7. What are the means of pressure measurement?
8. Write short notes on steady uniform and steady non-uniform flow.
9. State any three merits and limitations of hydraulic control system.
10. List any six essential components of hydraulic circuit.
PART – B
11. A steel rod of 25 mm diameter and 6000 mm length is subjected to an axial load of 40 KN.
Find (a) the intensity of stress (b) the strain and (c) the elongation of rod.
Take E= 2 x 105N/mm2
OR
A bar of steel is 700 mm long. For the first 2000 mm it is 25 mm in diameter. For the next
300 mm it is 20 mm in diameter and for the remaining length it is 15 mm in diameter. Find
the change in length if it is subjected to a tensile load of 100 KN. Take E = 2.1× 105 N/mm2.
12. Find the moment of inertia about centroidal axes of a channel 200 mm × 100 mm with
flange thickness 15 mm and web thickness 10mm.
OR
Find the MI of symmetrical I-section with the following dimensions about centroidal axis :
Top and bottom flanges = 160 mm × 10 mm
Web = 180 mm × 10 mm
13. A beam of length 1.2 m is simply supported at its ends and carries two point loads of 2.5 KN
and 4 KN at a distance of 0.4m and 0.8m respectively from the left support. Draw the shear
force and bending moment diagram.
OR
A cantilever beam of length 10 m carries three point loads of 4 KN, 6KN and 6 KN at a
distance of 2m, 6m and 10m respectively from the fixed end. Draw the shear force and
bending moment diagram.
256
14. Explain about U-tube Manometer with a neat sketch.
OR
Explain about Differential U-tube Manometer with a neat sketch.
15. a) Explain the working of Hydraulic lift with a neat sketch.

b) A circular pipe of 250 mm dia carries an oil of sp. Gravity 0.8 at the rate of 120 lit/sec and
under a pressure of 2KPa. Calcuate the total energy in meters at a point which is 3m
above datum line.
OR
a) Explain the working of Hydraulic Press with a neat sketch.

b) A 60 cm diameter pipe carries liquid. The mean velocity of liquid is 0.6m/s. What is the
discharge? If the diameter suddenly changes to 1.0m. What will be the mean velocity of
flow at the section?
PART – C
16. Discuss the working principles of Pressure gauges.
***
257
AUTOMOBILE CHASSIS AND BODY ENGINEERING
Course Title Course Code Periods / Week Periods / Semester
Automobile Chassis
A- 403 04 60
and Body Engineering
TIME SCHEDULE

Short Essay Essay
Sl. Periods Weightage
Chapter Name Type Type Type
No Allocated Allocated
(3 marks) (8 (10
Marks) Marks)
1 Steering System 12 14 02 01
2 Braking System 10 14 02 01
3 Suspension System 10 11 01 01
Automobile Chassis and 01 01
4 Body 10 11
Body Design and 01 01
5 Construction 10 11
6 Air Conditioning System 8 9 03 00
weight age from CO1 or CO2 or 10 01
CO3
Total 60 80 10 05 01
Course Code : A-403 Course Title: Automobile Chassis and Body Engineering
No. Of Periods : 60
Course Objectives Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. Familiarise with the knowledge of automobile chassis and its
components.
2. Understand steering, braking and suspension system.
3. Understand the various aspects of vehicle body and its structures.

Discuss the working of different steering systems and its components used in
C01 A-403.1
automobiles.
C02 A-403.2 Discuss the working of braking systems and its components used in automobiles.
Analyse the working of suspension systems and its components used in
C03 A-403.3
automobiles.
C04 A-403.4 Explain the various vehicle body parts and their construction.
C05 A-403.5 Explain working of air conditioning system of an automobile.
258
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Steering System

1.1 State any fourfunctions and requirements of the steering system.
1.2 Explain Steering Linkage for rigid axle suspension system.
1.3 ExplainSteering linkage for independent suspension system.
1.4 Explain 1. Rack and Pinion, 2. Worm and Roller, 3. Worm and Sector and 4. Re-circulating ball
type Steering gear box
1.5 Analyse Ackermann steering gear mechanism and Davis steering gear mechanism.
1.6 Explain Integral power steering system and linkage type power steering system.
1.7 Explain the reversible and irreversible steering, Under-steering, over-steering and
Turning radius.
1.8 Analyse various Steering geometry – 1.camber, 2. King-pin inclination, 3. Caster,
4. Toe-in, 5. Toe-out, 6. Combined inclination and 7. Scrub radius.
1.9 Explain Wheel alignment and adjustment of Toe-in and Toe out.
1.10 Explain 1. Collapsible steering column 2. Cornering force and 3. Self rightening torque.
2.0 Braking System:

2.1 State two functions and requirements of brakes
2.2 Classify brakes of an automobile.
2.3 Calculate the stopping time and distance – braking efficiency.
2.4 Explain the braking systems viz., mechanical and Hydraulic brakes with sketches.
2.5 Draw and explain the constructional details of master cylinder, wheel cylinder and
Tandem master cylinder.
2.6 Explain the fixed calliper and swinging calliper type of disc brakes.
2.7 Compare advantages and disadvantages of disc brakes over drum brakes.
2.8 List advantages and disadvantages of Hydraulic braking system.
2.9 Describe self-energizing brakes.
2.10 Explain 1. Vacuum servo assisted brakes 2. Airbrakes 3. Hand brakes 4.Parking brakes.
5. Wear Indicators and 6. Automatic Brake adjustment
3.0 Suspension system:

3.1 State the requirements and functions of a good suspension system.
3.2 Explain rigid axle front suspension system.
3.3 List types of independent suspension system.
3.4 Explain McPherson and double wish bone type of independent suspensionsystem.
3.5 List types of leaf springs.
3.6 Describe Leafand coil springs.
3.7 Explain the construction of leaf spring.
3.8 Explain 1. Torsion bars, 2. Telescopic type hydraulic shock absorber, and3. Stabilizer
bar.
4.0 Automobile Chassis and Body:

4.1 List types of chassis according to the fitting of engine and its main components.
259
4.2 Explain functions of the frames.
4.3 Describe car and truck frames.
4.4 Explain constructional features of chassis frames.
4.5 List loads acting on the frame.
4.6 Explain the requirement of vehicle body.
4.7 Explain the types of Automobile body of Trucks, cars and buses
4.8 Describe the requirements of a vehicle body.
4.9 Describe the various loads acting on body.
4.10 List materials commonly used for vehicle body
5.0 Body design and Construction

5.1 Explain the major dimensions of vehicle body.
5.2 Describe streamlining and aerodynamics of vehicle body.
5.3 Describe body components.
5.4 Describe interior finish of automobile body.
5.7 Describe power windows and Central locking system.
5.8 Describe body exterior finishing techniques.
5.9 Explain company painting method.
6.0 Air Conditioning System

6.1 Define Refrigeration and air conditioning.
6.2 Express unit of refrigeration in terms of ton of refrigeration.
6.3 Define coefficient of performance.
6.4 Identifycommonlyusedrefrigerants.
6.5 ExplainAirconditioningasapplicabletohumancomfort.
6.6 Definetheterms1. Humidity,2. Relativehumidity,3.Duepoint,4. DBT,5. WBT,
6. Absolute humidityratio, 7. Sensible heat and 8. Latent heat.
6.7 Explainthefunctionsof variousequipmentsuchas1. Fans,2. Supplyducts,3. Outlets,
4. Return ducts, 5. Filtersand6. Dustcollectors.
6.8 ExplainthenecessityofAutomobileAir-conditioning.
6.9 Locate thedifferentcomponentsofAirconditionerinacar.
6.10 Explain the working of 1.Air conditioning system of Automobile 2. Automatic
temperaturecontrol and 3. Compressor clutch.
260
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: A-403 Course Title: Automobile No. of COs: 5 No. of Periods:
Chassis and Body Engineering 60
POs Mapped with CO No. PO in Col. 1 Level (1,2,3) Remarks
Number Percentage
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 15 25 2 25% to 40% level 2
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO5 5 9 1 (Moderately
PO5 CO2,CO5 5 8 1 Addressed)
PO6 5% t0 25% level 1
PO7 (Low Addressed)
<5% Not Addressed
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-403.1 3 2 2 2 1 3
A-403.2 3 3 1 1 2 1 3
A-403.3 3 3 2 1 1 3
A-403.4 3 2 2 1 3
A-403.5 3 1 2 2 2 1 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENTS:
1.0 Steering System:
Requirements and functions of the vehicle steering system – Steering gear layout for rigid axle
and independent suspension system -Types of steering gears- rack and pinion, Worm and
Roller, worm and sector and recalculating ball and nut– Steering gear mechanism - Ackermann
& Davis steering gear -Power steering -Integral power steering and linkage type power
steering –Reversible and irreversible steering, understeering and oversteering-steering gear
ratio-Turning radius- Steering geometry – camber, king-pin inclination, caster, Toe-in, Toe-out,
combined inclination and scrub radius-Collapsible steering column – cornering force - self
rightening torque,adjustment of Toe-in and Toe-out
2.0 Braking System:
Functions and requirements of automobile brakes -types of brakes- stopping time – stopping
distance –braking efficiency – Mechanical and Hydraulic brakes – Layout ofhydraulic braking
systems – constructional details of internal shoe brakes (drum brakes) -master cylinder, wheel
cylinder and Tandemmaster cylinder -self energizing brakes - Disc brakes – Typesof disc brakes
261
- advantages and limitations of hydraulic over mechanical brakes, advantages ofdisc brakes
over drum brakes – power assisted brakes – vacuum servo assisted brakes – airbrakes – Hand
brakes / parking brakes-Wear Indicators and Automatic Brake adjustment.
3.0 Suspension System:

Objectives of the suspension system – requirements and functions of a good suspension
system – types ofsuspension system –rigid axle front suspension system and independent
suspension system – Types of independent suspension system - types of springs –leaf spring
and it types - coil springs – Torsion bar - Independent suspensiontypes- McPherson strut and
double wishbone type - Need of shock absorbers – construction andworking of telescopic type
shock absorber – stabilizer bar
4.0 Automobile Chassis and body:
Chassis frame –layout of the chassis and its main components-functions of the frame –types of
chassis frames –brief description of their constructional features –various loads acting on the
frame - Requirements of body - Types of body-Various car body types-truck body types – bus
body types - framed construction, unitized construction-merits and demerits of unitized
Construction - Various loads acting body – materials used for body.
5.0 Body design and construction:
Major external dimensions of body – overall width, height, length, wheel track wheelbase
andoverhangs. major internal dimensions – like head room, leg room etc. body components –
doors– types - windows- window regulating mechanism - seats – types of seats-seat
adjustmentmechanism -Other body components like, hood, boot lid, roof , firewall, spoilers,
pillars etc. - Power windows-Fabrication of body components- Interior finish – trimming,
upholstery -Exterior – body painting –types –company painting method - central locking
system.
6.0 Air Conditioning System

Introduction – Definition of refrigeration – unit of refrigeration – coefficient of performance –
methods of refrigeration - Comfort Air conditioning – definition of terms human comfort,
humidity, relative humidity, humidity ratio, DBT, WBT, sensible heat, latent heat. Fans -
supply ducts – outlets – return ducts – filters and dust collectors –heating bar – cooling coils -
Necessity – location of air conditioning components in a car – Automotive heaters –air
conditioning system of automobile - Compressor clutch.
Reference Books:
1. The motor vehicle - Newton steeds. &Garret – KENNATH NEWTON
2. Automobile engineering - G.B.S.Narang – Khanna Publishers
3. Automobile engineering - Sethi.- Mc Graw Hill Education
4. Automotive Mechanics - William crouse. – Mc Graw Hill Education.
262
A-403,Automobile Chassis and Body Engineering
Perio Weight Marks wise Distribution Question wise
Sl. Chapter ds age of Weightage Distribution of Weightage
No Name Alloc Allocat
ated ed R U Ap An R U Ap An
Steering
1 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
system
Braking
2 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
system
Suspension
3 10 11 3 8 0 1 1 0
system
Automobile
4 chassis and 10 11 3 8 0 1 1 0
body
Body design
5 and 10 11 3 8 0 1 1 0
construction
Introduction
To Air
6 8 9 3 6 0 0 1 2 0 0
Conditioning
System
marks weight age from CO1 10 10 1
or CO2 or CO3
Total: 60 80 18 12 40 10 6 4 5 1

263
Unit Test - 1

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Steering System R,U 5 CO1
2 Braking System R,U 7 CO2
3 Suspension System R,U 4 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Steering System Ap 8 CO1
5 Braking System Ap 8 CO2
6 Suspension System Ap 8 CO3
Unit Test - 2

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Automobile Chassis and Body R,U 5 CO4
2 Body Design and Construction R,U 7 CO4
3 Air Conditioning System R,U 4 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Automobile Chassis and Body Ap 8 CO4
5 Body Design and Construction Ap 8 CO4
6 Air Conditioning System Ap 8 CO5
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application ; An- Analylising
264
C20-A-403
UNIT TEST - 1
Automobile Chassis and Body Engineering
PART – A
1. a) Relay rod is used in steering linkage for vehicle with__________suspension.
b) The __________ angle is the sum of the camber and S.A.I.
c) Component of the wheel cylinder which seals the brake fluid is __________.
d) Another name for a torsion bar is _______________.
2. State the requirements of a steering system.
3. What is wear indicator?
4. List any four advantages of hydraulic braking system.
5. List the types of leaf spring.
PART – B
6. Explain Steering Linkage for rigid axle suspension system.

OR
Explain Integral power steering system with a neat sketch.
7. Explain the construction and working of master cylinder with a neat sketch.
OR
Explain swinging calliper type disc brake with a neat sketch.
8. Explain the construction of leaf spring.

OR
Explain double wish bone type of independent suspension system with a neat sketch.
265

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
5 Suspension System R,U 3 CO3
6 Automobile Chassis and Body R,U 3 CO4
7 Body Design and Construction R,U 3 CO4
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Steering System U 8 CO1
12 Braking System U 8 CO2
13 Suspension System U 8 CO3
14 Automobile Chassis and Body U 8 CO4
15 Body Design and Construction U 8 CO4
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from any of the above U 10 CO1,CO2,CO3
chapters
266
C20-A-403
AUTOMOBILE CHASSIS AND BODY ENGINEERING
PART - A
1. State any four functions and requirements of the steering system.
2. Define Kingpin Inclination.
3. State any two functions and requirements of brakes
4. List any four advantages of hydraulic braking system.
5. Name any five types of independent suspension system.
6. Write any five loads acting on the frame.
7. List any six body components of automobiles.
8. Define Refrigeration.
9. Define coefficient of performance.
10. What is a compressor clutch?
PART – B
11. Explain Ackermann steering gear mechanism with a neat sketch.

or
Explain the working of recirculating ball type steering gear box with a neat sketch.
12. Explain the working principle of tandem master cylinder with a neat sketch.
or
Explain vacuum servo assisted brakes with a neat sketch.
13. Explain McPherson independent suspension with a neat sketch.

or
Explain working principle of telescopic shock absorber with a neat sketch.
14. Explain the requirements of vehicle body.

Or
Explain construction features of chassis frames.
15. Explain company painting method.

or
Explain central locking system.
PART – C
16. Analyse the importance of steering angles with respect to safety and tyre wear.
***
267
AUTOMOBILE SERVICING AND MAINTANANCE

AUTOMOBILE
SERVICING AND A-404 04 60
MAINTENANCE
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Periods Weightage Part – A Part – B Part – C
No. Major Topic Allocat Of Marks Short Essay Essay
ed Type Type Type
(3 (8 Marks) (10 Marks)
marks)
1. Introduction 04 06 2 0
2. Servicing Equipment
10 11 1 1
3. General Procedure for Servicing
andMaintenance 12 14 2 1
4. Servicing and Maintenance of

14 14 2 1
Two and Four Wheeler
5. and four wheelers
Automobile Reconditioning
Equipment 14 14 2 1
6. Reconditioning of Diesel Fuel

InjectionSystem 6 11 1 1
Part-C Question having 10 marks

10 1
weightage from CO3/CO4/CO5
Total 60 80 10 5 1
COany of the above chapters.
Course Code:A-404COURSE TITLE: AUTOMOBILESERVICINGAND MAINTENANCE

1. Appreciate the importance of servicing and maintenance and the
equipment used for servicing
COURSE OBJECTIVES
2. Understand the procedure for servicing and maintenance of two
and four wheelers
3. Know the automobile reconditioning equipment and its operation

C01 A-404.1 Describe the importance of automobile servicing and maintenance
C02 A-404.2 Describe the servicing equipment and procedure for servicing and maintenance
C03 A-404.3 Assess servicing and maintenance of two wheelers
C04 A-404.4 Assess servicing and maintenance of four wheelers
C05 A-404.5 Recommend automobile reconditioning equipment
268
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Introduction
1.1 Drawthelayoutofthegarageandexplainabouttheactivities
1.2 Drawandexplainlayoutofservicestation
1.3 Statetheneedforspecialistrepairshop
1.4 Name the toolsusedintheservice stationandstate theirfunctions
1.5 State various factorstobeconsideredwhilelocatingaservicestation.
1.6 Differentiate betweengarage, service stationandspecialistservice station
2.0 ServicingEquipment
2.1 Explain working of car washingequipment.
2.2 Explain working of vehiclehoist.
2.3 Explainworking of Air Compressorand its applications
2.4 List different types of lubrication equipment and their function
2.5 Explain working of High-pressure lubrication equipment
3.0 GeneralProcedurefor ServicingandMaintenance

3.1 State thenecessityandgeneralprocedureofservicingandmaintenance of motor
vehicle.
3.2 Enumeratethetypesofmaintenance.
3.3 Explainperiodicmaintenance.
3.4 Statepreventivemaintenanceanditsimportance.
3.5 Enumeratethebraked downmaintenanceand itsnecessity.
3.6 Explain operation maintenance and its purpose.
3.7 State servicinganditsnecessity.
3.8 Explainthecleaningprocedure of motor vehicle components.
3.9 State the procedure of motor vehicle lubrication (greasing).
3.10 Explain the Method of lubrication of springs and Engine tune up.
4.0 Servicing and maintenance of two and four wheelers

4.1 Estimategeneralmaintenancelikeperiodiccheck-up and troubleshooting ofmotorcycle
4.2 Predicttrouble shooting of1. Cooling,2. Lubrication, 3. Fuel& 4. Ignition system.
4.3 Assesstrouble shooting of1. Clutch, 2. Gearbox and3. Differential.
5.0 Automobilereconditioningequipment
5.1 Explainworking of degreasingplant.
5.2 Examinedecarburizing methods
5.3 Explain the procedure of reboring and line boring.
5.4 Examine thenecessityofvalveseat cuttingandgrinding.
5.5 Judge the correct valve seating position and extent of grinding.
5.6 Assess thenecessityofvalve refacing.
5.7 Explain the procedure of valve lapping
5.8 Discuss servicing of valves.
5.9 Explaintheprocedureofcrankshaftgrinding &connecting rod reconditioning.
5.10 Explain working of Brake drum Lathe &Brake shoe riveting machine
6.0 Reconditioning of Diesel Fuel injection system
269
6.1 Examine Fuel injection pump Test Bench.
6.2 DiscussPhasing and Calibration of F.I.P.
6.3 Narrate various servicing and testing procedures of fuel injectors.
6.4 AssessTrouble shooting of fuel injection system.
COs – POs Mapping Format

Course Code: A-404 Course Title: Automobile Servicing No of Cos: 5 No. Of periods:
and Maintenance 60
POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO Level Remarks
with CO No in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No % >40% Level 3 (Highly Addressed)
PO1 CO1, CO2, 4 7 1 25% to 40% Level 2 (Moderately
CO3,CO4,CO5 Addressed)
PO2 10 16 1 5% to 25% Level 1
CO3,CO4,CO5 ( Low Addressed)
PO4 CO1, CO2, 25 42 3
CO3,CO4,CO5
PO5 CO3,CO4,CO5 21 35 2
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-404.1 1 2 2 1 3
A-404.2 1 2 3 2 3
A-404.3 3 3 1 1 3 1 3
A-404.4 3 3 2 1 3 2 3
A-404.5 3 3 2 1 3 1 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction
Garage- ServiceStation – Specialist repair Shop–Toolsandequipmentfor
agarageandservicestation–factorstobeconsideredwhilelocatingservice station–
layoutofatypicalgarageandservicestation
2.0 Servicing Equipment

Car Washing Equipment - Vehicle Hoist -Air Compressor - Lubrication equipment – Grease
guns – High pressure lubrication
270
3.0 GeneralProcedurefor ServicingandMaintenanceofMotorVehicles
Types ofmaintenance–Periodicmaintenance–Preventive maintenance – breakdown
maintenance – Operation maintenance – Servicing and its necessity – Cleaning of the
motor vehicle components - Greasing of motor vehicle – Lubrication of springs - Engine
tune-up
4.0 Servicing & Maintenance of Two andFour Wheelers

General maintenance - periodic check-up and the trouble shooting of
motorcycle(a)Enginesystems:Fuel system–
Generaldiagnosisandfaultrectificationinfuelsystem(Carburettedsystemandfuelinjectionsyste
m) - Lubrication system - Diagnosis and fault rectification in cooling system – Ignitionsystem
– Diagnosisandfaultrectification of BatteryIgnition –
MagnetosystemandElectronicIgnitionsystem(b)Transmissionsystem: Diagnosis and fault
rectification in clutch, gearbox,differential
5.0 AutomobileReconditioningEquipment
Degreasing plant – Procedure of degreasing – De-carbonizing methods –working
ofreconditioningequipment–cylinderreboring machine - honing machine - line boring
machine - valve seat cutting and grinding machine - valve refacing machine - valve lapping -
crank shaft grinding machine - brake drum lathe - brake shoe riveting machine – connecting
rod reconditioning
6.0 Reconditioning of Diesel Fuel Injection System

Fuelinjection pump testbench-PhasingandCalibrationofF.I.P. -Servicing and Testing of Fuel
injector - Trouble shooting of fuel injection system.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Automobile Engineering : G.B.S. Narang.-Khanna Publishers

2. Automobile Engineering Vol I & II : Dr. Kirpal Singh – Standard Publishing
3. Manual on Depot Maintenance : A.P.S.R.T.C Manuals
4. The Modern Motor Engineer Vol 1& II Arthen Judge-Caxton Publishing Company.
::
271
A-404, AUTOMOBILE SERVICING & MAINTENANCE
Perio Weig Marks wise Question wise
ds htage Distribution of Distribution of
Alloc Alloc
ated ated R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Introduction 04 06 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
2 Servicing Equipment 10 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
General Procedure for
Servicing and
3 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Maintenance of Motor
Vehicle
Servicing and Maintenance
4 of Two 14 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
and four-wheelers
Automobile reconditioning
5 equipment 14 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Reconditioning of diesel
6 fuel injection 06 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
System
10 10 1
Total: 60 80 12 18 40 10 4 6 5 1

272
UNIT TEST I
Q.No Question Bloom’s Marks COaddressed

category allocated
Part - A (16 marks)
1 Introduction R,U 4 CO 1
2 Servicing equipment R,U 3+3 CO 1
3 General procedure for servicing & maintenance R,U 3+3 CO 2
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Introduction AP 8 CO 1
5 Servicing equipment AP 8 CO 1
6 General procedure for servicing & maintenance AP 8 CO 2
UNIT TEST II

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Servicing & maintenance of 2 wheeler & 4 R,U 4 CO 3
wheeler
2 Automobile reconditioning equipment R,U 6 CO 4
3 Reconditioning of diesel fuel injection system R,U 6 CO 5
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Servicing & maintenance of 2 wheeler & 4 AP 8 CO 3
wheeler
5 Automobile reconditioning equipment AP 8 CO 4
6 Reconditioning of diesel fuel injection system AP 8 CO 5
273
C-20-A-404
UNIT TEST - 1
AUTOMOBILE SERVICING & MAINTENANCE
PART – A
1. a) Piston ring compressor is used for _________________.

b) Feeler gauge is used for _________________.
c) Spark plug spanner is used for tightening ____________.
d) ___________ is used for remove the piston ring.
2. List out hand operated grease guns.
3. Write a short note on high pressure lubrication equipment
4.Write a short note on lubrication of springs.
5. Write a shot note on greasing of motor vehicles.
PART – B
6. Draw the lay out of service station

Or
Describe the difference between garage service station and specialist repair shop
7. Explain the construction and working of vehicle hoist with a neat sketch
Or
Explain the operation of air compressor with a neat sketch.
8. Explain the operation of air compressor with a neat sketch.
Or
Explain engine tune up.
274

category allocated
Part - A (30 marks)
1 Introduction R, U 3 CO 1
2 Introduction R, U 3 CO 1
3 Servicing equipment R, U 3 CO 2
4 General procedure for servicing & R, U 3 CO 2
maintenance
5 General procedure for servicing & R, U 3 CO 2
maintenance
6 Servicing & maintenance of 2 wheeler & 4 R, U 3 CO3,CO4
wheeler
7 Servicing & maintenance of 2 wheeler & 4 R, U 3 CO 3,CO4
wheeler
8 Automobile reconditioning equipment R, U 3 CO 5
9 Automobile reconditioning equipment R, U 3 CO 5
10 Reconditioning of diesel fuel injection U 3 CO 5
system
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Servicing equipment AP 8 CO 2
12 General procedure for servicing & AP 8 CO 2
maintenance
13 Servicing & maintenance of 2 wheeler & 4 AP 8 CO 3,4
wheeler
14 Automobile reconditioning equipment AP 8 CO 5
15 Reconditioning of diesel fuel injection AP 8 CO 5
system
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from any of the above chapters AN 10 CO3, CO4, CO5
275
C-20-A-404
AUTOMOBILE SERVICING & MAINTENANCE
PART - A
1. What is a specialist repair shop?
2. Draw layout of garage.
3. List different types of hand operated grease guns.
4. What is engine tune up?
5. Write a short note on cleaning of motor vehicle.
6. State the reasons for low oil pressure in lubrication system.
7. Write the reasons for overheating of an engine.
8. What is degreasing operation?
9. What is decarbonization?
10. List different types of test carried for an injector.
PART-B
11. Describe the working of vehicle hoist with a neat sketch.
Or
Describe the following with a neat sketches
a. Car washing equipment
b. Air compressor
12. What is maintenance? Describe different types of maintenance.
Or
a. Greasing of motor vehicle
b. Lubrication of springs
13. Describe fault diagnosis and fault rectification of gear box
Or
Describe fault diagnosis and rectification of cooling system
14. Describe the working of cylinder reboring machine with a neat sketch
Or
Describe the working of line boring machine with a neat sketch
15. Describe phasing and calibration operation of FIP with a neat sketch.
Or
Describe the trouble shooting of diesel fuel injection system
PART-C
16. Describe in detail the construction and working of crank shaft grinding machine with a neat
sketch
276
SPECIALPURPOSEVEHICLES
Course Title Course Code Periods/Week Periods /Semester
Special Purpose
A-405 04 60
Vehicles
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major Topic Periods Weighta Part – A Part – B Part – C

No. Allocated ge of Short Essay Essay
marks Type Type Type
(3 (8 marks) (10 marks)
marks)
1 Introduction 06 6 2 0
2 Farm Tractors 14 18 2 1½
3 Special Featuresin Tractors 14 14 2 1
4 Earth Moving Vehicles 14 18 2 1½
Automotive
5 Emissionand Control 12 14 2 1
Systems
Part C Question having 10 marks

10 01
weight age from CO3 or CO4
TOTAL 60 80 10 5 01
Course Code: A –
Title: Special Purpose Vehicles Total No. of Periods: 60
405
1.0 Know the types of special purpose vehicles and their use.
Course Objectives: 2.0 Understand the types of form tractors and special features in tractors
3.0 Know the working of earth moving vehicles and their applications
4.0 Understand the automobile emission and control strategies/ methods

C01 A-405.1 List types of special purpose vehicles and tractors
C02 A-405.2 State the applications of special purpose vehicles and different types of tractors
C03 A-405.3 Discuss different systems tractors like PTO shaft, draw bar and hydraulic system
C04 A-405.4 Propose a suitable earth moving vehicle for given job.
C05 A-405.5 Explain automobile emission control methods/strategies
277
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Introduction
1.1 State the meaning ofSpecialPurposeVehicle
1.2 List different types of SpecialPurposeVehicles
1.3 State the applications of Special Purpose Vehicles
2.0 Farm Tractors
2.1 State the classification of tractors
2.2 Describewheeltypetractor
2.3 Describe thepurposes of 1. Utilitytractor,2. Rowcroptractor,3. Orchardtypetractor, 4.
Industrialtypetractor,5. Gardentractor,6. Rotarytiller, 7.Implementcarrier,8. Earth
movingtractors.
2.4 List tractor manufacturing companies in India
2.5 Identifytheelementsintransmissionsystem of a tractor
2.6 Explainthetransmissionsystemoftractors
2.7 Explainthedifferentialassembly and describe the different types of Differentiallocks
2.8 Explainsteeringandbrakingsystemoftractors
3.0 Special Featuresin Tractors
3.1 DefineP.T.Oshaft
3.2 Compare the driveusedforP.T.O.shafts
3.3 StatesafetyprecautionstobetakenforvariousP.T.O shaft drives
3.4 Explainbeltpulleydriveandprecautionstobetakenwhileusing beltpulley
3.5 Sketch thegenerallayoutofHydraulicsystem of a tractor
3.6 Describetheliftmechanism in a tractor
3.7 Explain thetroubleshootingofHydraulicsystem of a tractor
3.8 Compare different types of Drawbarsandhitches
3.9 Discuss the draftanddepthcontrol mechanisms
4.0 EarthMoving Vehicles
4.1 Explain the functions and specifications of different types of earth moving vehicles
4.2 Discuss the working and applicationsofBulldozers
4.3 Describe the working and applications ofDumpers and tippers.
4.4 Describe the working and applications ofShovels
4.5 Discussthe working and applications ofExcavators
4.6 Describe the working and applications ofGraders
5.0 Automotive Emissionsand Control system
5.1 List the sourcesof automotive pollutants
5.2 Explain the illeffectsofpollutants
5.3 State the classification of S.I. Engine pollutants
5.4 Explain the control measures of automotive pollution
5.5 Describe the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
5.6 Describe the working of Catalytic Converter
5.7 Describe the ELCD and PCV method of automotive emission control
5.8 State the classification of C.I. Engine emissions
5.9 Explain the emission norms.
278
Cos – Pos Mapping Format
Course Course Title: Special No of Cos: 5 No. Of periods: 60

Code: Purpose Vehicles
A-405
CO Periods Level Remarks
Addressing (1,2,3)
POs Mapped with CO No PO in Col 1
No %
Addressed)
25% to 40% Level 2
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 10 17 1
5% to 25% Level 1
PO2 CO5 14 23 1
( Low Addressed)
PO4 CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 16 27 2
PO5 CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 20 33 2
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-405.1 1
A-405.2 3 1 2 2 3 1
A-405.3 3 1 2 2 3 1
A-405.4 3 2 1 1 2 1
A-405.5 3 3 2 2 1 3 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction
Specialpurposevehicles – types–applications
2. FarmTractors
Classification oftractors–WheeltypeandTracktype–Typesof drives – types of tractors – their
purpose – Tractor manufacturing companies in India – Transmission system –Differential–
Differentiallock– types–Steeringandbrakingsystemoftractors
3. Special FeaturesinTractors
P.T.O.shaft–TypesofdriveforP.T.O.shafts–Beltpulleydrive– Precautions to
b e takenwhileusingbeltpulleyandP.T.O.shaft – Generallayoutof hydraulic system of a tractor
279
– Hydraulic Lift mechanism in a tractor – Trouble shooting of hydraulic system – Draw bar –
Types (two point linkage & three pointlinkage) – Typesofhitches - Draft and Depthcontrol
mechanism
4. EarthMovingVehicles
TypesofEarthmovers–Dumpers – BullDozers – Shovels – Excavators – Tippersandgraders–
their working and applications
5. Automotiveemissionandcontrol
Sources of automotive pollutants – effectsofpollutantsonhumanand environment –
S.IEngineemissions–CO,NOX,HC –automotive emission Controlmeasures– Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR) system – Catalytic Convertor – Evaporative Loss Control device (ELCD),
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) – C.IEngineEmissions –particulateemissions – smoke –
controlmeasures – particulatetraps – Emissionnorms–BS(Bharat) – Euro
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. FarmMachines & Equipments by C. P. Nakra – Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company
2. AutomobileEngineering by K.K.Ramalingam -Scitech
3. TruckCranes by A. Astakhov - (MIR)
4. MotorGraders by E. G. Ronioson - (MIR)
5. Constructionequipment by Y. Pokras&Tushnyakov– (MIR)

A – 405, Special Purpose Vehicles
Perio Weigh Marks wise Question wise
Sl. ds t age Distribution of Distribution of
Chapter Name
No Alloc Alloca Weight age Weight age
ated ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Introduction 06 6 3 3 1 1
2 Farm Tractors 14 18 3 3 12 1 1 1 1/2
Special Features in
3 14 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
Tractors
4 Earth Moving Vehicles 14 18 3 3 12 1 1 1 1/2
Automotive Emission
5 12 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
and Control Systems
marks weightage from CO3 or 10 10 1
CO4
Total 60 80 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1

280
Q. No Question Bloom’s Marks CO addressed

category allocated
Part - A (16 marks)
Introduction
1 (a) U 1 CO4
Farm Tractors
1 (b) R 1 CO3
Farm Tractors
1 (c) R 1 CO2
Special Featuresin Tractors
1 (d) U 1 CO3
2
Introduction R 3 CO1
Farm Tractors
3 U 3 CO2
Farm Tractors
4 R 3 CO2
5 U 3 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
Farm Tractors
6 AP/U 8 CO3
7 AP/U 8 CO3
Farm Tractors
8 AP/U 8 CO1, CO2 & CO3
281
C20-A-405
UNIT TEST - 1
SPECIALPURPOSEVEHICLES
PART – A
1. (a) Earth movers reduces cost of work (True/False)

(b) ---------is to be operated while the tractor wheel is slipping.
(c) Which tractor is used to pick the fruits from trees?
(d)P.T.O shafts are used to run the generators (True/False).
2. Name any four special purpose vehicles.
3. State the classification of tractors.
4. List any four types of tractors based on their utility.
5. State the function of draw bar.
PART – B
6. Explain transmission system of a tractor with a neat sketch.

Or
Explain working hydraulic system of tractor with a neat sketch.
7. Explain different types of PTO shaft drivers with simple sketches.

Or
Describe depth and draft control mechanism of a tractor with a neat sketch.
8. List different type of special purpose vehicles and state their applications.
Or
Explain working of mechanical differential lock with a neat sketch.
282

Part - A (30 marks)
1 Introduction U/R 3 CO1
2 Introduction U/R 3 CO1
3 Farm Tractors R 3 CO1, CO3
4 Farm Tractors R 3 CO1,CO3
5 Special features in Tractors U 3 CO3
6 Special features in Tractors R 3 CO3
7 Earth moving vehicles U/R 3 CO4
8 Earth moving vehicles U/R 3 CO4
9 Automotive emission and control system U 3 CO5
10 Automotive emission and control system U/R 3 CO5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Farm tractors AP 8 CO1 & CO2
12 Special features in tractors AP 8 CO3
13 Earth moving vehicles AP 8 CO4
14 Automotive emission and control system AP 8 CO5
15 Farm tractors & Earth moving vehicles AP 8 CO1,CO3,CO4
Part - C (10 marks)
Part – C Question having 10 marks weightage from
16 AN 10 CO3 or CO4
CO3 or CO4
283
C20-A-405
Special Purpose Vehicles
PART - A
1. State the meaning of special purpose vehicle.
2. What are the applications of special purpose vehicles?
3. List any four tractor manufacturing companies in India.
4. What is the purpose of differential lock?
5. State the safety precautions to be taken for PTO drive.
6. List any three types of drawbars and state its function.
7. State the applications of Shovel.
8. Name any four types of earthmovers.
9. Mention any four effects of Pollutants on Human beings?
10. What do you understand by BS and Euro norms?
PART – B
11. Explain the transmission system of a tractor with a neat sketch.
or
Explain Braking system of a tractor with a neat sketch.
12. Describe the lifting mechanism in a tractor with a neat sketch.

or
Explain different types of PTO shaft drives with neat sketches.
13. Explain the working and applications of Bulldozer with a neat sketch.
or
Explain the working and applications of Excavator with a neat sketch.
14. Explain the working of Exhaust Gas Recirculation system with a neat sketch.
or
Explain the working of Catalytic converter with a neat sketch.
15. (a) Explain the working of differential lock

(a) State the applications of shovel
or
(a) Write short notes on depth and draft control mechanism in tractor
(b) State the applications of dumpers
PART – C
16. Discuss application of various earth movers in Dam construction, Mining and road building.
***
284
MOTOR TRANSPORT ORGANISATION
Course Title Course Code Periods/Week Periods/ Semester
Motor Transport
A-406 04 60
Organisation
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major Topic Periods Weightag Part – A Part – B Part – C

No. Allocated e of Short Essay Essay
marks Type Type Type
(3 (8 (10
marks) marks) marks)
Organisational
1. 10 14 2 1
structure
2. Operations 12 14 2 1
Bus and Crew
3. 08 11 1 1
Scheduling
4. Transport Economics 08 6 2 - 1
5. Traffic and Fares 10 11 1 1
Legal aspects of
6. 12 14 2 1
Motor Transport
10 - -
Total: 60 80 10 5 1
Course Code : A-406 Course Title : Motor Transport Organisation No of Periods : 60

1. Understand the organisational structure and operations in a road
Course Objectives transport corporation.
2. Comprehend the bus and crew scheduling, transport economics and
fares in a road transport corporation.
3. Appreciate the legal aspects and loss assessment of motor transport.

C01 A-406.1 Discuss organisational structure in a Motor transport organisation.
A-406.2 Distinguish among various operations carried out in a Motor transport
C02
organisation.
Explain Use of computer in bus and crew scheduling in a Motor transport
C03 A-406.3
organisation.
A-406.4 Discuss transport economics in a Motor transport organisation and explain
C04
traffic and fares in a Motor transport organisation.
C05 A-406.5 Analyse the legal aspects and loss assessment of motor transport.
285
Learning Outcomes :Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Organisational Structure

1.1 State the importance of Motor Transport organisation.
1.2 Classify the Motor Transport organisation.
1.3 Differentiate between passenger transport and goods transport, public
transport and private transport.
1.4 Explain the different types of ownership of motor transport organisation.
1.5 Give the functional wings of a transport system.
1.6 State the need of training Programmes for various staff.
2.0 Operations
2.1 State the types of operation.
2.2 Distinguish city and moffussil operations.
2.3 State inter-city operations.
2.4 State the operating characteristics of a vehicle.
2.5 State the factors such as 1. Utility, 2. Capacity, 3. Dependability, 4. Safety, 5.Distance, 6.
Flexibility, 7. Speed, 8. Road condition, 8. Fuel economy, 9. Traffic interference.
2.6 Explain the term trip generation and factors to be considered for tripgeneration.
2.7 Explain about traffic data – published data.
2.8 Explain the terms 1. Duty roasters, 2. Trip sheet, way bill and log book.
3.0 Bus and Crew Scheduling
3.1 State the factors to be considered in bus scheduling.
3.2 Calculate number of buses required and vehicle utilisation.
3.3 State the factors to be considered in crew scheduling..
3.4 Use of computers in scheduling.
4.0 Transport Economics
4.1 Discuss different types of costs involved in a transport organisation.
4.2 Explain the components of vehicle operational cost.
4.3 Compute the total cost for specific type of operation.
5.0 Traffic and Fares
5.1 Explain traffic investigation.
5.2 Explain peak hour demand.
5.3 Explain types of services.
5.4 State fare and fare structure.
5.5 State the requirement of good fare system
5.6 Explain different fares for hilly areas.
5.7 State different fare methods.
5.8 Explain 1. Straight line method, 2. Taper scale method, 3. Flat fare method, 4. Concessional
Fareand 5. Luggage fare.
5.9 State the types of ticketing system
5.10 Explain hand written ticket, card ticket, pre-printed denomination ticket,
Advance booking and reservation voucher and ticketing machine.
286
6.0 Legal aspect of Motor Transport
6.1 Explain traffic signs and signals.
6.2 Explain registration procedure for the vehicle.
6.3 Explain the necessity of permit and meaning of fitness certificate.
6.4 Explain the procedure for obtaining driving license and conductor license.
6.5 Explain insurance coverage and types of insurance coverage.
6.6 Explain the motor claim settlement procedure.
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code:A- Course Title: Motor Transport No of No. Of
406 Organisation Cos:5 periods:60
Level
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO2 CO3,CO4 19 32 2 (Highly Addressed)
PO3 25% to 40% level 2
(Moderately
PO4
Addressed)
PO6 (Low Addressed)
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-406.1 3 1 1 1
A-406.2 3 1 1 2
A-406.3 3 2 2 2 3
A-406.4 3 1 1 2 2
A-406.5 3 1 2 2
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1. Organisational Structure
Importance of motor transport in present day transport system – types of motortransport –
Passenger transport and Goods transport – public transport and privatetransport – Types of
ownership – state, municipality , public and privateundertaking, functional wings of motor transport
- administrative, traffic, secretarial and engineering function, Training Programmes for management,
supervisors, workshop staff , drivers and conductors.
287
2. Operations
Types of operations – city operation – moffussil operation – inter-city (shortdistance and long
distance ) operation-operating characteristics – utility – capacity , Dependability – safety, distance,
speed – road condition- fuel economy, Traffic interference, flexibility – Trip generation- factors to be
considered in trip generation – traffic data – published data – duty roasters –Trip sheet – way bill –
log book.
3. Bus and Crew Scheduling

Basic factors to be considered in bus scheduling – Traffic demand, running time,Stand time,
maintenance time-no. of busses required – vehicle utilization - Basic factors to be considered in crew
scheduling – hours of work – Daily and weekly intervals of rest – spread over, spell of duty, overtime
allowance – handing over and taking over time –use of computer in scheduling.
4. Transport Economics
Costs – Capital costs – Maintenance costs- miscellaneous costs – components ofvehicle operational
costs – fuel, lubricants, tyres, license- operational staff –vehicle taxes – depreciation –total cost for
specific type of operation.
5. Traffic and Fares.

Elementary treatment of traffic investigation to improve services – peak hour demand –types of
services – fare and fare structure – requirements of good fare system – different fares for hilly areas
– Fare methods – Straight line method, taper scale method, flat rate, concessional fare, luggage fare
– ticketing system types – hand written ticket, card ticket, pre-printed denomination ticket, advance
and reservation booking ticket – ticket machine.
6. Legal aspects of Motor Transport

Traffic signs and signals – procedure for registering of a vehicle- necessity of permits –fitness
certificate – procedure for issue of driving license and conductor license – Motor insurance – basic
principle – scope and coverage of different policies – claimsettlements.
Reference Books
1. Motor vehicle act of state and central Govt.
2. Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning- L.R. Kadiyali Khanna
3. Motor vehicle workshop ORGANISATION and administration - Bernard Chandler Oxford
4. Bus Operation and Bus Crew Scheduling - CIRT. (Pune)
5. An introduction to Transport Engineering - Wilton W Hey W W.
6. Elements of Transport - R.J. EatanCIRT. (Pune)
288
A-406, MOTOR TRANSPORT ORGANISATION

Perio
htag Distribution of Distribution of
ds
Sl. No Chapter Name e Weightage Weightage
Alloc
Alloc
ated
1 Organisational structure 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
2 Operations 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
3 Bus and crew scheduling 8 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
4 Transport economics 8 06 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 Traffic and fares 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Legal aspects of motor

6 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
transport

10 - - - 10 - - - 1
weightage from CO1 or CO4 or CO5
Total: 60 80 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1

289
UNIT TEST I

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Organisational structure RU 5 CO 1
2 Operations RU 7 CO 2
3 Bus and Crew scheduling RU 4 CO 3
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Organisational structure AP 8 CO 1
5 Operations AP 8 CO 2
6 Bus and Crew scheduling AP 8 CO 3
UNIT TEST II

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Transport economics RU 4 CO 4
2 Traffic and fares RU 5 CO 4
3 Legal aspects of motor transport RU 7 CO 5
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Transport economics AP 8 CO 4
5 Traffic and fares AP 8 CO 4
6 Legal aspects of motor transport AP 8 CO 5
290
C20-A-406
UNIT TEST - 1
Motor Transport Organisation
PART – A
Instructions: 1st Question having 4 one mark questions, and remaining 4 Questions carry 3 marks
each.(4 X 1+ 4 X 3 = 16 Marks)
1.a) Service to public is the main moto of _________________ type oforganisation.

b) _________________department is carrying out maintenance and repair of
vehicles.
c) ____________ data is the actual data given as per the schedule time table.
d) The maximum duty hours of drivers ___________ as per MV act.
2. Classify the motor transport organisation.
3. Differentiate city and moffussil operations.
4. Write the use of computers in scheduling.
5. Write about duty roasters.
PART – B
6. Explain any four types of ownerships of motor transport organisations.

or
Explain the necessity of training programmes to various staff in transport organisation.
7. State the vehicle operating characterstics and explain any three of them.
Or
Explain the factors to be considered for trip generation.
8. Explain the factors to be considered in bus scheduling.
Or
Explain the factors to be considered in crew scheduling.
291

PART A ( 30 MARKS)
1 Organisational structure R 3 CO 1
2 Organisational structure R 3 CO 1
3 Operations R 3 CO 2
4 Operations R 3 CO 2
5 Bus and Crew scheduling R 3 CO 3
6 Transport economics R 3 CO 4
7 Transport economics R 3 CO 4
8 Traffic and fares R 3 CO 4
9 Legal aspects of motor transport R 3 CO 5
10 Legal aspects of motor transport R 3 CO 5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Organisational structure AP 8 CO 1
12 Operations AP 8 CO 2
13 Bus and Crew scheduling AP 8 CO 3
14 Traffic and fares AP 8 CO 4
15 Legal aspects of motor transport AP 8 CO 5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO1 or CO4 or CO5 AN 10 CO 1, CO4,
CO5
292
C20-A-406
MOTOR TRANSPORT ORGANISATION
PART - A
1. State the importance of Motor Transport Organization.
2. Classify the Motor Transport Organization.
3. Define (a) City operation (b) Suburban Operation.
4. Write about Duty roasters.
5. State the use of computers in scheduling.
6. Define cost and state the different types of costs.
7. List any six elements of fixed costs.
8. List any three requirements of good fare system.
9. Give the classification of traffic signs.
10. What is the requirement of permit for transport vehicles?
PART – B
11. Explain any four types of ownerships of a motor transport organization.
or
Explain the Secretarial and Engineering functions of the transport organization.
12. Explain the factors to be considered for Trip Generation.

Or
State the Vehicle Operating Characteristics and explain three of them.
13. Explain the factors to be considered in bus scheduling.

Or
Explain the factors to be considered in Crew scheduling.
14. Explain the various types of ticketing systems.

or
Explain the various types of Fare methods.
15. Explain the procedure of Motor Claim Settlements.

or
Explain the procedure of obtaining Driving license and Conductor license.
PART – C
16. Recommend theprocedure of motor claim settlement for own damage claim.
***
293
AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING DRAWING

Automobile
A–407 06 90
Engineering Drawing
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Weightage of Total

Part - A Part - B
N MajorTopics Periods marks Marks
o
Automobile Engine
1 24 15 2 10
Components
1 10
Chassis and Transmission
2 24 15 2 10
Components
3 Cams and Cam profiles 12 10 0 1 10
Automobile Parts assembly
4 30 20 0 1 20
drawings
Total 90 60 4 3 60
Course Code : A-407 Course Title : Automobile Engineering Drawing No. of Periods : 90
Course Objectives Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to visualise and
draw various views of the given automobile components.

C01 A-407.1 Apply the drawing methods to various automobile engine components
Able to Visualise and draw various views of a chassis and transmission system
C02 A-407.2
components.
C03 A-407.3 Able to draw cam profile for a given follower motion.
Acquire the knowledge and draw assembly of different engineering
C04 A-407.4
components.
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Draw to scale various views like front view, side view, top view and Sectional Views of
AutomobileEngineComponents
1.1 Pistons for diesel and petrol.
1.2 Connecting rods for diesel and petrol engines.
1.3 Cylinder Head for 2 stroke petrol engine.
1.4Crank shaft.
1.5 Cam shaft.
1.6Valves.
1.7 Rocker Arms.
1.8 Spark plugs.
294
Chassis and transmission components
2.1 Linkage Bracket
2.2 Chassis Bracket
2.3 Gear box selector fork
2.4 Engine Mount
2.5 Bell crank lever
3.0 Cams and followers

3.1 Draw types of cams.
3.2 Draw the cam profile for the following motion of the follower
(i) Uniform velocity
(ii) Uniform Acceleration and retardation
(iii) Simple harmonic motion.
3.3 Draw cam profiles in above three cases for a knife edge follower, roller follower and flat
follower. (inline cams)
4.0 Draw the automobile parts of the assembly drawing.
4.1 Screw Jack
4.2 Master Cylinder
4.3 Wheel cylinder
CO-PO MAPPING
Course Course Title: No of Cos: 4 No. Of periods:90

Code: Automobile
A-407 Engineering
Drawing
POs Mapped with CO CO Periods Addressing PO in Level Remarks
No Col 1 (1,2,3)
Addressed)
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 15 17 1 25% to 40% Level 2
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 15 17 1 5% to 25% Level 1
( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO4 10 11 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 30 33 2
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 20 22 1
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-407.1 3 2 3 3 3 1
A-407.2 3 2 3 3 3 1
A-407.3 3 3 3 3 3 1
A-407.4 3 3 2 3 3 3
295
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
AutomobileEngineComponents
1.1 Pistons for diesel and petrol.
1.2 Connecting rods for diesel and petrol engines.
1.3 Cylinder Head for 2 stroke petrol engine.
1.4 Crank shaft.
1.5 Cam shaft.
1.6Valves.
1.7 Rocker Arms.
1.8 Spark plugs.
Chassis and transmission components
2.1 Linkage Bracket
2.2 Chassis Bracket
2.3 Gear box selector fork
2.4 Engine Mount
2.5 Bell crank lever
3.0 Cams and followers

3.1 Draw types of cams.
3.2 Draw the cam profile for the following motion of the follower
(i) Uniform velocity
(ii) Uniform Acceleration and retardation
(iii) Simple harmonic motion.
3.3 Draw cam profiles in above three cases for a knife edge follower, roller follower and flat
follower. (inline cams)
4.0 Draw the automobile parts of the assembly drawing.

4.1 Screw Jack
4.2 Master Cylinder
4.3 Wheel cylinder
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Automobile Engineering Drawing by R.B Guptha -Satya Prakash Publications

2. Machine Drawing by N.D Bhat –Charotar Publishing House Pvt Ltd.
296
A-407, AUTOMOBILEENGINEERINGDRAWING
Time:3hours] [TotalMarks:60
PART—A 5×4=20
Instructions:(1) Answerallquestions.
(2) Eachquestioncarriesfivemarks.
(3) Drawproportionatesketcheschoosingyourown dimensions.
1. Draw a freehand sketch of engine valve and label the parts.

2. Draw a freehand sketch of spark plug and label the parts.
3. Fig. 1 shows the Chassis bracket. Draw the elevation in the direction of A :
Figure :1
4. Fig. 2 shows the isometric view of a Engine Mount. Draw its front view in the direction of A:
Figure :2 – Engine Mount
297
PART—B 40M
Instruction: (1) Answerallquestions.
(2) Usefirstangleprojection.
(3) Assumeanymissingdimensions suitably.
5. Draw the sectional elevation in full for the following Petrol Engine connecting rod
0shown in in figure 3. 10M
Figure: 3 - Petrol Engine connecting rod
6. Draw cam profile for a roller follower moving with uniformacceleration and retardation
under the following conditions: 10 M
(a) Out stroke during 150° of cam rotation
(b) Dwell for the next 30° of cam rotation
(c) Return stroke during 150° of cam rotation
(d) Dwell for the remaining of the cam rotation
The stroke of the follower is 25 mm and the minimum radius of thecam is 30 mm. The
diameter of the roller is 16 mm. The line ofaction of follower is through the cam centre.
298
7. Fig. 4 shows the details of screw jack. Assemble all the parts and draw 15+5 M
the following views of the screw jack:
(a) Elevation—right-half in section
(b) Plan
Fig. 4 Screw Jack
299
Communication Skills
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks
Code Periods/Week Periods for FA for SA
A-408 Communication 3 45 40 60
Skills
No of COs Mapped
S. No. Unit Title Periods
Listening Skills
1 6 CO1
Introducing Oneself
2 3 CO1, CO2, CO3
Short Presentation (JAM)

3 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
Group Discussion
4 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
Preparing Resume with Cover Letter

5 3 CO3
Interview Skills
6 9 CO1, CO2, CO3
Presentation Skills
7 9 CO1, CO2
Work place Etiquette

8 3 CO1, CO2
Total Periods 45
To comprehend the features of communication needed for professional

success and display the use of these competently
Course Objectives To present ideas, opinions in group discussions and presentations on
topics of general and technical interest
To prepare for job selection processes

CO1 Interacts in academic and social situations by comprehending what is listened to when
others speak.
CO2 Demonstrates effective English communication skills while presenting ideas, opinions
in group discussions and presentations on topics of general and technical interest.
CO3 Exhibits workplace etiquette relevant in classroom situations for easy adaptation in
professional setting in the future.
300
CO-PO Matrix
with CO No. Column 1 Mapping
Number Percentage % (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly applicable for Communication Skills Course however
PO2 interactive activities that use content from science and technology
PO3 relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited
PO4 for communication in the Course.
PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3
CO3
PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 60% 16 -59%: Level 2
CO3
PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 15% Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7
CO 1   
CO 2   
CO3   
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters of
communication in the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource (Vocabulary)
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy
301
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Good/ Competent / Fair /Poor' for Communication
LEVEL OF Fluency and Coherence Lexical Resource Grammatical Range
COMPETENCE (Vocabulary) and Accuracy
Speaks at length without Uses vocabulary Uses a range of complex

noticeable effort or loss of resources flexibly structures with some
coherence. May during discussion. flexibility.
demonstrate language- Uses paraphrase
related hesitation at times, effectively.
GOOD or some repetition and/or
(9-10*) self-correction.
Uses a range of connectives Uses some less Mostly produces error-
and discourse markers with common vocabulary free sentences.
some flexibility. Articulates and shows some
and adapts to near awareness of style
naturalization. and collocation
Is willing to speak at length, Has enough Uses a mix of simple and
though may lose coherence vocabulary to discuss complex structures, but
at times due to occasional topics and make with limited flexibility.
repetition, self-correction or meaning clear in spite
COMPETENT hesitation. of inappropriacies.
(6-8) Uses a range of connectives Generally paraphrases May make mistakes with
and discourse markers but successfully complex structures
not always appropriately. though these rarely
cause comprehension
problems.
Tries to maintain a flow of Manages to talk about Produces only basic
speech but t uses repetition, familiar and sentence forms,
self correction and/or slow unfamiliar topics but however, errors persist.
speech to keep going. uses vocabulary with
limited flexibility.
FAIR Produces simple speech Attempts to use Uses a limited range of
(3-5) fluently, but more complex paraphrase but with more complex
communication causes mixed success. structures, but these
fluency problems. usually contain errors
and may cause some
comprehension
problems
Speaks with long pauses. Uses simple Attempts basic sentence
Pauses lengthy before most vocabulary to convey forms but with limited
words. Merely imitates personal information success, or relies on
apparently memorized
utterances
POOR Has limited ability to link Has insufficient Makes numerous errors
(0 *-2) simple sentences vocabulary for less except in memorized
familiar topics expressions
Gives only simple responses Only produces Struggles to produce
and is frequently unable to isolated words or basic sentence forms
convey basic message memorized
utterances
302
s*10 marks to be awarded only if competence level shows flawless expertise in English.
*0 marks to be awarded when student shows incoherence and gives irrelevant responses.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.
Periods Marks Marks allotment for each Student Mapping

Questions based
Allocat Wise in the Rubric* of COs
S. on Course
ed for Distributio Poor Fair Competent Good
No. Outcomes
practic n of 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
al work Weightage
1 Describe the given CO 2
6 10
object in a minute
CO1, CO 2
Exchange ideas/
views in a group
discussion on
2 6 10
________ issue
(academic, technical
or social )
Present your ideas CO1, CO2,

/opinions on the CO 3
3 given issue/ topic 9 10
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1, CO2,
4 imaginary work- 6 10 CO 3
place situation
Individual CO1, CO2,
interaction with the CO 3
Examiner duly
submitting Resume (
5 12 10
Facing the Interview)
– Introducing
oneself and
answering questions
*Listen to and CO1, CO2,
comprehend any CO 3
6 audio 6 10
communication/
content
TOTAL 45 60
303
*Listen to and comprehend the given audio content: Giving the Students time to read the questions
(Fill in the Blanks, Select from Alternatives, True or False, Table fill, etc.) in chunks before listening to
audio inputs also played in chunks.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for Formative Assessment:
Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters in
the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy
Periods Marks Marks allotment for each Student Mapping

Questions based
Allocat Wise in the Rubric* of COs
S. on Course
ed for Distributio Poor Fair Competent Good
No. Outcomes
practic n of 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
al work Weightage
Formative Assessment - 1
Describe the given 10
1 3
object in a minute CO 2
Exchange ideas/
views in a group CO1, CO 2
2
discussion on
6 10
________ issue
(academic, technical
or social )
Present your ideas
/opinions on the CO1, CO2,
3
given issue/ topic 6 10 CO 3
(individual to an
audience)
4 *Listen to and
comprehend any CO1, CO2,
audio 3 10 CO 3
communication/
content
Total 18 40
Formative Assessment -2
Present your ideas
1 /opinions on the
given issue/ topic 10
3
(individual to an
audience)
Role play an CO1, CO2,
2 imaginary work- CO 3
6 10
place situation
304
Individual
interaction with the
Examiner duly CO1, CO2,
3 submitting Resume ( CO 3
15 10
Facing the Interview)
– Introducing
oneself and
answering questions
*Listen to and
comprehend any CO1, CO2,
4 audio 10 CO 3
3
communication/
content
TOTAL 27 40
Learning Outcomes
1. Listening Skills:
1.1 Listen to audio content (dialogues, interactions, speeches, short presentations) and
answer questions based on them
1.2 Infer meanings of words / phrases / sentences / after listening to audio content as
mentioned above
2. Introducing Oneself:
2.1 Prepare a grid different aspects for presentation about a person / oneself
2.2 Present a 1 or 2 minute introduction of oneself for an audience
3. Short Presentation:
3.1 Define an object
3.2 Describe an object, phenomenon, event, people
3.3 Speak on a topic randomly chosen
4. Group Discussion:
4.1 Practice Group Discussion. Techniques
4.2 Participate in group discussions
5. Resume Writing and Cover Letter:
5.1 Prepare resumes of different sorts – one’s own and others.
5.2 Write an effective cover letter that goes with a resume
6. Interview Skills:
6.1 Prepare a good Curriculum Vitae
6.2 Exhibit acceptable (Greeting, Thanking, Answering questions with confidence)
7. Presentation Skills:
7.1 Prepare Posters, Charts, PPT’s on issue of general and technical interest
7.2 Present one’s ideas before an audience with confidence using audio visual aids and
answer questions that are raised.
8. Workplace Etiquette:
8.1 Show positive attitude & adaptability / appropriate body language to suit the work
place
8.2 Display basic of etiquette like politeness, good manners.
305
AUTOMOBILE SERVICING AND RE-CONDITIONING LABORATORY
and Re-conditioning A – 409 06 90
Laboratory
TIME SCHEDULE
SL.NO. MAJOR TOPIC PERIODS
Servicing and Maintenance of various systems of an 45

1
Automobile
2 Re-conditioning: 45
Demonstration of driving skills ( One batch will go for Four
3 Wheeler driving practice and another batch will do the
experiment)
TOTAL 90
Course Code: A – 409

COURSE: AUTOMOBILE SERVICING AND RE-CONDITIONING LABORATORY

1. Understand servicing and maintenance of various systems of an
COURSE OBJECTIVES automobile
2. Know the procedure of reconditioning of various vehicle
3. Know the procedure of washing of a vehicle

Perform the servicing of a give engine and Troubleshoot and rectify the
C01 A-409.1 problems in fuel supply system, braking system, suspension system, steering
system, cooling and lubrication system of an engine
Perform the greasing of rear axle hubs and decarbonising operation to a given
C02 A-409.2
engine
Perform cylinder reboring, cylinder honing, valve refacing, valve seat cutting,
C03 A-409.3 grinding, lapping, line boring, crankshaft grinding, brake drum turning and brake
shoe riveting on a given engine
Perform phasing and calibration operation to a given fuel injection pump and
C04 A-409.4
perform the servicing and testing of Petrol and diesel fuel Injectors.
Perform water washing of a given vehicle and Demonstrate driving skills on four
C05 A-409.5
wheeler vehicle
306
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Servicing and Maintenance of various systems of an Automobile:
1. Engine
2. Fuel system of Petrol engine
3. Fuel system of Diesel engine
4. Braking system
5. Suspension system
6. Steering system
7. Cooling system
8. Lubrication system
9. Rear axle hubs
Re-conditioning:
1. Decarburising
2. CylinderRe-boring
3. CylinderHoning.
4 Valve seat cutting, grinding, re-facing and lapping.
5. Line boring
6. Crank shaft grinding
7. Brake drum turning
8. Brake shoe riveting
9. Fuel injection pump testing - phasing and calibration
10. Fuel injector - servicing and testing both Petrol and Diesel
11. Water washing practice
12. DrivingpracticeonMotorvehicle
COs – POs Mapping Format

Course Code:A-409 Course Title: Automobile No of No. of
Servicing and Re- Cos:5 periods:90
Conditioning Laboratory
CO Periods
Level
Addressing PO in Col Remarks
(1,2,3)
POs Mapped with CO No. 1
No %
Addressed)
25% to 40% Level 2
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 25 28 2
5% to 25% Level 1
PO2 CO1,CO3,CO4 10 11 1
( Low Addressed)
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 15 17 1
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 15 17 1
PO6 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 15 16 1
PO7
307
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-409.1 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 3
A-409.2 2 1 3 1 3 3
A-409.3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
A-409.4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
A-409.5 2 3 3 3
the following:
Competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student
Sl. Title of the Key competencies expected Competencies expected

No Experiment
Engine Tuning:
 Adjustment of Carburettor  Understand and doing idling

 Adjustment of MPFI using adjustment
1 Petrol Engine Servicing computer assistance  Understand and doing the
 Fuel consumption test timingadjustment
 Fault finding and
rectification of different
troubles
Engine Tuning:
 Adjustment of FIP and
Governor  Understand and doing idling
 Adjustment of CRDI using adjustment
2 Diesel Engine Servicing computer assistance  Understand and doing the
 Fuel consumption test timingadjustment
rectification of different
troubles
 Understand theconstruction
 Identify the tools andgauges and working
required  Understand thesteering
Automobile steering  dismantling&assembling systems used in different
3
systems  Fault finding and rectification types of vehicles
of different troubles  Understand the grades of oils
 Servicing&adjustments. used in automobile steering
systems.
308
S.No. Name Of The Experiment Key Competencies Competencies
 Identify the tools  Understand the construction
andgauges required and working of braking
 dismantling and system
Braking systems of assembling  Understand thebraking
4  Fault finding and systems used in different
automobiles
rectificationof different types of vehicles
troubles  Understand thegrades of oils
 Servicing&adjustments used in automobile braking
 Brake bleeding. systems
 identify the tools
andGauges required
 Understand the construction
 dismantling
andworking
Independent suspension andassembling
5  Understand the independent
systems of automobiles  Fault finding and
suspensionsystems
rectification ofdifferent
 Used in different types of
troubles
vehicles.
 Servicing and
adjustments
 Identify the tools and
gauges required
 Understand the
 dismantling
Rigid axle suspension system constructionand working
6 andassembling
of automobiles  Understand the rigid
axlesuspension systems used
rectification of
in different types of vehicles.
differenttroubles
 Servicing & adjustments
309
S.No. Name Of The Key Competencies Competencies
Experiment
 State various decarbonising
methods.
 Identify suitable tools
 Wet the components with
kerosene / diesel
 Scrape Engine components
1 Decarburising  Scrape Engine components
with hand scraper
with hand scraper
 Use hand scraper
unidirectionally
 Wipe the components with
cotton cloth
 Identify the tools required for
 Measure ovality and taper dismantling Engine.
using dial bore gauge  Measure ovality and taper
 Align the cylinder block with using dial bore gauge
2 Cylinder Re-boring cylinder reboring machine.  Calculate depth of cut.
 Check roundness of cylinder  Align the cylinder block with
. cylinder reboring machine.
 Select suitable speed , feed
and depth of cut
 Identify the tools required.
 Select the required hone.
 Align the cylinder block with  Select suitable speed , feed
honing machine. and depth of cut
3 Cylinder Honing
 Obtain smooth and criss-  Align the cylinder block with
cross hatch pattern. honing machine.
 Obtain smooth and criss-cross
hatch pattern.
 State different grades of emery
paste.
 Check the condition of valve
 Check the condition of valve
face and seat.
Valve seat cutting, face and seat.
 Align valve with grinding
4 grinding, refacing  Apply lapping compound on
wheel.
and lapping valve seat and valve face.
 Check concentricity for valve
 Align valve with grinding wheel.
face and seat.
 Check concentricity for valve
face and seat.
310
Experiment
 Align Main journal with line  Measure diameter of journal
boring machine. using micrometre.
 Check for correctness of  Align Main journal with line
Line - boring bearing journals. boring machine.
5
and depth of cut
 Check for correctness of
bearing journals.
 Align crank pin with grinding  Measure diameter of crank pin
wheel. using micrometre
 Check roundness of crank  Calculate depth of cut.
pin  Align crank pin with grinding
6 Crank shaft grinding
wheel.
and depth of cut
 Check correctness.
 Check ovality and taper.  Identify tools required for
 Mount brake drum with removing brake drum.
suitable cones.  Measure diameter of brake
 Check roundness of brake drum for ovality and taper
7 Brake drum turning drum  Calculate depth of cut.
 Mount brake drum with
suitable cones
and depth of cut
 Identify the tools required for
 Align new brake liner on
removing lining from brake
brake shoe
shoe &remove the old rivets
 Fix brake liner to brake shoe
8 Brake shoe riveting  Align new brake liner on brake
using rivets
shoe
 Check the thickness of liner.
 Fix brake liner to brake shoe
using rivets
 State various specialized tools
 Mount F.I.P. on test bench. required.
 Adjust controls of test  Identify controls of F.I.P. test
Fuel injection pump
bench. bench.
9 testing - phasing and
 Compare fuel output with  Mount F.I.P. on test bench.
calibration.
manufacturer specifications.  Adjust controls of test bench.
 Check fuel injection timing  Compare fuel output with
manufacturer specifications.
311
 Check fuel injection timing
Experiment
 Identify components of injector
testing equipment.
 check injector opening
Fuel injector -  Check injector opening pressure
10 servicing and testing pressure, fuel leak-off and  Adjust the injector opening
(Petrol & Diesel) spray pattern. pressure as per manufacturers’
specification.
 Check for fuel leak-off and
spray pattern.
 Operate hydraulic hoist for  Identify the components of
lifting the vehicle. washing equipment.
Water washing
11  Set suitable water pressure.
practice
 Clean with suitable liquid.
 Blow high pressure air.
 Identify foot controls of a four
wheeler.
 State the purpose of foot
controls.
 Foot controls
 Operate foot controls
Driving practice on  Driving controls
12 efficiently.
light motor vehicle  Operate all controls
 Operate steering controls.
simultaneously.
 Operate gear shift lever.
 Identify various accessories.
 Operate all controls
simultaneously.
312
HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC CONTROLS LABORATORY
Hydraulic and
Pneumatic Controls
A – 410 03 45
Laboratory
TIME SCHEDULE
Periods
S.No Experiment Name
allocated
1 Venturimeter 12
2 Orifice meter 12
3 Identification of Oil Power Hydraulic controls. 09
4 Identification of Pneumatic Power controls. 12
Total 45
Course Title : HYDRAULIC ANDPNEUMATIC CONTROLS LABORATORY

1.0 Determination of coefficient of discharge by using 1. Orifice meter 2.
Venturimeter
Course Objectives
2.0 Familiarise with the experimental setup for hydraulic and pneumatic
actuators and motors
3.0 Familiarise with the experimental setup for hydraulic and pneumatic
flow control valve, pressure control valve and direction control valve.

A-410.1 Determination of coefficient of discharge by using 1. Orifice metre 2. Venturi
C01
metre
A-410.2 Operate the experimental setup for the hydraulic and pneumatic actuators and
C02
take required observations
Operate the experimental setup for the hydraulic and pneumatic motors and
C03 A-410.3
take required observations
A-410.4 Operate the experimental setup for the hydraulic and pneumatic direction
C04
control valve and take required observations
A-410.5 Operate the experimental setup for the hydraulic and pneumatic flow control
C05
valve and pressure control valve by taking required observations
313
Learning outcomes
1.0 Practice the determination of Cd of Venturimeter

1.1 State the practical applications of venturimeter.
1.2 Record the manometric head readings from U-tube manometer
1.3 Record the time taken for collecting discharge by varying the discharge
1.4 Calculate the areas of the pipe and throat of the given venturimeter
1.4 Calculate coefficient of discharge of venturimeter.
2.0 Practice the determination of Cd of Orificemeter
2.1 State the practical applications of Orificemeter.
2.2 Record the manometric head readings from U-tube manometer
2.3 Record the time taken for collecting discharge by varying the discharge
2.4 Calculate the areas of the pipe and throat of the given Orificemeter
2.5 Calculate coefficient of discharge of Orificemeter.
3.0Identification of Oil Power Hydraulic controls
3.1 Identify the principal components of oilpower hydraulic circuits.
3.2 Understand the principleof working of hydraulicactuator.
3.3 Understand the principleof working of hydraulicmotor.
3.4 Understand the principleof working of direction control valve.
3.5 Understand the principleof working of flow control valve.
3.6Understand the principleof working of pressure control valve.
4.0 Identification of Pneumatic Power controls
4.1 Identify the principal components of pneumatic power circuits.
4.2 Understand theprinciple of working of pneumatic actuator.
4.3 Understand theprinciple of working of pneumatic motor.
4.4 Understand theprinciple of working of direction control valve.
4.5 Understand theprinciple of working of flow control valve.
4.6Understand the principle of working of pressure control valve.
314
CO-PO Mapping
Course Course Title : HYDRAULIC No of Cos:5 No. Of periods:45
Code:A- ANDPNEUMATIC
410 CONTROLS LABORATORY
addressing PO (1,2,3)
in Col 1
Addressed)
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 15 33 2 25% to 40% Level 2
( Low Addressed)
PO4 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 10 22 1
PO5 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 10 23 1
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-410.1 3 1 3 3 3
A-410.2 3 3 3 2 3
A-410.3 3 3 3 2 3
A-410.4 3 3 3 2 3
A-410.5 3 3 3 2 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1. Determination of Coefficient of discharge of Venturi meter.
2. Determination of Coefficient of discharge of Orifice meter
3. Hands on experience on oil power hydraulic trainer.
4. Hands on experience on pneumatic power trainer.
315
V SEMESTER
316
V Semester
Instruction

Subject Name of the Total
Practi Durati End Total
Code Subject Periods Session
cal/T on Exam
Theory al
utoria (hours Mark Mark
Marks s
l ) s
THEORY:
A-501 Industrial 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Management
Design of 75
Machine 5 - 3 20 80 100
A-502
Elements
Production 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
A-503
Technology
Modern Trends in 75
A-504 Automobile 5 - 3 20 80 100
Engineering
A-505 Electric Vehicles 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
PRACTICALS:
A-506 CAD Practice - 6 90 3 40 60 100
IC Engine Testing
and Vehicle - 6 90 3 40 60 100
A-507
Diagnosing Lab
A-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100
A-509
TOTAL 24 18 360+270 - 260 640 900
317
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Period/Semester

Industrial
Management A-501 5 75
TIME SCHEDULE
Part –
Part – B C
Perio Part – A
Sl. Essay Essay
ds Weightage Short
No. Major Topic Type Type
Alloc of marks Type
(8 (10
ated (3 marks)
marks) marks
)
1. Principles and functions of 10 6 2 -
Industrial Management
2. Organisation structure & 16 14 2 1
Organisational behaviour
3. Production Management 10 11 1 1
Materials Management,
4. Maintenance management 16 14 2 1
& Industrial Safety
5 Entrepreneurship 12 14 2 1
Development
6 Trends in Management 11 11 1 1
Part – C Question having 10 marks weightage 1
10 - -
from CO3 or CO5
Total: 75 80 10 5 1
Course Code : A-501 Course Title : Industrial Management No of Periods : 75

1. Understand the principles and functions of industrial management,
organisation structure and organisational behaviour.
Course Objectives 2. Understand the production management, materials management,
maintenance management and industrial safety.
3. Understand the entrepreneurship development and trends in
management.
318
C01 A-501.1 Explain principles and functions of industrial management.
C02 A-501.2 Explain organisation structure and organisational behaviour.
C03 A-501.3 Solve problems on CPM and PERT techniques in production management.
A-501.4 Explain 1. Materials management, 2. Maintenance management and 3. Industrial
C04
safety.
A-501.5 Discuss 1. Entrepreneurship, 2. Demand and market survey 3. Feasibility study
C05
report and 4. Trends in management.
Learning outcomes:Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Principles and functions of Industrial Management

1.1 Define industry, commerce (Trade) and business.
1.2 State the need for management.
1.3 Explain functions of Management.
1.4 Explain the principles of scientific management.
1.5 Differentiate between management and administration.
1.6 Explain the nature of management as a profession
1.7 Differentiate between supervisory, middle and Top level management
1.8 Explain the importance of managerial skills (1. Technical, 2. Human and 3. Conceptual)
2.0 Organisation Structure & organisational behaviour

2.1 Explain the philosophy and organisation structure of an industry.
2.2 Discuss the 1. Line, 2. Staffand 3. Functional organisations
2.3 List the differences between Delegation and decentralization
2.4 Describe the communication process
2.5 State motivational theories and Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs.
2.6 List different leadership models.
2.7 Explain the process of 1. Recruitment, 2. Selection, 3.Training and 4. development
2.8 Explain types of business ownerships
2.9 State the objectives of Employee participation
2.10 Explain the meaning of corporate social responsibilities
3.0 Production management

3.1 State the factors of Plant Location
3.2 List the objectives of plant Layout
3.3 State the principles of plant Layouts
3.4 Explain the types of plant Layouts
3.5 State different types of production.
3.6 Explain the stages of Production, planning and control.
3.7 List the basic methods forecasting
3.8 Explain 1. Routing methods, 2. Scheduling methods and 3.Dispatching.
3.9 Explain Break Even Analysis and project scheduling.
3.10 Solve problems on CPM and PERT networks.
319
4.0 Materials Management, Maintenance management & Industrial Safety
4.1 Explain functions of materials management in Industry and an expression for
inventory control.
4.2 Explain 1. ABC analysis 2. Safety stock and 3. reorder level
4.3 State an expression for economic ordering quantity and functions of Stores
Management.
4.4 List out 1. Stores equipment,2. Stores records and3. Purchase records.
4.5 Explain 1. types of store layouts 2. general purchasing procedures, 3. tendering, 3. E-
tendering and 4. E-procurement procedures
4.6 Explain the 1. Bin card, 2. Cardex method and 3. applications of RFID
4.7 Explain maintenance management, preventive maintenance and scheduled
maintenance in industry.
4.8 Differentiate between scheduled and preventive maintenance
4.9 Explain the importance of safety at Work place and important provisions
related to safety.
4.10 Explain hazard and accidentin the Industry and causes of accidents(direct and
indirect causes of accidents).
5.0 Entrepreneurship Development.

5.1 Define the word entrepreneur.
5.2 Explain the requirements of an entrepreneur.
5.3 Explain the role of entrepreneurs in promoting Small Scale Industries.
5.4 Describe the details of self-employment schemes.
5.5 List the financial assistance programmes andorganisations that help an entrepreneur
5.6 Explain the concept of 1. Make in India, 2. Zero defect and 3.Zero effect
5.7 State the importance for start-ups
5.8 Explain the demand surveys and market survey
5.9 Prepare feasibility studyreport.
6.0 Trends in Management:

6.1 Explain the concept of quality
6.2 List the quality systems and elements of quality systems.
6.3 State the principles of quality Assurance.
6.4 Explain 1. Management information system (MIS), 2. basic concepts of TQM and
3. Pillars of TQM.
6.5 List the evolution of ISO standards and beneficiaries of ISO 9000.
6.6 Explain 1. ISO standards, 2. ISO 9000 series of quality systems 3. Concepts of ISO
14000 and 4. overview of PDCA cycle
6.7 State the 1. principles of 5S for good housekeeping 2. Kaizen strategy 3. IoT 4. key
features of IoT, 5. components of IoT and 6. advantages and disadvantages of IoT.
7. IoT Applications
6.8 Explain 1. Smart Energy,2. Smart Transportation, 3. Mobility, 4. Smart Factory and
5. Smart Manufacturing
320
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: A-501 Course Title: Industrial No of No. Of
Management Cos:5 periods:75
POs Mapped with CO No CO Periods Addressing Level Remarks
PO in Col 1 (1,2,3)
Addressed)
( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO3, CO5 10 13 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO3 10 13 1
PO5 CO3,CO5 15 20 1
PO6 CO1,CO5 15 20 1
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-501.1 3 1 1 2 2 3
A-501.2 3 3 1 2 3
A-501.3 3 3 2 1 1 3
A-501.4 2 3 3
A-501.5 2 2 3 1 3 3
the following:
Course Content
1. Principles and Functions of Industrial Management
Introduction: Industry, Commerce and Business; Definition of management; Functions of
management - Principles of scientific management by F.W.Taylor, Principles of Management by
Henry Fayol; Administration and management; levels of management; managerial skills;
2. Organisation Structure andOrganisational Behaviour

Organizing - Process of Organizing; Line, Staff and functional Organizations, Decentralization
and Delegation, Communication, Motivational Theories; Leadership Models; Human resources
development; recruitment selection training and development, Forms of Business ownerships:
Types – Sole proprietorship, Partnership, Joint Stock Companies, Cooperative Organization;
objectives of employee participation, Corporate Social responsibility;
321
3. Production Management
Definition and importance; objectives and principles of plant layout, Plant location and types of
layout; Types of production -job, batch and mass; production Planning and Control: basic
methods of forecasting, routing, scheduling, dispatching and follow up; Break even analysis;
Project scheduling; Application of CPM and PERT techniques; simple numerical problems;
4. Materials Management, Maintenance Management & Industrial Safety

Materials in industry, Importance and functions of materials management, Basic inventory
control model, ABC Analysis, Safety stock, re-order level, Economic ordering quantity, Stores
Management: Stores layout, stores equipment, Stores records, purchasing procedures,
tendering, e-tendering, e-procurement; purchase records, Bin card, Cardex, RFID Applications
in materials management, Objectives and importance of maintenance management, Different
types of maintenance, Schedules of preventive maintenance, scheduled maintenance
Advantages of preventive maintenance, Advantages of scheduled maintenance, Importance of
Safety at work places; industrial hazards; Causes of accidents
5. Entrepreneurship Development.
Definition of Entrepreneur; Requirements of entrepreneur, Role of
Entrepreneur;Entrepreneurial Development, Details of self-employment scheme, financial
assistant programmes, organisations that help entrepreneurs (SSI, MSME, DIC, Banks) Concept
of Make In India, ZERO defect, Zero Effect, Concept of Start-up Company, Demand surveyand
Market survey; Preparation of Feasibility study reports
6. Trends in Management:
Concept of quality, quality systems and its terms, principles of quality assurance, Introduction
to Management Information System (MIS); Total Quality Management (TQM), ISO 9000 series ,
ISO-14000, Deming's PDCA Cycle (Plan, Do, Check and Action). 5S Principles, Kaizen Strategy
(continuous improvement), Overview of IoT - Define IoT, key features of IoT, components of
IoT : hardware, software, technology and protocols, advantages and disadvantages of IoT - IoT
Applications - Smart Energy, Smart Transportation and Mobility, Smart Factory and Smart
Manufacturing.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Industrial Engineering and Management O.P KhannaDhanpat rai -2019

2. Production Management Buffa. Abe books
3. Engineering Economics and Management Science T.R. Banga & S.C. Sharma
Khanna Publishers
4. Production and Operations Management S.N. CharyTata McGraw Hill 5th Edition
322
A-501, INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Sl Peri Weig Marks wise Question wise
. ods htage Distribution of Distribution of
Chapter Name Weightage Weightage
N Alloc Alloca
o ated ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
Principles and functions of
1. 10 6 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
Industrial Management
Organisation structure &

2. 16 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
3. Production Management 10 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
Materials Management,
4. Maintenance management & 16 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Industrial Safety
5 Entrepreneurship Development 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
6 Trends in Management 11 11 0 3 8 0 0 1 1 0
10 - - - 10 - - - 1
1
Total: 75 80 18 40 10 4 6 5 1
2


Part - A (16 marks)
1 (a) Principles and functions of Industrial Management U 1 CO1
1 (b) Organisation structure & Organisational behaviour R 1 CO2
1 (c) Production Management R 1 CO3
1 (d) Production Management R 1 CO3
2 Principles and functions of Industrial Management U 3 CO1
3 Organisation structure & Organisational behaviour U 3 CO2
4 Production Management R 3 CO3
5 Production Management U 3 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
6 Principles and functions of Industrial Management AP 8 CO1
7 Organisation structure & Organisational behaviour AP 8 CO2
8 Production Management AN 8 CO3
C20-A-501
323
UNIT TEST - 1
PART – A
1. (a) Management and Administration are different (True/False)

(b) ------------is the theory of Motivation.
(c) Expand the term PERT.
(d) Name any one type of Production method.
2. Define Industry and Commerce.
3. State the objectives of employee participation.
4. List the basic methods forecasting.
5. Write the objectives of plant Layout.
PART – B
6. Explain the principles of scientific management

or
Explain the importance of managerial skills
7. Discuss the line and staff organisations.
or
Explain the process of recruitment and selection.
8. Explain the stages of Production, planning and control.
or
In the table below a list of activities are there and their duration is given:
Activity 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-5 3-6 3-7 4-6 5-7 6-8 7-8
Duration 5 3 2 6 7 8 5 2 8 1
a) Prepare the network.

b) Identify critical path.
c) Calculate the project completion.
324

Part - A (30 marks)
Principles and functions of Industrial
1 U 3 CO1
Management
2 U 3 CO1
Management
3 Organisation structure & Organisational behaviour R 3 CO2
4 Organisation structure & Organisational behaviour R 3 CO2
5 Production Management U/R 3 CO3
Materials Management, Maintenance
6 R 3 CO4
management & Industrial Safety
Materials Management, Maintenance
7 U/R 3 CO4
8 Entrepreneurship Development U 3 CO5
9 Entrepreneurship Development R 3 CO5
10 Trends in Management U/R 3 CO5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Management/ Organisation structure & AP 8 CO1 & CO2
12 Production Management AP 8 CO3
Materials Management, Maintenance AP
13 8 CO4
14 Entrepreneurship Development AP 8 CO5
15 Trends in Management AP 8 CO5
Part - C (10 marks)
Part – C Question having 10 marks weightage from
16 AN 10 CO3 or CO5
CO3 or CO5
325
C20-A-501
PART - A
1. Define industry, commerce and business.
2. Differentiate administration and management.
3. Write the advantages of line and staff organization.
4. What are the types of leadership?
5. Define the following
(a) Routing(b) Scheduling
6. State the importance of materials management
7. Differentiate between bincard and cardex method
8. Define the term Entrepreneur.
9. List the financial assistance programs.
10. State the benefits of ISO 9000 series.
PART – B
11. Define motivation. Explain Maslow’s need hierarchy theory.
or
Explain the types of business ownerships.
12. Explain the stages of production, planning and control
or
In the table below a list of activities are there and their duration is given:
Activity 1-2 1-3 1-4 2-5 3-6 3-7 4-6 5-7 6-7 6-8 7-8
Duration 6 4 1 5 8 9 3 1 0 8 2
(a) Prepare the network.

(b) Identify critical path.
(c) Calculate the project completion.
13. Explain ABC analysis with the help of neat sketch.

or
Explain the types of maintenance management in industry.
14. Explain the details of self-employment schemes.
or
Explain the role of entrepreneurs in promoting small scale industries.
15. Explain the TQM in detail.
or
Explain 5-S principles related to quality.
PART – C
16. Select an industry or Enterprise based on feasibility study report in your area.
***
326
DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS
Design of Machine
Elements A-502 05 75
TIME SCHEDULE

No. Allocated of marks Short Essay Essay
Type Type Type
(3 (8 marks) (10 marks)
1 Bolts and Nuts 8 6 marks)
2 0
2 Shafts 15 14 2 1
3 Keys and Couplings 12 11 1 1
4 Balancing and Vibrations 8 6 2 0

5 Governors and Flywheels 14 14 2 1
Design of Automobile
6 18 19 1 2
Components
Part C Question having 10 marks weightage
10 01
from CO3 or CO5
TOTAL 75 80 10 5 01
Course Code: A – 502 Title: Design of Machine Elements Total No. of Periods: 75
1. Know the functions of bolts, nuts, shafts, keys, couplings and
automobile components
Course Objectives: 2. Understand the design of bolts, nuts, shafts, keys, couplings and
automobile components
3. Understand the concept of balancing and vibrations
4. Solve problems on design of above components

C01 A-502.1 Explain functions of 1. Bolts and nuts, 2. Shafts, 3. Keys and couplings
C02 A-502.2 Describe the concept of balancing and vibrations
C03 A-502.3 Design 1. Bolts, 2. Nuts, 3. Shafts, 4. Keys and couplings with given parameters.
C04 A-502.4 Design governors and flywheel with the given data.
C05 A-502.5 Design automobile components with given parameters.
327
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1.0 Bolts and Nuts
1.1 List design factors considered while designing a machine component
1.2 Describe the terminology used in bolts and nuts – its proportions
1.3 State the effect of forces involved when the nut is tightened and the maximum load
that a set of bolt and nut can take up before its failure
1.4 Calculate the dimensions of bolt and nut by using empirical formula
2.0 Shafts
2.1 Explain the concept of torsion and torque equation
2.2 State the assumptions made in pure torsion
2.3 Describe the functions of a shaft and various materials used in the manufacture of
shaft with respect to its adaptability
2.4 Calculate the diameters of hollow and solid shafts
2.5 Calculate the diameters of hollow &solids shafts considering both strength & stiffness
3.0 Keys and Couplings

3.1 State the function of keys and splines with the help of neat sketches andmaterial
used for them
3.2 Explain the types of keys
3.3 Design rectangular sunk key considering its failure against shear and crushing using
empirical proportions
3.4 Describe the proportions of a spline for various applications
3.5 State the function of a coupling
3.6 Calculate the proportions of muff coupling and flange coupling
3.7 Calculate the proportions of muff coupling, C.I. flange coupling considering the
failure of the bolts against shear for a given torque by using the empirical formula
4.0 Balancing and Vibrations

4.1 State the types of balancing
4.2 Explain the balancing of masses
4.3 Solve problems on balancing of masses
4.3 Describe vibrations
4.4 Describe types of vibrations
5.0 Governors and Flywheel

5.1 State the types of Governors and their applications
5.2 Describe the working of Porter Governor
5.3 Solve problems on design of porter governor
5.4 State the purpose and applications of flywheel
5.5 Differentiate between the governor and flywheel.
5.6 Explain the turning moment diagram
5.7 Solve problems on design of flywheel
328
6.0 Design of Automobile components
6.1 Design of Engine Cylinder
6.2 Design of Piston
6.3 Design of Connecting Rod
6.4 Design of Crankshaft
6.5 Design of Engine Valve
6.6 Design of Clutch
6.7 Design of Brake
6.8 Design of Universal coupling
Cos – Pos Mapping Format

Course Course Title: Design of No of Cos: 5 No. Of periods: 75
Code: Machine Elements
A-502
CO Periods Level Remarks
Addressing PO in (1,2,3)
POs Mapped with CO No Col 1
No %
Addressed)
18 25% to 40% Level 2
PO1 CO1, CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 24 1
25 5% to 25% Level 1
( Low Addressed)
18
PO3 CO2,CO3,CO4 24 1 <5% Not Addressed
6
PO4 CO3,CO4,CO5 8 1
8
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-502.1 3 2 2 2 3
A-502.2 3 1 2 3
A-502.3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3
A-502.4 1 3 2 1 3 3 3
A-502.5 2 3 2 1 3 3 3
the following:
329
COURSE CONTENT
1. Bolts and Nuts
Definition of terms: pitch, lead, lead angle, thread angle, nominal diameter, crest , root, depth
of thread etc, related to bolts and nuts – classification of bolts – loads acting on the bolts and
the consequent failures – calculation of various dimensions of a bolt and nut for a given
diameter using empirical proportions
2. Shafts
Theory of pure torsion – Torque (torsion) equation (No Derivation) – assumptions made in
pure torsion - Function of shafts – materials used – Power transmitted by solid and hollow
circular shafts – Design of solid and hollow shafts subjected to (i) shear stress and angle of
twist and (ii) shear stress and bending stress
3. Keys and couplings

Functions of keys and splines - materials used - nature of failure of a key - Types of keys -
saddle, flat round and sunk keys - Design of a rectangular sunk key – proportions of splines -
Functions of coupling – classification of couplings – problems on design of muff coupling and
flange coupling
4. Balancing and Vibrations

Necessity of balancing - types of balancing - balancing of single revolving mass – balancing
of number of rotating masses – balancing of reciprocating masses – simple problems on
balancing of masses – Vibrations – types of vibrations
5. Governors and Fly wheels

Function of Governor – types – applications - working of porter Governor - simple problems
on design of Porter Governor - Function of Flywheel - types – purpose and applications -
Comparison between governors and flywheels - turning moment diagram - design of flywheel
–problems on design of flywheel
6. Design of Automobile Components

Design Engine Cylinder – Piston - Connecting Rod – Crankshaft - Engine Valve – Clutch – Brake
- Universal coupling
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Auto Design R.B Guptha 2016 Satya Prakash publications

2. Machine Design R.S Khurmi 2005 S. Chand publications
330
A – 502, Design of Machine Elements
Weight Marks wise Question wise

Sl. age Distribution of Distribution of
Periods
Chapter Name Allocated
Allocated
No Weight age Weight age
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Bolts and Nuts 8 6 3 3 1 1
2 Shafts 15 14 3 11 1 2
3 Keys and Couplings 12 11 3 8 1 1
Balancing and
4 8 6 3 3 1 1
Vibrations
Governors and
5 14 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
Flywheels
Design of
6 Automobile 18 19 3 16 1 2
Components
Part – C Question having
10 marks weightage from 10 10 1
any of the above chapters
Total 75 80 15 12 53 5 3 8


Part - A (16 marks)
1 (a) Bolts and Nuts U 1 CO1
1 (b) Shafts R 1 CO1
1 (c) Keys and Couplings R 1 CO1
1 (d) Bolts and Nuts R 1 CO1
2 Bolts and Nuts U 3 CO1
3 Shafts U 3 CO1
4 Keys and Couplings U/R 3 CO1
5 Keys and Couplings U 3 CO1
Part - B (24 marks)
6 Bolts and Nuts AN 8 CO3
7 Shafts AN 8 CO3
8 Keys and Couplings AN 8 CO3
331
C20-A-502
UNIT TEST - 1
PART – A
1. (a) Lead and pitch are same (True/False)

(b) Material used for shafts is.............
(c) Name any one type of coupling.
(d) The angle of square thread is..............
2. List different types of forces acting on the bolts.
3. State the assumptions made in pure torsion.
4. List any four types of sunk keys.
5. State the function of a coupling.
PART – B Marks: 24
Answer all questions. Each question carries 8 marks.
6. (a) List any six design factors considered while designing a machine component.
(b) Draw Hexagonal Headed bolt with proportionate dimensions.
Or
Draw Hexagonal headed nut with proportionate dimensions and write the empirical
relations.
7. A solid shaft transmitting 500 KW at 300 rpm is made of steel whose maximum shear stress
is 50 N/mm2. The maximum torque transmitted by the shaft exceeds the mean torque
transmitted by the shaft exceeds the mean torque by 25%. The angle of twist should not
exceed 10 on a length of 20 diameter of the shaft. Determine diameter of the shaft. Take
modulus of rigidity as 0.7X105N/mm2.
Or
A hollow steel shaft transmits 600 KW at 500 rpm. The maximum shear stress is 60 N/mm 2.
Find the outside and inside diameter of the shaft, if the outside diameter is twice that of the
inside diameter, assuming that the maximum torque is 20% greater than the mean torque.
8. Design a muff coupling which is used to connect two steel shafts transmitting 50 KW at 500
rpm. Design a shaft and muff from strength points of view and other dimensions by
empirical formulae. Shear stress for muff and shaft are 15 N/mm2 and 30 N/mm2
respectively. Assume that the maximum torque to be 20% more than the average torque.
Or
Design a C.I flange coupling to connect two shafts in order to transmit 8 KW at 600 rpm.
Permissible shear stress for shafts, bolts and keys material is 33 N/mm2. Permissible crushing
stress for bolt and key material is 50 N/mm2 and permissible shear stress for C.I is 12
N/mm2.
332

Part - A (30 marks)
1 Bolts and Nuts U 3 CO1
2 Bolts and Nuts U/R 3 CO1
3 Shafts R 3 CO1
4 Shafts AN 3 CO3
5 Keys and Couplings R 3 CO1
6 Balancing and Vibrations U 3 CO2
7 Balancing and Vibrations R 3 CO2
8 Governors and Flywheels U/R 3 CO4
9 Governors and Flywheels U/R 3 CO5
10 Design of Automobile Components U 3 CO5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Shafts AN 8 CO3
12 Keys and Couplings AN 8 CO3
13 Governors and Flywheels AN 8 CO4
14 Design of Automobile Components AN 8 CO5
15 Design of Automobile Components AN 8 CO5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 AN 10
from any of the above chapters
333
C20-A-502
PART - A
1. Differentiate between Pitch and Lead.
2. What are the various loads acting on the bolt?
3. State the function of shaft and materials used for manufacturing of shafts.
4. The angle of twist of steel shaft is to be 20 over a length of 1.2m. The shear stress induced is
65N/ mm2. Find the diameter of the shaft. Take G=0.8X105 N/ mm2.
5. List any four types of saddle Keys.
6. State the necessity of balancing.
7. Mention any three types of vibrations.
8. Define the terms (a) Isochronism (b) Hunting.
9. Write differences between Governor and Flywheel.
10. Draw a neat sketch of connecting rod and label the parts.
PART – B
11. A solid shaft transmitting 200KW at 200rpm is made of steel whose maximum shear stress is
60N/mm2. The maximum torque transmitted by the shaft exceeds the mean torque transmitted
by the shaft exceeds the mean torque by 20%. The angle of twist should not exceed 10 on a
length of 20 diameter of the shaft. Determine diameter of the shaft. Take modulus of rigidity as
0.9X105N/mm2.
or
A hollow steel shaft transmits 500KW at 450rpm. The maximum shear stress is 60N/mm2. Find
the outside and inside diameter of the shaft, if the outside diameter is twice that of the inside
diameter, assuming that the maximum torque is 25% greater than the mean torque.
12. Design a muff coupling which is used to connect two steel shafts transmitting 40KW at 350 rpm.
Design a shaft and muff from strength points of view and other dimensions by empirical
formulae. Shear stress for muff and shaft are 15N/mm2 and 30 N/mm2 respectively. Assume
that the maximum torque to be 25% more than the average torque.
or
Design a C.I flange coupling to connect two shafts in order to transmit 7.5KW at 720rpm.
Permissible shear stress for shafts, bolts and keys material is 33 N/mm2. Permissible crushing
stress for bolt and key material is 60 N/mm2 and permissible shear stress for C.I is 15 N/mm2.
334
13. A Porter governor has equal arms of 250mm long and pivoted on the vertical axis. The mass of
each ball is 2.7kg and the mass of central load is 13.3kg. The radius of rotation of balls is 150
mm when the governor is about to lift and 200mm when the governor is at maximum speed.
Determine the maximum and minimum speeds and the range of speeds.
or
A solid disc of flywheel 0.4m diameter and 100mm thick is made from cast iron of density
7X103Kg/m3. Determine (a) MI of flywheel (b) KE at 1000 rev/min.
14. Find the diameter of a connecting rod of 2500mm long for a slow speed diesel engine if the
diameter of cylinder is 1000mm with a stroke length of 1250mm and maximum combustion
pressure of 4.9 N/mm2. Factor of safety is 20, Take E=2.06X105 N/mm2.
or
The valve of IC engine is 60mm in diameter and is subjected to a maximum gas pressure of 4
N/mm2. The safe bending stress in valve is 45 N/mm2. Determine (a) Thickness of valve head
(b) Diameter of valve rod (c) Maximum lift of the valve (d) Width of seat (e) Diameter of valve
head.
15. Design a piston for I.C engine using the given data. The diameter of cylinder bore is 300mm and
the maximum expansion pressure is 5N/mm2. The piston may have 4 compression rings and an
oil ring.
Permissible stress for piston = 27 N/mm2
Permissible stress for piston ring = 80 N/mm2
Permissible bearing pressure for pin = 15 N/mm2
Radial wall pressure = 0.04 N/mm2
Permissible bending stress in pin = 85 N/mm2
Permissible pressure on piston barrel = 0.4 N/mm2
or
In a universal joint a driving shaft transmits a torque of 5000Nm to the driven shaft. Determine
the suitable diameter for the shaft and the pin. Assume safe shear stress for shaft and pin is 50
N/mm2 and 25 N/mm2 respectively.
PART – C
16. A cast iron flange coupling connects two shafts to transmit 8KW power at 700rpm. The
permissible stress are as follows:
Shear stress for shafts and bolt material =30 N/mm2
Crushing stress for the bolt material = 60 N/mm2
Permissible shear stress for cast iron = 15 N/mm2
Design hub dimension, thickness of flange, diameter of bolts and number of bolts.
335
PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY

PRODUCTION
A–503 5 75
TECHNOLOGY
TIME SCHEDULE

No. Allocate of marks Short Essay Essay
d Type Type Type
(3 marks) (8 marks) (10 marks)
1. Milling 9 11 1 1
2. Gear Making 08 06 2 0
3. Grinding 16 11 1 1
4. Surface Finishing Process 06 06 2 0
5. Jigs and Fixtures 08 08 0 1
6. Processing of Plastics 08 11 1 1
7. Modern Machining process 12 11 1 1
Flexible Manufacturing
8. 08 06 2 0
System and Robotics
Part-C Question having 10 marks weightage
10 - 1
from CO3 or CO5
Total: 75 80 10 5 1
Course Cod: A–503COURSE TITLE : PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGYNo. of Periods : 75

1. Know the milling , gear making and grinding procedure
COURSE
2. Understand surface finishing process, jigs and fixtures and processing of
OBJECTIVES
plastics
3. Appreciate modern machining process and flexible manufacturing process

C01 A-503.1 Describe 1. Milling machine, 2.Gear making and 3. Surface finishing process
C02 A-503.2 Explain jigs and fixtures
C03 A-503.3 Discuss various types of grinding machines
C04 A-503.4 Describe processing of plastics
Discuss 1. Modern machining process, 2.Flexible manufacturing systems and 3.
C05 A-503.5
Robotics
336
LEARNING OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Milling
1.1 Explain the working of milling machine
1.2 Describe milling machines
1.3 Explain the constructional details and functions of each part of milling machine
1.4 State the specifications of milling machine
1.5 Describe the milling operations
1.6 List indexing methods
1.7 Explain simple and direct indexing methods
2.0 Gear Making
2.1 State methods of gear making.
2.2 Describe gear shaping and gear hobbing.
2.3 Explain different gear finishing methods
3.0 Grinding
3.1 List types of abrasives
3.2 Describe the abrasive bonds and bonding process
3.3 Describe the designation /marking system of grinding wheel
3.4 State the factors for selection of grinding wheel
3.5 List methods of grinding
3.6 State the specifications and classification of grinding machines
3.7 Describe the construction and working of grinding machines
4.0 Surface Finishing Process
4.1 List different types of surface finishing process
4.2 Describe the principle of Electroplating with a sketch
4.3 Explain the principle of 1. Hot dipping processes, 2. Galvanizing, 3.Tin coating4.
Parkerizing and 5. Anodizing
5.0 Jigs and Fixtures
5.1 State the advantages of jigs and fixtures
5.2 Differentiate between jigs and fixtures
5.3 Describe different types of drill jigs
5.4 Describe welding and milling fixtures
6.0 Processing of Plastics
6.1 State the advantages and limitations of plastics as engineering materials
6.2 Differentiate between thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics
6.3 Describe the principle of making plastic products by 1. Compression moulding,
2. Transfer moulding, 3. Blow moulding and 4. Injection moulding
6.4 Explain the principle of extruding and calendaring
7.0 Modern Machining Process
7.1 Differentiate between conventional and non –conventional machining
7.2 State the relative advantages and limitations of non-conventional Machining
7.3 Explain the principle of USM with a neat sketch
7.4 Describe Electric Discharge Machining with a neat sketch
7.5 Explain the principle of open loop NC machine and closed loop NC Machine
7.6 State elements of NC machine and the advantages and limitations of NC machining
system over the Conventional machining system
7.7 Explain the NC system 1. Point to point positioning control system, 2. Straight cut
positioning system and 3.Continuous path system
7.8 Explain the principle of computerized numerical control (CNC) machining
7.9 Differentiate between NC and CNC machines
7.10 Explain direct numerical control (DNC) system
337
8.0 Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS) and Robotics
8.1 Define FMS
8.2 Describe the major elements and features of FMS.
8.3 List components of FMS
8.4 State the advantages and limitations of FMS
8.5 State the concept of ‘Robot’
8.6 Describe the basic elements common to all robots
8.7 State typical applications of Robots in Industry
8.8 List the advantages and applications of Robots in production and Manufacturing
COs – POs Mapping

Course Code: A-503 Course Title: Production Technology No of No. Of
Cos: 5 periods: 75
Addressing PO in Col (1,2,3)
1
Addressed)
PO2 CO1,CO5 10 13 1 5% to 25% Level 1
( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO1,CO5 10 14 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO1,CO3, CO5 10 13 1
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 20 27 2
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-503.1 3 1 1 1 2 1 3
A-503.2 3 2 1 3 1
A-503.3 3 2 2 1 3
A-503.4 2 1 1 3 1
A-503.5 3 2 3 2 2 2 3 1
the following:
338
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Milling
Types of milling machines-plain, universal, vertical milling machines –constructional details
– specifications - Milling operations – Indexing – direct and simple indexing
2.0 Gear Making
Methods of manufacture of Gears: Casting, moulding, stamping, coining, extruding, rolling -
Gear shaping – description of Gear shaper – Gear hobbing –description of Gear hob – Gear
finishing processes
3.0 Grinding
Types of Abrasives – natural &artificial - types of bonds for making grinding wheel – vitrified,
silicate, Shellac, rubber, Bakelite - Factors effecting the selection of grinding wheel – kind of
abrasives: Grain size, grade, strength, bond, structure of grain spacing-bond materials -
Standard marking systems - letters and numbers – sequence of marking system, grades of
letters. Classification of Grinding machines - constructional details and working principles of
cylindrical, surface, tool & cutter and center-less grinding machines – advantages and
limitations – balancing, dressing and truing of grinding wheels
4.0 Surface Finishing Process
Electroplating–basic principles – Plating metals – applications - Hot dipping: Galvanizing, Tin
coating, Parkerizing and Anodizing - Metal spraying: Wire process –powder process - Types of
Organic coatings: oil base paints, lacquer base points, varnish, enamels, bituminous paints
and Rubber base coatings
5.0 Jigs and Fixtures
Advantages of using jigs and fixtures in mass production, Work location – types of locators
and clamps - Drill jig - welding and milling fixtures
6.0 Processing of Plastics
Advantages and limitations of plastics over other engineering Materials - differences between
thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics - Processing of plastics: (a) Compression moulding
(b) Transfer moulding (c) Extruding (d) Blow moulding (e) Injection moulding (f) calendaring
7.0 Modern Machining Process
Introduction – differences between conventional/traditional machining and non-
conventional or non-traditional or modern machining processes - Ultrasonic machining
(USM): Principles, Description of equipment – applications – advantages and limitations -
Electrical discharge machining (EDM): Principle, description of equipment, application –
advantages and limitations - Chemical machining - Basic concepts of NC machines –
comparison with operator controlled Machine - Types of NC system – open loop and closed
loop - Classification of NC systems – Point to point positioning control system, straight cut
positioning system, continuous path or contouring system - Programming for NC machines –
absolute programming, incremental programming – Advantages and limitations of NC system
over the conventional system - Basic concept of CNC and DNC systems.
8.0 Flexible Manufacturing System (FMS) and Robotics
Introduction, definition of FMS-Features of FMS–Advantages and limitations of FMS-
Concept of Robot – Basic elements: Manipulator, controller, end – effectors, sensors, energy
source and their functions - Basic construction of Robot and types of Robots.
339
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. A Course on workshop Technology (Vol. II) –Raghuvamshi 2015 Dhanpath Rai & Co.
2. Elements of workshop Technology (vol. II)-HazraChowdhary 2010 MP Publishers
3. Production Technology -R. K. Jain and S. C. Gupta 2016 Khanna Publishers
4. Work shop Technology (Vol. III)-Chapman 2001 CBS publishers
5. Manufacturing Process -B. M. L. Begeman 1969 John Willy and Sons
6. Workshop Technology (Vol. II)-Gupta and Kaushisk
7. Production Technology -H.M.T. 2017 Mc Hill Publishers
8. Automation production system and-Michel P Groover 2016 Pearson Publishers
9. CAD / CAM – Michel P. Groover 2010 Pearson Publishers

A-503, PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY
Weig Question wise
Periods Marks wise Distribution
htage Distribution of
Sl. No Chapter Name Allocat of Weightage
Alloc Weightage
ed
1 Milling 09 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
2 Gear Making 08 06 0 3 3 0 0 1 1 0
3 Grinding 16 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Surface
4 06 06 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
FinishingProcess
5 Jigs and fixtures 08 08 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0
Processing of
6 08 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Plastics
Modern
7 12 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
machining process
Flexible
8 manufacturing 08 06 3 3 0 0 1 1 0 0
system & Robotics
and CO5
Total: 75 80 18 9 43 10 6 3 6 1

340
UNIT TEST I

category allocated
Part - A (16 marks)
1 MILLING R,U 4 CO 1
2 GEAR MAKING R,U 3 CO 1
3 GRINDING R,U 3+3 CO 3
4 SURFACE FINISHING PROCESS R,U 3 CO 1
Part - B (24 marks)
5 MILLING Ap 8 CO 1
6 GEAR MAKING Ap 4 CO 1
7 GRINDING Ap 8 CO 3
8 SURFACE FINISHING PROCESS Ap 4 CO1
UNIT TEST II

Part - A (16 marks)
1 JIGS & FIXTURES R,U 4 CO 2
2 PROCESSING OF PLASTICS R,U 3 CO 4
3 MODERN MACHINING PROCESSES R,U 3+3 CO 5
4 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM & ROBOTICS R,U 3 CO 5
Part - B (24 marks)
5 JIGS & FIXTURES Ap 8 CO 2
6 PROCESSING OF PLASTICS Ap 4 CO 4
7 MODERN MACHINING PROCESSES Ap 8 CO 5
8 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM & ROBOTICS Ap 4 CO 5
341
20-A-503
UNIT TEST - 1
PART – A
1. a) Side milling cutter was used for_________________.

b) In up milling operations milling cutter rotates_________________direction
to work piece.
c) In down milling operation milling cutter rotates____________ direction to
work piece.
d) Indexing rule for direct indexing ___________
2. List out different methods of gear making.
3. What are natural abrasive materials?
4.State the factors consider for selecting grinding wheel.
5. Write a short note on tin coating.
PART – B
6. Explain the construction and working of horizontal milling machine with a neat sketch
or
Explain the construction and working of vertical milling machine with a neat sketch
7. Explain the construction of plain cylindrical centre type grinding machine with a neat sketch.
Or
Explain centre less grinding machine with a neat sketch.
8. a) Describe electroplating operation with a neat sketch
b) Describe gear shaping machine with a neat sketch

Or
a)Describe wire method of metal spraying technic with a neat sketch
b) Describe gear hobbing machine with a neat sketch
***
342
Part A : 30 marks 10 Questions , 3 marks each, NO CHOICE

– 60 minutes ( 6 minutes each)
PART B: 40 marks, 5 questions, 8 marks each, Either Or type
- 90 minutes (18 minutes for each question)
PART C: 10 marks, 1 question,10 marks
- 30 minutes (Higher order Question)
Part - A (30 marks)

1 MILLING R, U, 3 CO 1
2 GEAR MAKING R, U 3 CO 1
3 GEAR MAKING R, U 3 CO 1
4 GRINDING R, U 3 CO 3
5 SURFACE FINISHING PROCESS R, U 3 CO 1
6 SURFACE FINISHING PROCESS R, U 3 CO 1
7 PROCESSING OF PLASTICS R, U 3 CO 4
8 MODERN MACHINING PROCESSES R, U 3 CO 5
9 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM & R 3 CO 5
ROBOTICS
10 FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM & R 3 CO 5
ROBOTICS
Part - B (40 marks)
11 MILLING Ap 8 CO 1
12 GRINDING Ap 8 CO 3
13 JIGS & FIXTURES Ap 8 CO 2
14 PROCESSING OF PLASTICS Ap 8 CO 4
15 MODERN MACHINING PROCESSES Ap 8 CO 5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO3 or CO5 AN 10 CO3 or CO5
343
C20-A-503
PART - A
1. Write the classifications of milling machine.
2. List any fourmethods of making gears.
3. Draw a neat sketch of gear hobbing machine.
4. Write any three advantages of grinding operations.
5. Differentiate galvanising and anodising.
6. What is the principle of electroplating?
7. State any four advantages of plastics over other engineering materials.
8. Mention any three advantages of ultrasonic machining.
9. List out different elements of FMS.
10. State the applications of Robotics.
PART-B
11. Describe universal milling machine with a neat sketch?

(OR)
Explain direct indexing and simple indexing
12.Describe the construction and working of plain cylindrical centre type grinding machine with
a neat sketch
(OR)
Explain centre less grinding machine with a neat sketch.
13.Explain different types of jigs with neat sketches
(OR)
Describe Milling Fixtures with a neat sketch.
14.Explain injection molding technique with a neat sketch.
(or)
Explain blow molding technique with a neat sketch
15.Describe Ultra-Sonic Machining (USM) with a neat sketch
(OR)
Explain the operations of N.C machine with a neat sketch
PART-C
16. Justify the need and importance of modern machining process.
***
344
MODERN TRENDS IN AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
Subject Title Subject Code No of periods/week Total periods
/Semester
MODERN TRENDS IN
AUTOMOBILE A-504 05 75
ENGINEERING
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major topic Periods Weight Part – A Part – B Part – C
No Allocated age Short Essay Essay
. of Type Type Type
marks (3 (8 (10
1 Alternate Fuels 10 9 03 00
2 Automotive sensors and actuators 12 14 02 01
3 I C Engine Air and Fuel Systems 12 11 01 01
Modern Transmission, Steering, 02
4 18 14 01
Braking andSuspension Systems
Automotive Safety and Computer 01
5 12 11 01
Control Systems
6 Automobile Assembly Line and Testing 11 11 01 01
10 01
weightage from CO2 or CO3 or CO4
Total 75 80 10 5 01
Course Title: Modern Trends in Automobile Total No. Of Periods: 75

Code: A-504 Engineering
Course
1.0 Understand the concepts of alternate fuels used in Automobiles
Objectives:
2.0 Comprehend the modern technologies in Automobiles.

C01 A-504.1 Explain the need to develop alternate fuels and their usage in Automobile
C02 A-504.2 Discuss sensors and actuators used in automotive vehicles.
C03 A-504.3 Discuss modern air and fuel flow systems used in IC engines.
Discuss the modern technologies related to transmission, steering, braking, and
C04 A-504.4
suspension systems of automobiles.
C05 A-504.5 Explain the 1. Automobile Assembly Line,2. Testing and 3. Safety aspects.
345
Learning outcomes:Upon completion of the course student shall be able to
1.0 Alternate Fuels

1.1 Define a fuel and an alternative fuel.
1.2 State the necessity of alternate fuels and properties of alternate fuels.
1.3 List the types of alternate fuels that can be used for propulsion of automobile.
1.4 State the types of alternative energy sources.
1.5 List alcohols that can be used as fuel in automobiles
1.6 Explain the 1. Effects of Alcohol Fuels used directly in S.I engines and CI Engines, 2. Effects of
blending of methanol or ethanol with gasoline and diesel and 3. Emission characteristics of
these blends.
1.7 List advantages and Limitations of Alcohol blends as automobile fuels.
1.8 Define a Biodiesel and Gaseous fuel.
1.9 List 1.Advantages and Limitations of gaseous fuels as automobile fuels, 2. Types of Gaseous
fuels and3.Gaseous fuels used in an automobile.
1.10 Explain the modifications required in the fuel system of the SI Engine and CI engine to make
use of gaseous fuels
2.0 Automotive Sensors and Actuators
2.1 State the functions of different sensors used in automobiles 1. Voltage generating sensors, 2.
Resistive sensors 3. Switch sensors.
2.2 Explain the sensors used in automobiles1. Catalyst and oxygen sensor, 2. Throttle
Position sensor, 3. Mass Air flow (MAF) sensor, 4.Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor,
5. Engine speed and piston position sensor, 6. Coolant temperature sensor, 7.Idle speed
control sensor 8. Wheel speed sensor, 9.Yaw sensor,10. Crash sensor, 11.Steering wheel
position sensor, 12.Knock sensor, 13.Cam shaft sensor.
2.3 Classify the Actuators
2.4 List four types of electrical actuators.
2.5 State the applications of electrical Actuators.
2.6 Explain Actuator Mechanism and operation
3.0 IC Engine Air and Fuel Systems
3.1 Explain the Method of Super Charging and Turbo Charging
3.2 Explain the working Principle of fixed Geometry Turbo Charger (FGT) and Variable Geometry
Turbo Charger (VGT)
3.3 Explain the Principle of Turbo Stratified Injection System.
3.4 Explain the Principle of Turbo Charger with Inter cooling System and Waste gate
Turbocharger
3.5 State the Modifications required for the Turbo Charged Engine.
3.6 Describe the working of fuel system to use CNG and LPG in Petrol and diesel engines with
block diagram
3.7 Describe the basic components of electronically controlled unit (ECU)
3.8 Explain the working principle of 1. Multi point fuel Injection System (MPFI), 2. Direct Petrol
Injection System, 3. Modern common Rail Diesel Injection System (CRDI) and 4. Electronic
Unit Injection System (EUI)
346
3.9 List the advantages & disadvantages of MPFI System
3.10 Compare MPFI System with carburetted System
4.0 ModernTransmission, Steering, Braking and Suspension Systems
4.1 Explain the working of 1. Dual shift gear box, 2. Continuously variable transmission system
and 3. Intelligent Manual Transmission.
4.2 Explain the working of ECU Controlled Power Assisted Steering.
4.3 Explain the working of Electronic Power Assisted Steering.
4.4 Explain the working of Four Wheel Steering.
4.5 Explain 1. Antilock Braking System (ABS), 2. Equal Braking Distribution System (EBD),
3. Traction Control System (TC), 4. Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) and 5. Multi-
collision Braking System
4.6 Explain Hydrolastic suspension, Hydro gas suspension and Adaptive Suspension Systems.
4.7 Explain the working of a) solenoid valve actuated damper and b) Magnetorheological
damper used in adaptive suspension system.
5.0 Automotive Safety and Computer Control Systems
5.1 State the types of safety systems in Automobiles.
5.2 Explain the Supplementary restraint systems (SRS) – Air bags- seat belt, Pre-tensionless
5.3 Explain the Pedestrian Safety system
5.4 Explain the Blind Spot collision warning systemLane following assist.
5.5 Explain the Automatic Cruise control system.
5.6 Explain Vehicle condition monitoring (VCM)
5.7 List the fault codes of control systems.
5.8 Explain about fault codes – Onboard Diagnostics.
5.9 Explain about 1. Computer Control Operation, 2. Input Sensors, and 3. Actuator Mechanism
& Operation.
6.0 Automobile Assembly Line and Testing
6.1 Comprehend the Assembly line for two wheelers and four wheelers
6.2 List the applications of robots in assembly line
6.3 Explain the testing procedure of 1.Chassis Dynamometer, 2.Crash Test, 3.Rollover test
6.4 State about the Bio-fidelity Dummies.
347
COs – POs Mapping
Course Course Title: Modern Trends in Automobile No. of No. of Periods: 75
Code: A-504 Engineering COs: 5
Mapped with CO Level
Pos Col. 1 Remarks
No. (1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO1 CO1, CO2,CO3, > 40% Level 3
20 27 2
CO4,CO5 (Highly Addressed)
PO2 CO1, CO2,CO3, 25% to 40% level 2
20 27 2
CO4,CO5 (Moderately
PO3 CO1,CO5 10 13 1 Addressed)
PO4 CO3,CO4, CO5 15 20 1 5% t0 25% level 1
PO5 CO2,CO3, CO4,CO5 10 13 1 (Low Addressed)
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-504.1 3 3 1 3
A-504.2 2 2 2 3
A-504.3 3 3 2 2 1 3
A-504.4 2 1 2 2 1 3
A-504.5 3 3 1 3 2 1 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Alternate Fuels

Definition of fuel, alternative fuel – necessity for developing alternative fuels– definition of
renewable and non-renewable fuels – existing alternative fuels like Alcohols, vegetable oils,
Bio diesel, LPG, CNG, LNG, Hydrogen, that can be used in automobiles – merits and demerits
of these alternative fuels - types of alcohols – alcohols that can be used in automobiles –
effects of using alcohols as fuel in SI and CI engines– Blending of methanol or ethanol with
gasoline and diesel – emission characteristics of these blends – advantages and limitations of
alcohol blends as automobile fuels -Definition of Bio diesel – Definition of Gaseous fuels –
types of gaseous fuels – short listing of gaseous fuels used in automobiles - modifications
required in the fuel system of the SI and CI engine to make use of gaseous fuels – working of
fuel system to useCNG and LPGin Petrol and diesel engines with a block diagram – advantages
and limitations of gaseous fuels as automobile fuels
2.0 Automotive Sensors and Actuators
Classification of sensors – Voltage generating sensors – resistive sensors – switch sensors-
Catalyst and oxygen sensor- Throttle position sensor- Mass Air flow (MAF) sensor -Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor -engine speed and piston position sensor-coolant
348
temperature sensor- idle speed control – wheel speed sensor- yaw sensor – crash sensor –
steering wheel position sensor – knock sensor – cam shaft sensor.
Classification of Actuators – Mechanical – Hydraulic – Pneumatic- Electric Actuators – Types-
Viz., Solenoids, DC Motors, Stepper Motors, Piezo Actuators –Applications of Actuators.
Explain Actuator Mechanism and operation
3.0 IC Engine Air and Fuel Systems
Super Charging method - Turbo Charger- Fixed Geometry Turbo (FGT) – Waste gate
Turbocharger - Variable Geometry Turbocharger (VGT)- Turbo Stratified Injection (TSI) – TC
with inter cooling systems- turbo charged engine modifications.
Introduction to Electronic Fuel injection system (EFI) - Electronically Controlled Unit
(ECU) – Basic components of ECU - Multi point fuel Injection System (MPFI)- Advantages and
comparison with Carburetor and MPFI System- Direct petrol Injection-Modern Common Rail
Diesel Injection System(CRDI)- Electronic unit Injector(EUI)
4.0 ModernTransmission, Steering, Brakingand Suspension Systems
Transmission
Dual shift gear box - Continuously variable transmission system - Intelligent Manual
Transmission.
Steering
ECU Controlled Power assisted steering – Electric power assisted steering- four wheel
steering
Brakes
Antilock Braking system (ABS)- Equal braking distribution system(EBD)- Traction control (TC)-
Electronic stability control(ESC) –MCB (Multi Collision Braking)
Suspension: Hydro (lastic) Suspension- Hydro gas suspension – Hydro Pneumatic suspension
– Adaptive Suspension System
5.0 Automotive Safetyand Computer Control Systems
Active Safety – Passive Safety - Supplementary restraint systems (SRS) – Air bags- seat belt
Pretensioners-Pedestrian Safety- Blind Spot collision warning-Lane following assist-
Automatic Cruise control.Vehicle condition monitoring (VCM) - fault codes - Onboard
Diagonostics - Computer Control Operation-Input Sensors - types– Actuators – types –
Actuator Mechanism & Operation.
6.0 Automobile Assembly Line and Testing
Assembly line for two wheelers and four wheelers- Trim assembly,chassis line and final
Assembly-application of robots in assembly
Testing –Chassis Dynamometer – Crash Test –Rollover test- Bio-fidelity Dummies.
Reference Books:
1. Trends in Automobile Engineering - A S Rangwala 2006 (New Age International Publishers)
2. A Practical Approach to Motor Vehicle Engineering and Maintenance – Allan Bonnick, Derek
Newbold 2005 ( Routledge Publishers)
3. Automobile Engineering – Vol –I Engine System – Anil Chhikara 2017 ( Satya Prakashan
Publishers)
4. The automotive body manufacturing systems and processes – Mohammad A omar
5. Automobile Manufacturing process – P D Kulkarni
6. Euroncap website
349
A-504, Modern Trends in Automobile Engineering
Weight
Sl. Periods Distribution of Distribution of
Chapter Name age
No Allocated Weight age Weight age
Allocated
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Alternate Fuels 12 9 3 3 3 0 1 1 1 0
Automotive sensors
2 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
and actuators
I C Engine Air and
3 12 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Fuel Systems
Modern Transmission,
4 Steering, Braking and 16 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Suspension Systems
Automotive Safety
5 and Computer Control 12 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Systems
Automobile Assembly
6 11 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0
Line and Testing
or CO3 or CO4
Total: 75 80 15 12 43 10 6 4 5 1


Part - A (16 marks)
1 (a) Alternate Fuels U 1 CO1
1 (b) Automotive sensors and actuators U/R 1 CO2
1 (c) Automotive sensors and actuators U/R 1 CO2
1 (d) I C Automotive Air and Fuel Systems R 1 CO3
2 Alternate Fuels R 3 CO1
3 Automotive sensors and actuators U 3 CO2
4 I C Automotive Air and Fuel Systems U 3 CO3
5 I C Automotive Air and Fuel Systems U/R 3 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
6 Alternate Fuels AP 8 CO1
7 Automotive sensors and actuators AP 8 CO2
8 I C Automotive Air and Fuel Systems AP 8 CO3
350
C20-A-504

UNIT TEST - 1
Modern Trends in Automobile Engineering
PART – A
1. (a) Bio diesels used in CI engines. (True/False)

(b) What is the sensor used to know the aerodynamics of a vehicle?
(c) Knock sensor meant for ............
(d) EUI means -------.
2. List the types of alternate fuels used in automobiles.
3. State the function of yaw sensor.
4. State the functions of ECU.
5. List the advantages & disadvantages of MPFI System
PART – B
Instructions: Answer all three questions. Each question carries 8 marks.(3 X 8 = 24 Marks)
6. Explain the effects of blending of methanol or ethanol with gasoline.

or
Explain the modifications required in the fuel system of the SI Engine to make
use of gaseous fuels
7. Explain the details of Oxygen and mass air flow sensors used in automobiles.
or
Explain Actuator Mechanism and operation
8. Explain the working Principle of fixed Geometry Turbo Charger (FGT) with a neat
sketch.
or
Explain the working Principle of Direct Petrol Injection System with a neat sketch.
351

Part - A (30 marks)
1 Alternate Fuels R 3 CO1
2 Alternate Fuels U 3 CO1
3 Alternate Fuels Ap 3 CO1
4 Automotive sensors and actuators R 3 CO2
5 Automotive sensors and actuators U 3 CO2
6 I C Automotive Air and Fuel Systems U 3 CO3
Modern Transmission, Steering, Brakes &
7 R 3 CO4
Suspension Systems
Modern Transmission, Steering, Brakes &
8 U 3 CO4
Suspension Systems
Automotive Safety and Computer Control
9 U/R 3 CO5
Systems
10 Automobile Assembly Line and Testing U/R 3 CO5

Part - B (40 marks)
Automotive sensors and actuators
11 AP 8 CO2
I C Automotive Air and Fuel Systems AP
12 8 CO3
Modern Steering, Brakes & Suspension Systems AP
13 8 CO4
Automotive Safety and Computer Control AP
14 Systems 8 CO5
15 Automobile Assembly Line and Testing AP 8 CO5

Part - C (10 marks)
Question having 10 marks weightage from CO2 CO2 or CO3
16 AN 10
or CO3 or CO4 or CO4
352
C20-A-504
Modern Trends in Automobile Engineering
PART - A
1. Define a fuel and an alternative fuel
2. List any six types of alternate fuels that can be used for propulsion of automobile.
3. Write any three Advantages of Alcohol blends as automobile fuels.
4. How do you classify the sensors used in automobiles?
5. Compare MPFI System with Carburetted system
6. What is four wheel steering?
7. Mention different types of components used for the functionality of ECS
8. What is the principle used in the dampers of adaptive suspension system?
9. Mention different types of safety systems used in automobiles
10. What are the applications of Robots in assembly lines of automobile production?
PART – B
11. Explain the construction and working of MAF Sensor
or
Explain the electrical actuator mechanism and its operation
12. Explain the working principle of Direct Petrol Injection System with a line diagram
or
Explain the unit injection system with a neat sketch.
13. What do you understand by EBD? Explain its working.

or
What do you understand by ESC? Explain its working.
14. What is the importance of supplementary restraint system? Write the function of each
component in the system.
Or
Explain pedestrian safety system used in automobiles.
15. What is the necessity of Chassis dynamometer? Explain the procedure to test a vehicle with it.
or
Explain the assembly line in the production of two wheelers.
PART – C
16. Suggest the suitable sensors for a modern diesel vehicles.
***
353
ELECTRIC ANDELECTRIC HYBRID VEHICLES
Periods per
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week
Semester
ELECTRIC AND
ELECTRIC HYBRID A-505 04 60
VEHICLES
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl. Major Periods Weight Part – A Short Part – B Part –
No topic Allocated age of Type Essay C
marks (3 marks) Type Essay
(8 Type
Marks) (10
Marks)
Introduction to Electric and
1 10 14 2 1
Electric hybrid vehicles
2 Energy Storage 16 2 1
14
3 Design of Drive train 12 2 1
14
Electric Propulsion 14
4 12 2 1
5 Regenerative Braking 10 14 2 1
10 - - 1
Total 60 80 10 5 1
Course Code : A-505 Course Name: Electric And Electric Hybrid Vehicles No. Of periods : 60
Course Objectives Upon completion of the course student shall be able to

1. Study the concepts and drive train configurations of Electric and
Electric hybrid vehicles.
2. Comprehend Electric propulsions systems and energy storage devices.
3. Appreciate regenerative braking systems.

C01 A-505.1 Explain the concepts and configurations of Electric and Electric Hybrid Vehicles
Explain the concepts and principles of Energy storage systems used for Electric and
C02 A-505.2
Electric Hybrid Vehicles
C03 A-505.3 Design hybrid electric drive trains used for Electric and Electric Hybrid Vehicles
Discuss the principle and working of electric propulsions used for Electric and
C04 A-505.4
Electric Hybrid Vehicles
Discuss the principle and working of regenerative braking systems used for Electric
C05 A-505.5
and Electric Hybrid Vehicles
354
Learning Outcomes:Upon completion of the course student shall be able to
1.0 Introduction to Electric and Electric Hybrid Vehicles

1.1 Describe the history of electric and electric hybrid vehicles.
1.2 Describe the Social and environmental importance of Electric and Electric Hybrid
vehicles.
1.3 Explain basic components of Electric and Electric Hybrid vehicles.
1.4 Explain fuel cell vehicles.
1.5 Explain the principle of solar power vehicles.
1.6 List the advantages of Electric and Electric Hybrid vehicles.
2.0 Energy Storage
2.1 List the requirements of energy storage.
2.2 Explain the working principle of Nickel and Lithium based batteries.
2.3 List the types of fuel cells.
2.4 State the characteristics of fuel cells.
2.5 State the applications of fuel cells.
2.6 Explain principle and operation of proton exchange membrane and alkaline fuel cells.
2.7 Describeultra-capacitors.
2.8 Explain basic principle of ultra-capacitor.
2.9 Explain Hybridisation of Energy storage and battery management and safety.
2.10 Explain selection of batteries and battery charging methods.
3.0 Fundamentals of Drive train
3.1 List out four hybrid electric drive trains.
3.2 Explain Series hybrid, parallel hybrid, series parallel and complex drive trains.
3.3 Explain torque coupling parallel and speed coupling parallel hybrid electric drive.
3.4 List out advantages of parallel hybrid drive train.
3.5 Describe control strategy of parallel hybrid drive train.
3.6 Describe plug in hybrid electric drive.
3.7 Describe transmission system used in EV/EHV.
4.0 Electric Propulsion
4.1 Explain the principle and operation of permanent magnet brushless dc motor drive.
4.2 Explain the principle and operation of switch reluctant motor drive.
4.3 Describe sizing and selection of motors.
4.4 Explain methods of control of motors.
4.5 Explain configuration of drives.
5.0 Regenerative Braking
5.1Describe regenerative braking.
5.2 Explain the braking power and energy on front and rear wheels.
5.3Describe energy consumption in regenerative braking.
5.4 Explain components of braking system of EV and EHV.
5.5 Explain optimal feel series brake.
5.6 Explain optimal energy recovery series brake.
5.7Explain parallel braking system used in EV/EHV.
5.8 Explain ABS system used in EV/EHV.
355
COs – POs Mapping
Course Code: A-505 Course Title: ELECTRIC ANDELECTRIC No. of No. of Periods: 60
HYBRID VEHICLES COs: 5
Level
(1,2,3)
Number Percentage
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 25 42 3 > 40% Level 3 (Highly
PO2 CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 15 25 2 Addressed)
PO3 CO3,CO4 10 17 1 25% to 40% level 2
PO4 CO2 5 8 1 (Moderately
PO5 CO2, CO3,CO4,CO5 5 8 1 Addressed)
PO6 5% t0 25% level 1
PO7 (Low Addressed)
<5% Not Addressed
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-505.1 3 1 1
A-505.2 3 1 1 1 1 3
A-505.3 3 1 2 1 3
A-505.4 3 1 3 1 3
A-505.5 3 1 1 3
the following:
Course Content:
1. Introduction to Electric and Electric hybrid vehicles :
History of Electric and Electric Hybrid vehicles – Social and environmental importance –
basic components of Electric and Electric Hybrid vehicles - Fuel cell vehicles – solar power
vehicles
2. Energy Storage:
Requirement of Energy storage – battery technologies – Nickel based (Nickel-iron, Nickel-
cadmium, Nickel Metal hybrid) and lithium based ( Lithium-polymer, Lithium-ion) batteries –
types, characteristics and applications of fuel cells – principle and operation of fuel cells
(proton exchange membrane and alkaline fuel cells)– ultra capacitors : basic principle of
ultra capacitors - Hybridisation of energy storage – battery management – battery safety –
monitoring cells – thermal management – selection of batteries - battery charging methods.
3. Design of Drive train :
Hybrid Electric drive train – a) Series hybrid b) parallel hybrid c) series – parallel d) complex
drive train – torque coupling parallel hybrid electric drive – speed coupling parallel hybrid
electric drive - advantages of parallel hybrid drive train – control strategy of parallel hybrid
drive train – plug in hybrid electric drive – transmission for EV/EHV.
356
4. Electric Propulsion:
DC motor drives – permanent magnet brushless dc motor drive (principle and operation) –
switch reluctant motor drive(SRM) – sizing and selection of motors – control of motor and
configuration of drives.
5. Regenerative Braking:
Energy consumption – braking power and energy on front and back wheels – braking system
of EV and EHV – Optimal feel series brake – optimal energy recovery series brake – parallel
brake – ABS for EV/EHV.
Reference books:
1. Vehicular Electric Power Systems – MehrdadEhsani,Yimin Gao CRC Press 2003

2. Electric and Hybrid Vehicles – I. Husain CRC Press 2003

A-505, ELECTRIC AND ELECTRIC HYBRID VEHICLES

Weighta Distribution of Distribution of
Periods ge
Weightage Weightage
Sl. No Allocated Allocate
Chapter Name d A A A
R U An R U
p p n
Introduction to Electric and
Electric hybrid vehicles
1 10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Energy Storage
2 16 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Design of Drive train
3 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
Electric Propulsion
4 12 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
5 Regenerative Braking
10 14 3 3 8 0 1 1 1 0
10 10
fromCO3 or CO4 or CO5 1
Total 60 80 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1

357
UNIT TEST I

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Introduction to Electric and Electric Hybrid R, U 7 (4+3) CO 1
Vehicles
2 Energy Storage R, U 9 (3x3) CO 2
Part - B (24 marks)
3 Introduction to Electric and Electric Hybrid AP 8 CO 1
Vehicles
4 Energy Storage AP 16 CO 2
UNIT TEST II

Part - A (16 marks)
1 Design of Drive Train R, U 4 CO 3
2 Electric Propulsion R, U 6 CO 4
3 Regenerative Braking R, U 6 CO 5
Part - B (24 marks)
4 Design of Drive Train AP 8 CO 3
5 Electric Propulsion AP 8 CO 4
6 Regenerative Braking AP 8 CO 5
358
C20-A-505
UNIT TEST - 1
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRIC HYBRID VEHICLES
PART – A
1. a) Global warming is a result of ________ effect

b) Pollutants from Automobile exhaust are _________________
c) Hybrid Vehicle means ____________
d) Give an example of a Fuel Cell ___________
2. List the advantages of electric vehicles
3. State the applications of Proton Exchange Fuel Cell
4. List different types of Battery Technologies.
5. State the requirement of Energy Storage in Electric Vehicles.

PART – B
6. Explain the Principle of Solar Power Vehicles

or
Explain the environmental importance of Electric Vehicles.
7. Explain Battery Management and Safety

Or
Explain selection of Batteries.
8. Explain the working principle of Nickel and Lithium Based Battery.

Or
Explain Battery charging methods.
***
359

Part - A (30 marks)
1 Introduction to Electric and Electric Hybrid R 3 CO 1
Vehicles
2 Introduction to Electric and Electric Hybrid U 3 CO 1
Vehicles
3 Energy Storage R 3 CO 2
4 Energy Storage U 3 CO 2
5 Design of Drive Train R 3 CO 3
6 Design of Drive Train U 3 CO 3
7 Electric Propulsion R 3 CO 4
8 Electric Propulsion U 3 CO 4
9 Regenerative Braking R 3 CO 5
10 Regenerative Braking U 3 CO 5
Part - B (40 marks)
11 Introduction to Electric and Electric Hybrid AP 8 CO 1
Vehicles
12 Energy Storage AP 8 CO 2
13 Design of Drive Train AP 8 CO 3
14 Electric Propulsion AP 8 CO 4
15 Regenerative Braking AP 8 CO 5
Part - C (10 marks)
16 Question from CO3 or CO4 or CO5 AN 10 CO3 or CO4
or CO5
360
C-20-A-505
Electric and Electric Hybrid Vehicles
PART - A
1. List the advantages of electricvehicles.

2. List basic components of solar powervehicles.
3. List different battery chargingmethods.
4. State the requirement of energy storage in electricvehicles.
5. List the advantages of parallel hybrid drivetrain.
6. Draw the line diagram of transmission system used in electricvehicles.
7. List different methods of control ofmotors.
8. Differentiate DC and ACmotor.
9. What is regenerative braking?
10. Define brakepower.
PART – B
11. Explain fuel cellvehicles.

Or
Explain the environmental importance of electric vehicles.
12. Explain proton exchange membrane and alkaline fuelcell.
Or
Explain the working principle of nickel and lithium based batteries.
13. Explain plug-in hybrid electric drive with the help of a neatdiagram.
Or
Explain control strategy of parallel hybrid drive train.
14. Explain principle and operation of permanent magnet brushless DC motordrive.
Or
Explain sizing and selection of motors for electric vehicles.
15. Explain ABS system used in electric vehicle.
Or
Explain optimal energy recovery series brake.
PART – C
16. Justify the need of Electric hybrid vehicles in present days.
***
361
CAD PRACTICE
Course Title Course Code Periods per week Period per semester
CAD Practice A–506 06 90
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl No. Major Topics No. of periods

1. Introduction to Computer Aided Drafting 3
2. Computer Aided Drafting Interface 16
3. Computer Aided Drafting – 2D 24
4. Practice 2D drawings, Isometric View drawings and Plotting 28
5 Practice 3D Drawings 19
TOTAL 90
Course Code: A-506 Course Name: CAD Practice No. Of Periods: 90

Course Objectives Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1. Understand basics of computer aided drafting.
2. Understand working in CAD environment.
3. Prepare drawings of standard components using CAD software both in
2D and 3D.

C01 A-506.1 Explain Computer Aided Drafting and its importance.
C02 A-506.2 Practice usage of Computer Aided Drafting Interface and its various tools
Practice 1. Creating objects commands, 2. Modify or editing commands, 3.
C03 A-506.3
Coordinate system, 4.Text and dimensioning.
C04 A-506.4 Create 2Ddrawings using CAD software
C05 A-506.5 Create 3D drawings using CAD Software.
Learning Outcome
1.0 Introduction to Computer Aided Drafting
1.1 Define Computer Aided Drafting
1.2 List the Advantages of CAD
1.3 List the CADsoftware’s used for drafting.
1.4 Explain the importance of CAD software
1.5 Explain the features of Graphic Work station
1.6 State the system requirements of CAD software.
2.0 Computer Aided Drafting Interface
2.1 Explain CAD Environment 1. Screen, 2. Various tool bars, 3. Command line, 4. Drop
down menus, 5. Ribbon tabs and 6. Icons
2.2 Practice repeating a commands, undoing and redoing action
362
2.3 Practice mouse functions
2.4 Practice the Creating drawing, Opening, existing Files and saving the drawing
2.5 Practice the setting limits and drawing unit, Standard workspace settings
2.6 Practice selection methods – crossing and window, drawing accuracy methods –
Ortho, Osnap, Snap and grid and use of grips
2.7 Practice the use of Zoom, Scroll bar, pan command, and rotating view to move
around within drawing
2.8 Practice the displaying of multiple views, changing line-weight.
3.0 Computer Aided Drafting – 2D
3.1 Draw the lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays and infinite lines and shapes
like rectangles, polygons, polylines, Splines, adding of hatch pattern
3.2 Practice how the coordinate system work,Two dimensional coordinates such as
Absolute Cartesian, Relative Cartesian and Polar coordinates, use of right-hand rule
and Practice the how to enter into x, y, z – coordinates, defining user coordinate
system
3.3 Calculate the areas, distance and angle and display the information about the
entities and drawing status
3.4 Practice the entity selection and deselect ion methods, Deletion, Copying of entities
within a drawing and between drawings and making of parallel copies, Mirroring
entities and Arraying entities
3.5 Practice the Rearranging of entities by Moving, Rotating and Reordering and Resizing
of entities by Stretching, Scaling, Extending,Trimming, Editing the length, Braking
and joining of entities
3.6Practice the creating, modifying the groups and ungrouping of Entities and Exploding
of entities, Chamfering and Filleting of entities
3.7 Practice the setting a current layer, layers color, line type, line weight, print
Style, locking and unlocking of layers and setting of current line type
3.8 Explain the purpose of a block, creating, inserting, redefining and exploding a block
3.9 Practice the creating of linear, Angular, Diameter, Radial, Ordinate Dimensions and
creating leaders and annotations, dimensions oblique, Edit the dimension text,
Controlling of dimension arrows and format.
3.10 Practice the creating, naming and modifying the text fonts, Creation of line text,
paragraph text, Setting of line text style and its alignment and Practice the Setting of
Paragraph text style and its alignment
4.0 Practice 2D drawings, Isometric and Plotting
4.1 Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components
4.2 Create Isometric views of simple objects
4.3 Understand the layouts, viewing of drawings in paper and model space
4.4 Display the model and layout tabs, new layout, layout view ports
4.5 Set the paper size and orientation
4.6 Select a printer or a plotter
5.0 Practice 3D Drawings
5.0 Explain the concept of 3D
5.1 Create 3D solids using solid tool bar options
5.2 Create 3D Drawings of Standard Mechanical Components
363
Cours
e Course Title: CAD
No of Cos: 5 No. Of periods:90
Code: Practice
A-506
POs Mapped with CO No CO Periods Addressing Level Remarks
PO in Col 1 (1,2,3)
Addressed)
PO2 5% to 25% Level 1
( Low Addressed)
PO4 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 30 33 2
PO5 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 25 28 2
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-506.1 3
A-506.2 3 3 3 3 3 1
A-506.3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
A-506.4 3 2 3 3 3 3 2
A-506.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
the following:
COURSE CONTENT
S.No Experiment Title Key Competency

Introduction to  Computer Aided Drafting, Advantages of CAD, CAD
1. Computer Aided software’s
Drafting  Importance of CAD, system requirements of CAD software.
 CAD Environment: Screen, Various tool bars, command line,
drop down menus, ribbon tabs and icons, repeating a
Computer Aided commands, undoing and redoing action, mouse functions
2.
Drafting Interface  Creating the drawing, Opening existing Files, saving the
drawing - setting limits and drawing unit, Standard
workspace settings
364
 Selection methods – crossing and window,
 Using Drawing accuracy methods –Ortho, Osnap, Snap and
grid and use of grips
 Practice viewing commands.
S.No Experiment Title Key Competency
 Practice Draw commands
 Practice how the coordinate system work, Two dimensional
coordinates such as Absolute Cartesian, Relative Cartesian
and Polar coordinates, use of right-hand rule, how to enter
into x, y, z – coordinates, defining user coordinate system
Computer Aided
3.  Practice Inquiry commands
Drafting – 2D
 Practice Modify / Edit commands
 Practice layers and block commands.
 Practice Dimensioning commands.
 Practice text and Mtext
 Draw simple geometrical shapes like circles, rectangles etc.,
Practice 2D  Create 2D drawings of standard mechanical components
drawings, Isometric  Create Isometric views of simple objects
4.
drawings and  Practice layouts, paper size and orientation and plotting
Plotting
 Explain the concept of 3D
Practice 3D
5.  Create 3D solids using solid tool bar options
Drawings
 Create 3D Drawings of Standard Mechanical Components
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mastering AutoCAD 2017 by George omura, Brain C. Benton

2. Up and Running with AutoCAD 2017 2D and 3D by Elliot J.Gindis
365
I.C. ENGINE TESTING AND VEHICLE DIAGNOISING LAB

IC ENGINE TESTING
AND VEHICLE A-507 06 90
DIAGNOISING LAB
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of
Sl No. Major Topics
periods
1. IC Engine Testing 45
2. Vehicle Diagnosing 45
Demonstration of driving skills ( One batch will go for driving practice and
3
another batch will do the experiment)
TOTAL 90
Course Code: A-507 COURSE: IC ENGINETESTING AND VEHICLE DIAGNOISING LAB Total No. of
Periods: 90
1. Practice load test, morse test on given petrol and diesel engines and
COURSE draw the performance curves and heat balance sheet
OBJECTIVES 2. Practice wheel balancing, wheel alignment, engine analysing, exhaust
gas analysing and spark plug testing
3. Practice driving on four wheelers

Draw performance curves by conducting load test on a given petrol and diesel
C01 A-507.1
engine
Find mechanical efficiency by conducting morse test on a given I.C engine and
C02 A-507.2
draw the heat balance sheet.
Perform 1. Wheel balancing, 2. Wheel alignment, 3. Exhaust gas analyser, 4.
C03 A-507.3
OBD scanner and 5. Spark plug cleaning and testing.
C04 A-507.4 Troubleshoot the engine using engine analyser
C05 A-507.5 Demonstrate driving skills on four wheelers
Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of the course student shall be able to
IC ENGINE TESTING
1. Load tests and performance curves on the available diesel engine

2. Load tests and performance curves on the available petrol engine
3. Morse Test
4. Drawing of heat balance sheet of an IC engine
366
VEHICLE DIAGNOISING
1. Wheel Balancing
2. Wheel Alignment
3. Engine Analyzer
4. On-Board Diagnosis Scanning
5. Exhaust gas Analyzer for Petrol Engines
6. Exhaust Gas Analyzer for Diesel Engine
7. Spark Plug Cleaing and Testing
POs - COs Mapping Format
Course Code: A-507 Course Title: IC ENGINE TESTING AND No of No. Of periods: 90
VEHICLE DIAGNOISING LAB Cos:5
Addressing (1,2,3)
PO in Col 1
Addressed)
( Low Addressed)
PO3 CO3, CO4, CO5 10 11 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO4 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 30 34 1
PO5 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 10 11 1
PO6
PO7
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-507.1 1 1 2 1 2 1
A-507.2 2 2 2 1 2 1
A-507.3 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
A-507.4 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
A-507.5 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
the following:
367
IC ENGINE TESTING
Sl. Name of the

Key Competencies Competencies
No Experiment
 Identify the dead centres  State different strokes of an
1  Use of spirit level and I.C.Engine
Valve timing metal tape and feeler  State the parts of an I.C. Engine
diagrams gauge  Identify the dead Centre
 Identify the opening and  Use of spirit level and metal tape
closing of valves during and feeler gauge
different strokes  Identify the opening and closing
 Measure the of valves during different strokes
circumferential gaps for  Measure the circumferential
the valve opening and gaps for the valve opening and
closing and convert them closing and convert them into
into degrees degrees
 Identify the locations of  State various parameters to be
2 cooling water inlet and measured
outlet  Identify the locations of cooling
 Allow cooling water to water inlet and outlet
enter the cylinder jacket.  Allow cooling water to enter the
 Cranking the engine and cylinder jacket
operating the  Cranking the engine and
decompression lever operating the decompression
Heat Balance  Adjust the load lever
Sheet  Record the load and speed  Adjust the load
 Record the reading of  Record the load and speed
cooling water temperature  Record the reading of cooling
at inlet and outlet water temperature at inlet and
 Record time taken for outlet
10c.c fuel consumption  Record time taken for 10c.c fuel
 Record exhaust gas consumption
temperature  Record exhaust gas temperature
 Cranking the engine and  Define I.P. ,B.P. and F.P.
3 operating the  Write down the formulae for I.P.
decompression lever ,B.P. and F.P.
 Varying the load  Cranking the engine and
 Maintaining constant operating the decompression
speed lever
Morse test  Disconnecting engine  Varying the load
cylinders one by one by  Maintaining constant speed
operating the lever  Disconnecting engine cylinders
 Record the readings in one by one by operating the
spring balance without lever
parallax error  Record the readings in spring
balance without parallax error
368
VEHICLE DIAGNOISING
Sl.N Name of the

Key Competencies Competencies
o. Experiment
1 Wheel Balancing  Check Static  Identify tools required for
Balancing removing wheel
 Check Dynamic  Determination of Wheel diameter
Balancing and width
 Entering all the parameters in
computerized wheel balancer
 Add weights if necessary
 Run the same procedure until the
balancing is perfect
2 Wheel Alignment  Check Toe-in  Place the vehicle on rotating
 Check Toe-out plates.
 Determine the central axis
 Adjust toe-in and Toe-out
3 EngineAnalyzer  Check Engine r.p.m  Identify various tests to be

., dwell, ignition conducted .
timing and  Connect various probes
resistance of  check Engine r.p.m ., dwell,
primary winding. timing.
4 ExhaustgasAnalyzer  Note readings of  State pollutants in exhaust
forPetrol & Diesel pollutant levels emissions.
Engines  Compare with  Connect the probe to the exhaust
standards. tail pipe
 Note readings of pollutant levels
 Compare with standards
5 SparkPlugTestingby  Check intensity of  Check spark plug condition and
UsingSparkPlugClea spark electrode gap
ning&testingMachi  Clean spark plug using machine
ne  Check intensity of spark
6 Driving practice on  Foot controls  Identify foot controls of a four

light motor vehicle  Driving controls wheeler.
 Operate all controls  State the purpose of foot
simultaneously. controls.
 Operate foot controls efficiently.
 Operate steering controls.
 Operate gear shift lever.
 Identify various accessories.
 Operate all controls
simultaneously.
369
NOTE:
1. Sessional Marks will be 20 in each laboratory

2. The End Examination will be conducted separately in two laboratories each (30 + 30)
3. Internal assessment marks will be awarded based on the performance of the candidate in
each laboratory ( 20 + 20)
4. Both labs has to be appeared at a time. If a candidate did not appear for any one of the
labs, it will be treated as Absent for the entire subject.
5. A candidate is declared passed, if he gets required percentage of marks to pass a practical
subject by adding all the marks obtained in both the labs i.e., 50 % in the Practical end
examination and combined minimum of 50 % of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together.
6. If a student fails in the subject, he has to appear for both the practicals in the subsequent
examinations.
370
Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for
Code Title Periods/Week Periods for FA SA
A-508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60
S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped
1 Attitude 4 CO1
2 Adaptability 4 CO1, CO2
3 Goal Setting 4 CO1, CO2, CO3
4 Motivation 4 CO1, CO2, CO3
5 Time Management 4 CO2
6 Critical thinking 4 CO3
7 Creativity 4 CO3
8 Problem Solving 5 CO3
9 Team Work 4 CO4
10 Leadership 4 CO4
11 Stress Management 4 CO4
Total Periods 45
To understand the importance of Life skills for acceptable,

sustainable and ethical behaviour in academic, professional and
social settings
To exhibit language competence appropriate to acceptable social
Course Objectives
and professional behaviour.
To demonstrate time management, stress management, team
skills, problem solving ability to manage oneself in academic,
professional and social settings.
CO1 Demonstrates positive attitude and be able to adapt to people and events
CO2 Fixes personal and professional goals and manages time to meet targets
CO3 Exhibits critical and lateral thinking skills for problem solving.
CO4 Shows aptitude for working in teams in a stress free manner and sometimes/
very often/ mostly display leadership traits.
371
CO-PO Matrix
with CO Column 1 Mapping
No. Number Percentage (1,2,3)
%
PO1 Not directly applicable for Life Skills Course. However activities that
PO2 use content and situations from academic, professional and social
PO3 settings relevant to the Programme shall be exploited for triggering
PO4 thought and interaction in the Course.
PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3
CO3, CO 4
PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 45% 16 -59%: Level 2
CO3, CO4
PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 30% Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3, CO4
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7
CO 1   
CO 2   
CO3   
CO4   
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Activity based Question that focuses on COs and responses as exhibited through
communication has to be given marks for the following parameters
 Clarity of Thinking as Exhibited through Content

 Features of Etiquette
372
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good/ Satisfactory/ Poor’ levels of
Competence
Level of Parameters of Assessment

Competence
Clarity of thinking as exhibited through content Features of etiquette
Thinking is extremely logical and suggested course of

action is feasibile Exhibits courtesy to all most
Outstanding
Shows creativity and uniqueness appropriately with
10 Exhibits expert use of expression (organizational devices confidence
and discourse markers) that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical
Suggested course of action is feasible
Very Good Exhibits courtesy to all to a
Shows traces of creativity
8/9 considerable level.
Exhibits good expression (organizational devices and
discourse markers) that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical most of the time. Lacks Exhibits courtesy /
Good
creativity or out of the box thinking as expressed politeness to an acceptable
6/7 through content. level.
Satisfactory Thinking is logical; However expressing content is Has courtesy but often
4/5 disjointed and disorganized. fumbles with language.
Poor Thoughts as expressed through content are Fails to show courtesy to
3 or less than 3 incoherent.Language skills are very limited. others.
373
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.
S Questions based on Course Period Max Po Satisfact Go Ver Outstand

N Outcomes s Mar or ory od y ing
o. Allocat ks >3 4 /5 6/7 Go 10
ed for od
practic 8/9
al
work
1 Short presentation on GOALS
12 10
with Timeline and Action Plan
2 State what you will do in the
given situation (Assesses
adaptability and critical 12 10
thinking skills, leadership, team
skills )
3 In how many different and
creative way can you use _____
8 10
(Object) other than its primary
use
4 What solutions can you think of
13 10
for _____ problem.
Total 45 60
Note: The marks that are awarded for the student for 40 to be increased proportionally
for 60.
Learning Outcomes
1. Attitude Matters :
1.1 Understand the importance of positive attitude and the consequences of negative
attitude.
1.2 Demonstrate positive attitude in dealing with work-related issues and in personal life.
2. Adaptability….makes life easy :
2.1 Understand the significance of adaptability.
2.1 Show adaptability whenever needed, both at place of work and on personal front.
3. Goal Setting … life without a Goal is a rudderless boat!
3.1 Understand the SMART features of goal-setting.
3.2 State one’s short-term and long-term goals and spell out plans to achieve them.
374
4. Motivation … triggers success!
4.1 Comprehend the need for motivation in order to achieve success in life.
4.2 State how one is motivated in life.
4.3 Show the impact of motivation on one’s life.
5. Time Management… the need of the Hour!
5.1 Understand the value of time management and prioritizing in life
5.2 Demonstrate the effect of time management on one’s professional work.
6. Critical Thinking … logic is the key!
6.1 Distinguish between facts and assumptions
6.2 Use logical thinking in dealing with professional matters
7. Creativity … the essential you!
7.1 Understand the importance of thinking out of the box in dealing with critical issues
7.2 Solve problems using creativity / imagination
8. Problem Solving … there is always a way out!
8.1 Understand the need for and importance of problem solving.
8.2 Use logic or creativity to solve a problem at workplace or home.
9. Team Work… together we are better!
9.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
9.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
10. Leadership… the meaning of a leading!
10.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
10.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
11. Stress Management… live life to the full!
11.1 Understand what causes stress and how to cope with stress at workplace.
11.2 Demonstrate how stress can be overcome in a healthy way.
375
PROJECT WORK
Course Title Course Code Periods per week Periods per
semester
Project Work A-509 3 45
Course Code: A-509 COURSE: PROJECT WORK Total No. of Periods: 45

1. Provide with the opportunity to synthesize knowledge from various
areas of learning
2. Identify the problems in a given automobile and modify the design
COURSE OBJECTIVES
or structure of a given automobile to enhance the performance
3. Critically and creatively apply it to real life situations
4. Prepare proposal for a new design or modify and to prepare a
feasibility report for the same

C01 A-509.1 To build the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
C02 A-509.2 To Improve independent learning
C03 A-509.3 To Apply theory to practical work situations
C04 A-509.4 To gain knowledge in writing report in technical projects
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Upon Completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Problem solving and Critical Thinking

1.1. Generate Ideas from Automobile courses.
1.2. Develop these Ideas.
1.3. Gather relevant Information.
1.4. Evaluate Ideas.
1.5. Apply these ideas to a specific task.
1.6. Execute appropriate Laboratory skills
1.7. Draw Appropriate Conclusions
2.0 Communication
.2.1 Communicate effectively.
2.2 Present Ideas Clearly.
2.3 Present Ideas Coherently.
2.4 Report writing
3.0 Collaboration
3.1. Discuss the ideas.
3.2 Coordinate with team members
3.3. Team work in accomplishing the task.
376
4.0 Independent Learning
4.1. Involves in the group task.
4.2. Analyze the appropriate actions.
4.3. Compares merits and demerits
4.4. Analyze the activities for sustainability.
4.5 Analyze the activities to ensure ethics
5.0 Ethics
5.1 Give respect and value to all classmates, educators, colleagues, and others
5.2 Understand the health, safety, and environmental impacts of their work
5.3 Recognize the constraints of limited resources
5.4 Develop sustainable products and processes that protect the health, safety, and
prosperity of future generations
5.5 Maintain integrity in all conduct and publications and give due credit to the contributions
of others
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Design/Fabrication/Analysis/ Case Study Projects in the areas of Automobile Engineering and
other related areas
Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes of Project work
S.No Item Marks
Internal Marks 40
Demonstration of Assigned task in

the group to complete the project
1
End Exam Marks: 60
Demonstration of skill relevant to

the project (30)
Project Report(20)
Viva Voce(10)
Total marks 100
 End Examination assessment shall be done by both internal, external examiners and faculty
members who guided the students during project work.
377
POs – COs Mapping Format
A-509, Project Work
Course Code:A-509 Course Title: PROJECT WORK No of COs:3 No. Of

periods:45
POs Mapped with CO Periods Addressing Leve Remarks
CO No PO in Col 1 l
No % (1,2, >40% Level 3 (Highly Addressed)
3)
PO1 25% to 40% Level 2 (Moderately
PO2 CO2, CO3 5 12 1 Addressed)
PO3 CO3 6 13 1 5% to 25% Level 1
PO4 CO2, CO3,CO4 10 22 1 ( Low Addressed)
PO5 CO2, CO3,CO4 10 22 1 <5% Not Addressed
PO6 CO1, CO4 8 17 1
PO7 CO2 6 14 1
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
A-509.1 3
A-509.2 3 3 2 2 2
A-509.3 3 3 3 2 2
A-509.4 3 3 2
the following:
378
VI SEMESTER
379
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Course Title Course Code DURATION

INDUSTRIAL TRAINING A-601 6 MONTHS
Time schedule
S.NO Code TOPICS Duration
 Practical training in Industry

 Training Report Preparation Six
1 A-601 Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate, Acknowledgements, Months
Abstract, Contents(introduction of Industry, Plant Layout,
Organization Chart, List of Major Equipment’s List of Processes:
Skills Acquired, Conclusions and References
Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

1.Expose to real time working environment
2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.
Course Objectives
3. Acquire the required skills of manufacturing processes, assembling,
servicing, and supervising in the engineering fields.
4. Install the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self-confidence.
COURSE OUT CO1 Apply theory to practical work situations
COMES CO2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits
CO3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
CO4 Write report in technical projects
PO-CO Mapping
CO1 2 2 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low
Learning Outcomes
The student shall be able to display the following skill sets:
1) Technical Skills(Manufacturing/Service/Diagnosing the trouble /Maintenance)
2) Reading drawings and analysing Specifications
3) Recognize and Practice safety Measures
4) Handling Tools/Instruments/Materials/Machines
5) Assess and Control of quality parameters
6) Customer relationship and recording Skills
380
Scheme of evaluation
SI.N Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

o.
Item Nature Max. Marks
Assessment of Learning
1.First Assessment
outcomes by both the
at Industry (After 12 120
faculty and training
Weeks)
Mentor of the industry
2.Second Assessment of Learning

Industrial Assessment at the outcomes by both the
1 6 months 120
Training Industry (After 22 faculty and training
weeks) Mentor of the industry
Final Summative Training Report 20
assessment at Demonstration of any
institution level 30
one of the skills listed in
learning outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300
Weightage of marks for Assessment of Skill sets during first and second assessment.
Skill Set Max Marks Allotted

Sl.No SKILL SET For each parameter
1 Technical Skills (Manufacturing/Service/Diagnosing the 25

trouble /Maintenance etc)
2 Reading drawings and analysing Specifications 20
3 Recognize and Practice safety Measures 15
4 Handling Tools/Instruments/Materials/Machines 25
5 Assess and Control of quality parameters 15
6 Customer relationship and recording Skills 20
Total 120
During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which
the student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In
case the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be
raised to 120 marks for the given assessment i.e. either assessment 1 or 2. However the
performance of the student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than
three skill sets.
381
ILLUSTRATION
If the student has undergone training in only 4 skill sets (namely S.No. 1,3,4 and 5), and marks
awarded during assessment is 50 out of 80, then the marks of 50 shall be enhanced to 120
proportionately as 50/80X120 = 75.
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING

PROGRAMME
1. Duration of the training: 6 months (24 Weeks)

2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students may be trained in the fields
Fabrication/Manufacturing/Service/Diagnosing the trouble /Maintenance etc.
4. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance, during industrial training.
5. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training.
6. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the in faculty incharge (Guide) from
the concerned section in the institution.
7. The Industrial training shall carry a weightage of 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in
assessments at industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at
institution level put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.
8. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level,
the student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.
9. Final summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including1. Head of
the section (of concerned discipline ONLY), 2.External examiner from an industry and 3.
Faculty member who assessed the student during Industrial Training as members. Final
Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including 1. Head of
section, 2.External examinerfrom the industry and 3. Faculty members who assessed the
Guidelinesstudents
and Responsibilities
during Industrial of the faculty
Training, members who are assessing the students
as members.
‘performance during industrial training:
1. The faculty member shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.
2. Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the industry during the
training period, and shall check it is followed scrupulously.
3. Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the assessment.
4. Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions for
improvement.
5. Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per stipulated schedule.
6. Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
7. Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill set during final
assessment at institution.
8. Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials like
photographs, articles, videos etc.
382
9. Shall act as co-examiner along with external examiner.
10. Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.
11. Shall maintain a dairy indicating his observation with respect to the progress of students
learning in all three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and Affective)
Guidelines to the training mentor in the industry:
 Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
 Shall assess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the faculty member.
 Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
 Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training period.
 Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development or any
misbehaviour as the case may be.
 Every Teacher (including HoD if not holding any FAC) shall be assigned a batch of students
of 10 to 15 for industrial training irrespective of student’s placements for training.
Rubrics for Industrial Training Assessment

Department of Technical Education
Name of the Institution/ College:
PIN: Name of the student:

Skill Max Marks Precisely Completes Completes Makes
Set SKILL SET Allotted complete the task, the task, attempt,
Sl.No For each s the task mistakes Mistakes Mistakes
parameter are absent, are a few are many
but not
Precise
Technical Skills (15 M)
(i) Analytical Thinking 5 5 3 2 1
1 (ii) Creativity. 5 5 3 2 1
(iii) Problem-solving. 5 5 3 2 1
Reading Drawings and Analysing
Specifications ( 20 M)
 (i) 2 D and 3D (Computer Aided 10 10 7 6 3

2 Design) CAD/Drawings.
(ii) Knowledge of specifying the
machine member/Automobile 10 10 7 6 3
Components
Handling Tools / Instruments /

Safety Practices (15)
(i) Identification of tools and 5 5 3 2 1
3 instruments.
(ii) Measuring the parameter 5 5 3 2 1
(iii) Aware of safety Management 5 5 3 2 1
383
Trouble Shooting / Dismantling &
Assembling and of the Unit (30)
(i) Fault-Finding 5 5 3 2 1
(ii) Dismantling the given Machine/
Equipment / Engine /Automobile 10 10 7 6 3
components
4
(iii) Repair or Replacement with 5 5 3 2 1
spare parts
(iv) Assembling of the given 10 10 7 6 3
Machine/ Equipment / Engine
/Automobile components after
testing for working condition.
Quality Assessment and Control
( 15 M)
 (i) Use of various Inspection and 5 5 4 3 2
Quality Control Tools (OBD CODES)
 (ii) Identification of Proper Testing 5 5 4 3 2
5 Method and Tool for the
manufactured or Serviced or
repaired Components 5 5 4 3 2
 (iii) Analyze Test Results

Soft skills and Recording skills(25)
(i)Communication Skills 5 5 4 3 2
(oral/writing skills)
(ii) Human relations. 5 5 4 3 2
6
(iii) Supervisory abilities. 5 5 4 3 2
(iv) Recording technical issues 5 5 4 3 2
(v) Proper Maintenance of records 5 5 4 3 2
in the industry.
*Mistakes are with reference to Technique, Procedure & Precautions, while precision refers to
Technique, Procedure, Precautions, Time & Result
Total Marks: 120
Marks Awarded: __________________
(Marks awarded in words: )
Signature of the Training In-charge (Mentor) Signature of the faculty in-charge (Guide)
Name Name
Designation Designation
384

C-20 Dae

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-20 Dae

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-20 Dae

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

FOR DIPLOMA COURSES IN ANDHRA PRADESH

Highlights of Curriculum C-20:

RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-20 CURRICULUM

1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES

5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER / YEAR:

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

1 12 weeks 1.The faculty Learning outcomes as given in 120

1.The faculty 1.Demonstration of any one

10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in the

A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

b) For drawing Courses:

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on

16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT

Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer

20. MAL PRACTICE CASES:

23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

24.SPECIFIC CHANGES INCORPORATED IN PRESENT CURRICULUM C-20

Engineering - 6 180 3 40 60 100

Automobile Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100

A-309 Workshop Practice – II - 6 90 3 40 60 100

period / week Scheme of Examination

THEORY ( for a duration of 9 weeks):

A-401 Engineering 3 45 20 80 100

Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

period / week Scheme of Examination

THEORY ( for a duration of 9 weeks):

A-501 Industrial 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

A-506 CAD Practice - 6 90 3 40 60 100

Project Work - 3 45 3 40 60 100

Subject Title Subject Code Duration

S.NO Code TOPICS Duration

 Practical training in Industry

SI.N Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

2.Second Assessment of Learning

TOTAL MARKS 300

Engineering - 6 180 3 40 60 100